Visual Vocabulary G2

Grade 2
Contents
Unit 1
Unit 4
Week 1 Key Vocabulary...........................................................................1

Function Words and Phrases ................................................7
Basic Words ...............................................................................11
Week 2 Key Vocabulary........................................................................ 13
Function Words and Phrases ............................................. 19
Basic Words .............................................................................. 23
Basic Words .............................................................................. 35
Basic Words .............................................................................. 47
Basic Words .............................................................................. 59
Week 1 Key Vocabulary......................................................................179

Function Words and Phrases ...........................................185
Basic Words ............................................................................189
Basic Words ............................................................................201
Basic Words ............................................................................213
Basic Words ............................................................................225
Basic Words ............................................................................237
Unit 2
Unit 5

Basic Words .............................................................................. 71
Basic Words .............................................................................. 83
Basic Words .............................................................................. 95
Basic Words ............................................................................107
Function Words and Phrases ........................................... 115
Basic Words ............................................................................ 119

Basic Words ............................................................................249
Basic Words ............................................................................261
Basic Words ............................................................................273
Basic Words ............................................................................285
Basic Words ............................................................................297
Unit 3
Unit 6

Basic Words ............................................................................131
Basic Words ............................................................................143
Basic Words ............................................................................153
Basic Words ............................................................................165
Basic Words ............................................................................177

Basic Words ............................................................................309
Week 2 Key Vocabulary...................................................................... 311
Function Words and Phrases ........................................... 317
Basic Words ............................................................................321
Basic Words ............................................................................333
Basic Words ............................................................................345
Basic Words ............................................................................357
English Language Development Vocabulary ... 358A
How to
Use this Book
Visual Vocabulary ResourcesA New Classroom Resource
Purpose and Use
The Visual Vocabulary Resources book provides teachers using the Macmillan/McGraw-Hill California
Treasures reading program photo-word cards that visually introduce specific vocabulary from the
program. The photos are intended to preteach vocabulary to English learners and Approaching Level
students, as well as offer additional, meaningful language and concept support to these students.
The photo-word cards are designed to interrelate with the English Learners and Approaching Small
Groups lessons and the English Learner Resource lessons, all of which are designed to support the EL
and struggling reader population. The Visual Vocabulary Resources book is referenced specifically in
those lessons.
Key
Unit
Vocabulary Words
Vocab
2 Wee
ulary
k 3 Fig
hting
the Fir
In the first half of the book, the photo-word cards support three categories of vocabulary in the core
reading program:
1. Key Vocabulary These are the Key Words as introduced to the entire class in the core vocabulary
lesson and core selection. Students of all levels of language acquisition are taught these words:
Beginning, Early Intermediate, Intermediate, and Early Advanced.
2. Function Words and Phrases These are idioms, adverbs, two-word verbs, and other words
and phrases of particular use to English learners. Function Words and Phrases are also drawn
from the core selection, but will not be taught to the whole group as part of the core lesson. Students of all levels of language acquisition are taught these words: Beginning, Early
Intermediate, Intermediate, and Early Advanced.
3. Basic Words These words are chosen from the core selection, to fit a specific thematic category
that will help EL learners increase their depth of vocabulary. These words are not singled out for
instruction to the whole group. Only students at the Beginning and Early Intermediate levels of
language acquisition are taught these words.
Wor
d1
backpack, sh tank, glasses,

chalkboard, snack, trashcan
Basic Words
Unit 1 Week 1
Davids New Friends
A2V VR
_C A_U
2W 3_R
D
10_K
ey.indd
d2
flam
es
85
backpack
chalkboard
The second half of the book supports the vocabulary presented in the English Language
Development component of the California Treasures reading program. The ELD Vocabulary
presented is selected from the weekly Skill-Based English Learners Practice Reader. In the place of
the Basic Words categories, there are Content Words drawn from ELD Content Book selections.
Wor
ROUTINE
sh tank
glasses
snack
trashcan
Function Words and Phrases
Word 1
years from now
Unit 3 Week 3 Music of the Stone Age
1. Display the card.

2. Dene each word in English, referring to the photograph.
Incorporate actions where appropriate.
3. Have children say the word three times.
4. Explain how these six words t into a group, or category. During
independent work time, have children write sentences for each word.
11
MacMillan McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Stockdisc/PunchStock. (tc) Francisco Cruz/SuperStock. (tr) CMCD/Getty Images.
(bl) Photodisc/Getty Images Alex Cao/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (bm) Kevin Sanchez/Cole Group/Getty Images. (br) Stockbyte/PunchStock.
Structure of Book
The Key Vocabulary and Function Words and Phrases sections both have two photos on each right-hand
page. Each photo represents one vocabulary word. The teacher script is located on the back of each
card directly behind its accompanying photo. The Basic Words section shows six photos per page,
followed by a teacher routine. The ELD Content Words section mimics this format with 4 to 6 words per
page.
Teacher Scripts
The lessons found on the Key Vocabulary, Function Words and Phrases, and ELD Vocabulary sections are
interactive in approach. They define the vocabulary words in English and Spanish, point out cognates
(where appropriate), and provide strategies to get students talking and using the new language as
much as possible; for example students:
chorally pronounce the word to focus on articulation

partner talk with structured sentence frames to use the word in oral speech
role-play to make the word come to life and use in everyday situations
connect the word to known words and phrases through sentence replacement activities
engage in movement activities to experience the words meaning
The techniques make instruction engaging and memorable for students. These low-risk ways to practice
speaking help students make connections and develop understanding as they acquire vocabulary.
iv
Word 2
of today
safe
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
groan
Unit 1 Week 1 Davids New Friends
Word 2
excited
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
groan
Unit 1 Week 1 Davids New Friend
Point to the Word 1 image on the opposite side.
1. One word in the selection is groan. Say it

with me: groan. To groan means to make
an unhappy sound. A groan sounds like this:
(make a groaning sound). You might groan
when you are hurt or when you have to do
something that you dont like to do.
2. En espaol, to groan quiere decir hacer un
sonido de dolor o disgusto, gemir o gruir.
Uno gime cuando est herido o lesionado.
Uno grue cuando tiene que hacer algo que
no quiere.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows the
word groan. (Point to the girls ankle.) This
girl hurt her ankle. Her mother is putting a
bandage on it, but it still hurts. She groans
because her ankle hurts.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is excited. Say it

with me: excited. Excited means very happy
about something. You feel excited when
something good happens. You might feel
excited when you win a game or when you
get a present.
2. En espaol, excited quiere decir estar
emocionado o muy contento por algo. Uno
se emociona cuando algo bueno ocurre, como
cuando gana un partido o recibe un regalo.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows
the word excited. (Point to the two boys
running.) These boys are playing baseball.
They are very excited. They are each going
to score a run.
2
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Russell Illig/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Comstock Images/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets groan together. (Make a groaning
sound.) Lets groan again.
5. Lets pretend that something hurts, like this:
(Put one hand on your head, make a groaning
sound and say, My head hurts.) Say and do
it with me. (Continue with other body parts.)
7. Now lets say groan together three more
times: groan, groan, groan.
Word 2
excited
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk about the picture with your partner. How
do you know the two boys are excited? (They
look very happy. They are smiling.)
5. Tell your partner about a time you felt
excited. Use the sentence frame: I felt excited
when
.
6. Now lets say excited together three more
times: excited, excited, excited.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill
TEACHER TALK
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
whisper
Word 4
carefully
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
whisper
1. Another word in the selection is whisper.

Say it with me: whisper. To whisper means
to talk very softly. A whisper sounds like
this. (Whisper the word whisper.) You might
whisper when you tell a secret. You might
whisper when you dont want to make noise.
2. En espaol, to whisper quiere decir susurrar o
decir en voz baja. Uno susurra cuando quiere
decir un secreto o cuando no quiere hacer
ruido.
word whisper. (Point to the whispering girl.)
This girl is telling the boy something. She is
whispering it. Maybe shes telling a secret.
Maybe she doesnt want the other girl to hear.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is carefully. Say

it with me: carefully. When you do something
carefully, you do it with care or attention.
You hold something carefully when you dont
want to break it. You do something carefully
when you dont want to make a mistake.
2. En espaol, carefully quiere decir hacer algo
con cuidado o atencin, cuidadosamente.
Uno sostiene un objeto cuidadosamente
si no quiere que se parta. Haces algo
cuidadosamente cuando no quieres cometer
un error.
word carefully. (Point to the man holding the
baby.) This father is carrying his baby very
carefully. He doesnt want to hurt the baby.
He doesnt want to drop him.
4
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) image100/Jupiterimages. (b) image100/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Say, good morning to your partner.
Now whisper it, like this. (Whisper good
morning.). Tell your partner your name.
Now whisper it. Whisper something else to
your partner.
5. Talk about the picture with your partner.
What is the girl whispering to the boy?
6. Now lets say whisper together three more
times: whisper, whisper, whisper.
Word 4
carefully
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend we are carrying an egg. Hold the
egg in your hand carefully. You dont want it
to break. Lets walk across the room with our
eggs. Walk carefully. Dont break the egg!
5. Pretend you are carrying something carefully.
You dont want to break it. You dont want
to hurt it. Show the class how you carry it
carefully. What are you carrying? We will
guess.
6. Now lets say carefully together three more
times: carefully, carefully, carefully.
TEACHER TALK
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
different
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
different
TEACHER TALK
5. (Point to a big apple and a small apple.)

These two apples are different. How are they
different? Tell your partner. (Continue with
the other apples.)
6. Talk to your partner about the picture. Point
to two apples. Say how they are different. Use
the sentence frame: This apple is
and this apple is
.
7. Now lets say different together three more
times: different, different, different.
1. Another word in the selection is different. Say

it with me: different. Different means not
the same. (Hold up two crayons of different
colors.) These two crayons are not the same.
They are different. Their colors are different.
2. En espaol, different quiere decir que no
es igual, diferente, distinto. (Muestre dos
creyones de colores distintos.) Estos dos
creyones no son iguales. Son diferentes.
Son de colores diferentes.
3. Different in English and diferente in Spanish
are cognates. They sound almost the same
and mean the same thing in both languages.
4. Now lets look at a picture that shows the word
different. (Point to a red apple and a yellow
apple in the photo.) These two apples are
different. This one is red and this one is yellow.
PARTNER TALK
6
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Burke/Triolo/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
Word 1
under
Word 2
over
Word 1
under
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, under means below or beneath.

When something is under, there is something
on top of it. Say it with me: under. There is a
lot of dust under my bed.
2. En espaol, under quiere decir debajo. Si
algo est debajo, tiene algo encima. Debajo
de mi cama hay mucho polvo.
3. This picture shows the word under. The water
is owing under the bridge. The bridge is on
top of the water, so the water is below the
bridge.
4. I am going to ask some questions. Answer yes

or no.
Is the oor under your feet? (yes)
Is the sky under your head? (no)
Are tree roots under the ground? (yes)
5. Now I am going to say some sentences.
Repeat the sentences. Replace the word
beneath with under.
I keep my shoes beneath my bed.
A frog hides beneath the lily pad.
I stay dry beneath my umbrella.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: under,
under, under.
Word 2
over
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use over to describe things that

are above something else. Say it with me:
over. I hold an umbrella over my head to stay
dry.
2. En espaol, over quiere decir encima, sobre.
Pongo el paraguas sobre mi cabeza para no
mojarme.
3. This picture shows the word over. The airplane
is ying over the highway. The airplane is
ying over houses, too.
4. I am going to ask some questions. Answer

yes or no.
Is the ceiling over your head?
Do birds y over the trees?
Do you wear socks over your shoes?
5. Imagine that you are on a bridge. The bridge
is over a river. What do you see? (Call on a few
children to respond.)
6. Repeat the word three times with me: over,
over, over.
8
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Marty Honig/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Neil Beer/Photodisc/Getty Images.
Word 3
around
Word 4
right at me
Word 3
around
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. When something is around something else,

it is surrounding it. Say it with me: around.
(Walk around a chair.) I am walking around
this chair.
2. En espaol, around quiere decir alrededor.
(Camine alrededor de una silla.) Estoy
caminando alrededor de esta silla.
3. This picture shows the word around. (Point to
the Statue of Liberty and then to the island.)
The Statue of Liberty is on an island. (Use
your nger to circle the island.) The island is
around the statue.
4. Imagine that you are at the beach. What is

all around you? (Call on a few children to
respond.)
5. Look around the room. What do you see? (Ask
one or two children for their response.)
6. Repeat the word three times with me: around,
around, around.
Word 4
right at me
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. When we say the words right at me, we mean

that something is coming towards us. Say it
with me: right at me. I can see you looking
right at me.
2. En espaol, right at me quiere decir
directamente hacia m. Ustedes estn
mirando directamente hacia m.
3. This picture demonstrates the words right at
me. The soccer player is ready to kick the ball
right at the goalie. The goalie is the person
who is probably thinking, Id better be ready.
She looks like shes going to kick it right at me!
4. With your partner, think of sentences that

include the words right at me. Be creative!
5. Look right at your partner. Say to each other,
You are looking right at me!
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: right
at me, right at me, right at me.
10
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) TongRo Image Stock/Alamy Images. (b) JupiterImages/BananaStock/Alamy Image.
Basic Words
Unit 1 Week 1
Davids New Friends
backpack, sh tank, glasses,

chalkboard, snack, trashcan
backpack
sh tank
glasses
chalkboard
snack
trashcan
ROUTINE
11
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Stockdisc/PunchStock. (tc) Francisco Cruz/SuperStock. (tr) CMCD/Getty Images.
(bl) Photodisc/Getty Images Alex Cao/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (bm) Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (br) Stockbyte/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
share
Unit 1 Week 2 Mr. Putter and Tabby Pour the Tea
Word 2
enjoyed
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
share
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is share. Say it with

me: share. To share means to use things
together or to do things together. Its nice
to share things with friends. We can share toys
and books with friends.
2. En espaol, to share quiere decir compartir,
usar algo con otra persona o participar en una
actividad junto con otra persona. Podemos
compartir nuestros juguetes y libros con
nustros amigos.
word share. (Point to the girl holding the bowl
in the photo.) This girl is sharing food with her
friends. She asks them to take some food from
the bowl.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is enjoyed.

Say it with me: enjoyed. Enjoyed means had
fun. We do lots of fun things. When we tell
somebody about a fun thing, we can say, I
enjoyed it.
2. En espaol, to enjoy quiere decir disfrutar
o gozar. Es sentir felicidad o satisfaccin.
Cuando le contamos a alguien sobre algo
divertido que hicimos decimos Lo disfrut.
word enjoyed. (Point to the three girls in the
photo.) These girls went to the playground.
Look how happy they were! They enjoyed
the playground.
14
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Leland Bobbe/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (b) Purestock/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk about the picture with your partner. The
children in the picture share some things.
What do they share? (They share apples. They
share carrots. They share fruit.)
5. What things do you share with your friends?
Tell your partner. Use the sentence frame: I
share
with my friends.
6. Now lets say share together three more times:
share, share, share.
Word 2
enjoyed
PARTNER TALK
These girls enjoyed the playground. Why did
they enjoy it? (They went fast. They played
together.)
5. Remember some things you did yesterday.
What did you enjoy? Tell your partner. Use the
sentence frame: I enjoyed
.
6. Now lets say enjoyed together three more
times: enjoyed, enjoyed, enjoyed.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
wonderful
Word 4
thinning
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
wonderful
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is wonderful.

Say it with me: wonderful. Wonderful means
very, very good. We feel wonderful on a
beautiful day. We feel wonderful when we do
a good job.
2. En espaol, wonderful quiere decir
maravilloso, mgico, excelente. Usamos esta
palabra para describir algo que es muy muy
bueno. Por ejemplo, nos sentimos maravillosos
cuando hacemos un buen trabajo. Nos sentimos
maravillosos cuando hace un lindo da.
word wonderful. (Point to the girl playing the
violin. People in the audience are clapping.
They like the way she plays. She must be a
wonderful violin player.)
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is thinning.

Say it with me: thinning. Thinning means
becoming thin. When men get older, they
may lose some of their hair. It becomes thin.
2. En espaol, thinning quiere decir ralo, escaso,
que se separa ms de lo normal. Cuando los
hombres envejecen, pierden su cabello. Su
cabello se vuelve ralo.
word thinning. (Point to the mans balding
head in the photo.) This man is losing his hair.
He used to have a lot of hair, but now he has
a little hair. His hair is thinning.
16
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Purestock/Alamy Images. (b) Ryan McVay/Photodisc/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Look at the picture. This girl feels wonderful.
How do you know? Tell your partner. (She
is smiling. She is happy that people like her
music.)
5. When do you feel wonderful? Tell your
partner. Use the sentence frame: I feel
wonderful when
.
6. Now lets say wonderful together three more
times: wonderful, wonderful, wonderful.
Word 4
thinning
PARTNER TALK
4. Look at the man in the picture. How do you
know he is getting older? Tell your partner.
(His hair is thinning. His hair is gray. He has
wrinkles.)
5. Do you know some people with thinning hair?
Tell your partner. Use the sentence frame:
has thinning hair.
6. Now lets say thinning together three more
times: thinning, thinning, thinning.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
delighted
Word 6
company
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
delighted
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is delighted.

Say it with me: delighted. Delighted means
very happy about something. Nice things
make us feel delighted. I am delighted to get
an invitation to a party or a surprise from a
friend.
2. En espaol, delighted encantado o dichoso,
muy feliz por algo. Me siento dichoso cuando
recibo una invitacin a una esta o una
sorpresa de un amigo.
word delighted. (Point to the girl and the
woman in the picture.) Look at this girl and
her mother. They look very happy, dont they?
Something very nice happened to them.
They are delighted.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is company. Say

it with me: company. Company means the
people we are with. Sometimes we like to be
alone, and sometimes we like to be with other
people. When we are together with other
people, those people are our company.
2. En espaol, company quiere decir las
personas con las que nos encontramos.
Cuando nos encontramos con otras personas,
esa personas nos estn haciendo compaa.
3. Company in English and compaa in Spanish
word company. (Point to the kids in the
photo.) These children are enjoying a picnic
together. They like to have fun together.
They are each others company.
18
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Source/PunchStock. (b) PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
4. How do you look when you are delighted
about something? Show your partner.
5. Lets pretend something very nice has
happened. We just got invited to a big
birthday party. We feel delighted. Lets walk
across the room together in a way that shows
were delighted.
6. Now lets say delighted together three more
times: delighted, delighted, delighted.
Word 6
company
PARTNER TALK
5. Look at the children in the picture. They are
enjoying each others company. What do they
like to do together? Tell your partner. (eat,
drink, play ball)
6. We like to do some things alone, and some
things with company. Tell your partner three
things you like to do with company.
7. Now lets say company together three more
times: company, company, company.
Word 1
alone
Unit 1 Week 2 Mr. Putter & Tabby Pour the Tea
Word 2
together
Word 1
alone
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, use the word alone to talk about

times when you are by yourself. When you are
alone, nobody else is with you. Say it with me:
alone. Some children walk alone to school.
2. En espaol, alone quiere decir solo, sin
compaa. Algunos nios caminan solos a la
escuela.
3. Now lets look at a picture of someone who
is alone. This girl is by herself. Nobody else is
with her. She is alone.
4. Have you ever been alone? Tell your partner

about this experience. Did you like being
alone, or did you wish you were with your
family and friends?
5. With your partner, think of things you like
to do alone. For example, say, I like to read
alone, or I like to do puzzles alone.
6. Now lets say alone together three more times:
alone, alone, alone.
Word 2
together
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the word together to talk

about times when we are with someone else.
Say it with me: together. My sister and I like
to go shopping together. Its more fun than
going alone.
2. En espaol, together quiere decir con otra
persona; juntos. A mi hermana y mi nos gusta
ir de compras juntas. Es ms divertido que ir
sola.
3. Now lets look at a picture of people who are
together. These soccer players are not alone
because they are in a group. These soccer
players have come together to play soccer.
4. I am going to name some things. If they

are usually found together in a group, clap
and say the word together. If not, dont do
anything.
a bunch of grapes
the sun
ants
5. Now lets sing a song. Clap when you hear the
word together:
When we are together, together, together.
When we are together, how happy well be.
Your friends are my friends,
and my friends are your friends.
When we are together, how happy well be.
6. Now lets all say together three more times:
together, together, together.
20
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) JupiterImages/BananaStock/Alamy Images. (b) BananaStock,/PunchStock.
Word 3
with
Unit 1 Week 2 Mr. Putter & Tabby Pour the Tea
Word 4
without
Word 3
with
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, with means next to or in the

company of. When you are with someone,
you are next to that person. You are in the
same place. Say it with me: with. Some
children walk to school with their moms.
2. En espaol, with quiere decir con o cerca de
algo o alguien. Cuando ests con alguien,
ests cerca de esa persona. Estn en el mismo
lugar. Algunos nios llegan a la escuela con
sus mams.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows with.
This pizza was ordered with many toppings.
This pizza has onions and mushrooms on top.
4. Tell your partner what your favorite kind of

pizza is. Does it come with lots of toppings, or
just cheese?
5. Now tell your partner about your favorite
ice cream toppings. Do you like your ice cream
with nuts and hot fudge? with cherries? with
whipped cream?
6. Now lets say with together three more times:
with, with, with.
Word 4
without
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, without means that there is

something missing. Say it with me: without.
You will get wet if you go out in the rain
without an umbrella.
2. En espaol, without quiere decir sin; que
falta algo. Te mojars si sales a la lluvia sin
paraguas.
without. This pizza doesnt have any toppings.
This pizza is without mushrooms and onions.
It only has cheese.
4. With your partner, think of things that you

used to use, but can do without today. For
example, when you rst learned to ride a bike,
you might have used training wheels. Today,
you can ride your bike without them.
5. Now listen to these ingredients for a
sandwich: mayonnaise, mustard, ham, cheese,
pickles, onions, peppers, tomatoes. Tell your
partner how you like your sandwich. Finish
this sentence: I like my sandwich without
.
6. Now lets say without together three more
times: without, without, without.
22
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Source/PunchStock. (b) Nicole Katano/JupiterImages/ Brand X/Alamy Images.
tea, mufn, jam,

cheese, sugar, cream
Basic Words
Unit 1 Week 2
Mr. Putter & Tabby Pour the Tea
tea
mufn
jam
cheese
sugar
cream
ROUTINE
23
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) D. Hurst/Alamy Images. (tc) D. Hurst/PunchStock. (tr) Andrew Twort/Alamy Images.
(bl) Dynamic Graphics Group/PunchStock. (bm) Polka Dot Images/PunchStock. (br) The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc./Ken Cavanagh.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
local
Unit 1 Week 3 Their Native Tongue
Word 2
native
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
local
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is local. Say it

with me: local. Local means near, or in
the neighborhood. A store near your
house is a local store. A store in a far away
neighborhood is not local.
2. En espaol, local quiere decir cercano, en
el vecindario local. Una tienda cerca a su
casa es una tienda local. Una tienda en un
vecindario lejano no es una tienda local.
3. Local in English and local in Spanish are
cognates. They sound almost the same and
mean the same thing in both languages.
4. Now lets look at the picture. (Point to the
squirrel in the photo.) Look at this squirrel.
Squirrels live in many towns and cities all over
the country. If squirrels live in your town or
city, they are local animals to you.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is native. Say

it with me: native. Native means from a
particular place. People are native to the
place they are born. Plants and animals can be
native, too.
2. En espaol, native quiere decir propio de un
lugar, nativo. Las personas somos nativas
del lugar donde nacemos. Los animales y las
plantas tambin son nativos del lugar donde
se encuentran.
3. Native in English and nativo in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at the picture of the penguins
in the snowy land. (Point to the penguins in
the photo.) These penguins are from the place
in the picture. This place is called Antarctica.
The penguins are native to Antarctica.
26
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Steve Hamblin/Alamy Images. (b) Image Plan/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
5. There are streets and many other things that
are near the school. They are local to the
school. Tell your partner three things that are
local to the school.
6. Work with your partner to use the word local
in a sentence about something that is near
the school. Use the sentence frame: I like to
go to the local
.
7. Now lets say local together three more times:
local, local, local.
Word 2
native
PARTNER TALK
5. Penguins arent native to our city/town. Other
animals are native here. Talk with you partner.
Name three animals that are native here.
6. Penguins are native to a very cold place. Tell
your partner three other animals that are
native to very cold places.
7. Now lets say native together three more
times: native, native, native.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
reclaim
Word 4
ancestors
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
reclaim
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is reclaim. Say

it with me: reclaim. To reclaim means to
take back something that belongs to you.
Imagine you lost your jacket. Another person
found it and took it to the school ofce. Now
you can go to the ofce to get your jacket.
You can reclaim your jacket.
2. En espaol, to reclaim quiere decir tomar
algo que te pertenece y habas perdido,
recuperar. Imaginen que perdieron su
chaqueta. Otra persona la encontr y la llev
a la ocina del colegio. Ahora puedes ir a la
ocina y tomar tu chaqueta. Puedes recuperar
tu chaqueta.
3. Now lets look at the picture of the forest.
(Point to the new trees in the photo.) This
land belonged to the trees. But people cut
down some of the trees because they wanted
to use the land. Now new trees are growing.
The land has been reclaimed by trees.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is ancestors.

Say it with me: ancestors. Ancestors are the
people in your family who came before you.
Your grandparents are your ancestors. Their
parents and grandparents are your ancestors,
too.
2. En espaol, ancestors quiere decir las
personas en tu familia que nacieron antes que
t, ancestros. Tus abuelos son tus ancestros.
Los padres y abuelos de tus abuelos son tus
ancestros tambin.
3. Ancestors in English and ancestros in Spanish
28
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Kevin R. Morris/Corbis. (b) Bananastock/Jupiterimages.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets show what reclaim means. Everybody put
your pencil on the table in front of you. Now,
pick up a pencil, but not your pencil. Pick up
your partners pencil. Now put your partners
pencil back on the table and pick up your own
pencil. You have reclaimed your pencil.
5. Now we are going to be trees that reclaim the
land, like the trees in the picture. Everybody
stand up tall. We are all tall, tall trees. People
come to cut us down. Now we are lying on
the ground. But soon, new little trees grow.
Lets stand up like new little trees. We are
reclaiming the land. It is our land to grow on
again.
6. Now lets say reclaim together three more
times: reclaim, reclaim, reclaim.
Word 4
ancestors
PARTNER TALK
4. Now lets look at the picture of the family.
(Point to the family in the photo.) This family
has children, parents, and grandparents. The
grandparents had parents and grandparents.
They are the ancestors of the family.
5. Talk about ancestors with your partner.
Use the sentence frame: My grandmothers
is my ancestor.
6. Tell your partner one or two things you
know about your ancestors. What country or
countries did they come from? What language
or languages did they speak?
7. Now lets say ancestors together three more
times: ancestors, ancestors, ancestors.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
heritage
Word 6
traditions
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
heritage
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is heritage. Say

it with me: heritage. Heritage means the
customs of your family, your ancestors, and
your culture. Our language, our holidays, and
our food are all part of our heritage. They are
things we learned from our ancestors.
2. En espaol, heritage quiere decir las
costumbres de tu familia, tus ancestros y tu
cultura; herencia. Nuestro lenguaje, nuestras
celebraciones y nuestra comida forman parte
de nuestra herencia. Todas estas son cosas que
aprendemos de nuestros ancestros.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows what
the word heritage means. (Point to the dragon
in the photo.) A dragon is important to the
Chinese people. A parade with a dragon is
part of the Chinese heritage. It is a way the
Chinese celebrate the new year.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is traditions.

Say it with me: traditions. Traditions means
customs. Traditions are the special things
that you and your family always do, especially
to celebrate special occasions. For example, a
birthday cake is a tradition in many families.
2. En espaol, traditions quiere decir las
cosas que hace repetidamente una persona
o un grupo; costumbres o tradiciones. Lo
que hacen t y tu familia para celebrar las
ocasiones especiales son tradiciones. Por
ejemplo, la torta de cumpleaos es una
tradicin en muchas familias.
3. Traditions in English and tradiciones in
Spanish are cognates. They sound almost
the same and mean the same thing in both
languages.
30
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Alan King/Alamy Images. (b) Ariel Skelley/Corbis.
MOVEMENT
4. Parades on holidays are one way we celebrate
our heritage. Besides Chinese New Year, what
are some other holidays that people celebrate
with parades? Tell your partner.
5. A holiday parade can show different parts
of peoples heritage, like the dragon in the
Chinese parade. What are some other things
you see in parades that show something
about a heritage? Tell your partner. (Examples
include: costumes, music, dances, ags)
6. Now lets say heritage together three more
times: heritage, heritage, heritage.
Word 6
traditions
PARTNER TALK
4. Now lets look at a picture that shows a
tradition. (Point to the children in the photo.)
These children are celebrating the Fourth of
July. They always have a parade on the Fourth
of July. The Fourth of July parade is a tradition
for them.
5. Talk about other Fourth of July traditions
with your partner. Use the sentence frame:
is a tradition on the Fourth
of July.
6. What are some things you always do on
your birthday? Tell your partner two or three
birthday traditions in your family.
7. Now lets say traditions together three more
times: traditions, traditions, traditions.
Word 1
so
Word 2
why
Word 1
so
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, so means because of or as a

result of. It is used to connect two parts of a
sentence. For example: I was tired, so I took a
nap. I was thirsty, so I had a drink. Say it with
me: so.
2. En espaol, so se usa para conectar dos ideas.
Quiere decir por eso. Estaba cansada y por
eso me acost. Tena sed y por eso tom agua.
3. This picture shows how the word so is used.
This girl was hungry, so she made a sandwich.
4. I am going to say the beginning of a sentence

that you have to continue using the word so.
I had a fever, so
.
My room was messy, so
.
I missed the bus to school, so
.
5. Connect these two sentences by using the
word so.
It rained. My bike got wet.
My mom took a picture of me. I smiled.
I was bored. I played with my dog.
6. Repeat the word three times with me:
so, so, so.
Word 2
why
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use why to ask a question. Why

means for what reason; for what purpose.
Say it with me: why. The answer to a why
question usually has the word because. Why
do we wear jackets in the winter? We wear
jackets because they keep us warm when its
cold.
2. En espaol, why quiere decir por qu? Para
contestar una pregunta que empieza con por
qu, normalmente usamos la palabra porque.
Por qu usamos chaquetas en el invierno?
Usamos chaquetas porque nos abrigan del fro.
3. In this picture, these people are upside-down.
Why are they upside-down? Why are they
yelling? (They are upside-down and yelling
because they are on a roller coaster.)
4. Ask your partner questions using the word why.

Here are some examples:
Why do we go to school?
Why do we eat food?
Why do dogs bark?
5. Have a conversation with your partner. Ask
why each time they say something. See how
far you can keep the conversation going. For
example:
I went to my grandmas house
Why? Because I havent seen her in two
weeks.
Why? Because she went away.
Why? Because she wanted to visit her sister.
why, why, why.
32
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Nicole Katano/JupiterImages/ Brand X/Alamy Images. (b) Digital Vision/PunchStock.
Word 3
before
Word 4
after
Word 3
before
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. When something happens before, it happens

earlier in time. Say it with me: before. I always
eat breakfast before I go to school.
2. En espaol, before quiere decir antes; en un
tiempo previo. Siempre desayuno antes de
salir a la escuela.
3. This picture shows the word before. These
children will ride on the bus before school
starts.
4. What do you do before you leave for school?

Do you brush your teeth? Do you comb
your hair? Do you eat breakfast? Complete
this sentence: Before I leave for school,
I
. (Call on a few children to
respond.)
5. What day comes before Tuesday? What
month comes before March? What number
comes before 3?
6. Repeat the word three times with me: before,
before, before.
Word 4
after
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. When something happens after, it happens

next, or at a later time. Say it with me: after.
Summer comes after spring. Winter comes
after fall.
2. En espaol, after quiere decir despus; en un
tiempo posterior. Despus de la primavera
llega el verano. El invierno llega despus del
otoo.
3. This picture shows children running after
school. After they get home, they will have a
snack. After that, they might play outside.
4. After school, I go home and walk my dog.

What do you do after school? Tell your
partner. Complete this sentence: After school,
I
.
5. Pretend your family is having a big dinner with
all of your favorite foods. How do you feel
after you eat? Tell your partner.
after, after, after.
34
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Comstock/PictureQuest/Jupiterimages. (b) Comstock Images/Getty Images.
Basic Words
Unit 1 Week 3
Their Native Tongue
language, Native American, Hispanic,

memories, parents, relatives
language
Native American
Hispanic
memories
parents
relatives
ROUTINE
35
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) The Granger Collection, New York. (tc) Barbara Penoyar/Photodisc/Getty Images. (tr) Corbis.
(bl) Skip Nall/Photodisc/Getty Images. (bm) Bananastock/Jupiterimages. (br) Ryan McVay/Digital Vision/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
cultures
Unit 1 Week 4 Meet Rosina
Word 2
deaf
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
cultures
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is cultures. Say it

with me: cultures. Cultures are the customs
and traditions that groups of people share.
A group of people may all speak the same
language, wear the same clothes, and follow
the same traditions. Those things are part of
their culture.
2. En espaol, cultures quiere decir las
costumbres y tradiciones de un grupo de
personas, culturas. Estas costumbres de una
sociedad o grupo de personas pueden incluir
un lenguaje comn, un vestido tpico y las
mismas tradiciones. Todo esto hace parte de
su cultura.
3. Cultures in English and culturas in Spanish are
word cultures. (Point to the women in the
photo.) Look at these womens pretty skirts.
Women in their country wear that style of
skirt. It is part of their culture.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is deaf. Say it

with me: deaf. If someone is deaf he or she
cannot hear. Some deaf people can hear
a little bit. Some deaf people cannot hear
anything.
2. En espaol, deaf quiere decir sordo, que no
puede escuchar. Algunas personas sordas
pueden escuchar un poquito. Otras no
escuchan absolutamente nada.
word deaf. (Point to the children in the
photo.) These children cannot hear words,
but they can see. They use their hands to
talk to each other. Its called sign language.
38
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Andrzej Gorzkowski/Alamy Images. (b) Robin Sachs/PhotoEdit.
PARTNER TALK
5. Language is part of culture. Besides English,
you all speak another language. Tell your
partner the name of your language. Say good
morning to your partner in your language.
6. Music, clothing, food, and holidays are also
part of culture. Tell your partner something
you especially like about your culture.
7. Now lets say cultures together three more
times: cultures, cultures, cultures.
Word 2
deaf
PARTNER TALK
4. The children in the picture are using sign
language. What do you think they are talking
about? Tell your partner.
5. The children in the picture are deaf. They
cannot hear, but they can do many other
things. What can they do? Tell your partner
three things the children can do.
6. Now lets say deaf together three more times:
deaf, deaf, deaf.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
signing
Word 4
relatives
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
signing
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is signing. Say it

with me: signing. Signing means speaking in
sign language. Remember, deaf people often
speak with their hands. When they use their
hands to speak sign language, we say they are
signing.
2. En espaol, signing quiere decir hablar
o comunicarse a travs de un lenguaje de
seas. Las personas mudas y muchas personas
sordas hablan con sus manos usando este
lenguaje.
word signing. (Point to the woman in the
photo.) This woman is saying something
with her hands. She is signing.
MOVEMENT
4. Deaf people know how to use sign language.
Hearing people also sometimes sign with their
hands. Lets sign together. Say and do it with
me. Im hungry. (Pat your stomach) Good bye!
(Wave.) Im hot (Wipe your brow.)
5. Say something by signing with your hands. We
will guess what you are saying.
6. Now lets say signing together three more
times: signing, signing, signing.
Key Vocabulary
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is relatives.

Say it with me: relatives. Your relatives are
the people in your family. Your parents and
grandparents are your relatives. So are your
cousins and your brothers and sisters.
2. En espaol, relatives quiere decir parientes,
cualquier persona en tu familia. Tus padres y
abuelos son tus parientes. Tambin tus primos
y hermanos son parientes tuyos.
word relatives. (Point to little boy in the
photo.) Its the little boys birthday. His
relatives came to his birthday party. Look
at all his relatives.
relatives
PARTNER TALK
4. Look at the picture. Find the boys grandfather
and grandmother. Find more relatives. Who
are they? Tell your partner.
5. Tell your partner the names of some people
in your family. Use the sentence frame:
is my relative.
6. Now lets say relatives together three more
times: relatives, relatives, relatives.
40
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) altrendo images/Getty Images. (b) Creatas Images/PictureQuest/Jupiterimages.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
celebrate
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
celebrate
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is celebrate. Say

it with me: celebrate. To celebrate means to
have a party for a special day. We celebrate
birthdays. We celebrate holidays.
2. En espaol, to celebrate quiere decir celebrar,
tener una esta para festejar una ocasin
especial. Celebramos los cumpleaos.
Tambin celebramos los das festivos.
3. To celebrate in English and celebrar in Spanish
word celebrate. (Point to the woman getting
the cake in the photo.) Its her birthday. Her
friends and relatives are helping her celebrate.
They are giving her a birthday cake.
42
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Purestock/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
5. It feels wonderful when people celebrate with
us. Lets pretend our friends just gave us a
big birthday cake. Lets show how happy and
surprised we feel. (Demonstrate a surprised
smile and gesture.)
6. We do different things to celebrate birthdays.
For example, we eat cake. Pretend you are at
a birthday party. Act out something you do to
celebrate. We will guess what you are doing.
7. Now lets say celebrate together three more
times: celebrate, celebrate, celebrate.
Word 1
some of us
Word 2
all of us
Word 1
some of us
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, the phrase some of us means a

small group thats part of another larger
group. Say it with me: some of us. In this
classroom, some of us are girls. Some of us are
boys.
2. En espaol, some of us quiere decir algunos
de nosotros; un grupo pequeo que es parte
de uno ms grande. En este saln, algunos de
nosotros somos nias. Algunos somos nios.
3. This picture shows the phrase some of us. The
girls may be saying, Only some of us are here.
The rest of the soccer team is over there.
4. (Ask half the group to stand.) I will ask some

questions. The answer is some of us.
Who is standing up?
Who is sitting down?
5. I will ask some questions. Say some of us. Who
likes to play soccer? Who has a pet dog? Who
likes to dance?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: some
of us, some of us, some of us.
Word 2
all of us
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the phrase all of us to tell

about a whole group of people. Say it with
me: all of us. All of us came to school today.
2. En espaol, all of us quiere decir todos
nosotros; el grupo entero. El grupo entero
vino a clases hoy.
3. This picture shows the phrase all of us. These
girls are their whole soccer team. They are
probably saying, All of us are here now.
Nobody is missing.
4. Are all of us in school right now? Yes, all of us

are in school.
5. Everyone, raise your hand. All of us are raising
our hands. Now, everyone stand up. All of us
are standing up.
6. Repeat the word phrase times with me: all of
us, all of us, all of us.
44
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) JupiterImages/BananaStock/Alamy Images. (b) BananaStock/Alamy Images.
Word 3
at home
Word 4
at school
Word 3
at home
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. When you are at home, then you are in your

house. Say it with me: at home. We eat dinner
at home, and we sleep at home. I have a dog
at home.
2. En espaol, at home quiere decir en casa.
Siempre cenamos en casa. Dormimos en casa.
Tengo un perrito en casa.
3. This picture shows the phrase at home. These
people are at home. They are playing a game
on their beds.
4. Ask your partner where he or she is after

school. Ask them, Are you at home, or are
you somewhere else?
5. Tell your partner what you do when youre at
home. Do you play in your room? Do you help
with chores? Finish this sentence: When I am
at home, I
.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: at
home, at home, at home.
Word 4
at school
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. When we say the phrase at school, we mean

that we are in the building where we have
classes. Say it with me: at school. Right now,
we are at school.
2. En espaol, at school quiere decir en la
escuela, donde tomamos las clases. En este
momento, estamos en la escuela.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase at
school. These kids are at school. They are
eating lunch at school.
4. Are we at school right now? How do you

know that were at school right now? When
we are not at school, where are we?
5. Think of times when you cant be at school.
For example, I cant be at school when
Im sick. I cant be at school when Im on
vacation.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: at
school, at school, at school.
46
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Blend Images/PunchStock. (b) David Buffington/Photodisc/Getty Images.
Basic Words
Unit 1 Week 4
Meet Rosina
math, reading, writing,

sports, art, recess
math
reading
writing
sports
art
recess
ROUTINE
47
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Liquidlibrary/Jupiterimages. (tc) Photodisc/Getty Images. (tr) Thinkstock/PunchStock.
(bl) Nicola Sutton/Life File/Photodisc/Getty Images. (bm) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (br) Polka Dot Images/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
patient
Unit 1 Week 5 My Name is Yoon
Word 2
practiced
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
patient
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is patient. Say it

with me: patient. Patient means able to
wait. Sometimes we have to wait in line.
If we are patient, we wait quietly until it
is our turn.
2. En espaol, patient quiere decir que puede
esperar con calma, paciente. A veces
tenemos que esperar en una cola o la.
Si somos pacientes, esperamos calmados
y callados nuestro turno.
3. Patient in English and paciente in Spanish are
word patient. (Point to the kids in the photo.)
These boys want to play baseball, but they
have to wait their turn. They are waiting
quietly. They arent crying or running around.
They are being patient.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is practiced.

Say it with me: practiced. When we practice
something, we learn by doing it again and
again. We have to do something many times
if we want to learn how to do it well. For
example, yesterday we practiced (insert
relevant topic here, such as adding whole
numbers or spelling compound words).
2. En espaol, to practice quiere decir practicar,
aprender algo hacindolo una y otra vez.
Tenemos que repetir una actividad muchas
veces si queremos aprender a hacerla bien.
3. To practice in English and practicar in Spanish
50
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/Getty Images. (b) BananaStock/Jupiterimages.
MOVEMENT
5. Lets see if you can be patient. Pretend you
have to wait a long time for something. Sit in
your seat and be patient. Now show me how
you act when you arent patient.
6. Lets pretend we want to buy movie tickets.
Lets all stand in line. We have to wait for
a long time. Lets see how long we can be
patient.
7. Now lets say patient together three more
times: patient, patient, patient.
Word 2
practiced
PARTNER TALK
word practiced. (Point to the two boys kicking
balls in the photo.) These boys are learning
to play soccer. They want to learn to play
well. They practice every day. They practiced
yesterday, and they are practicing now.
5. Talk with your partner about why this picture
demonstrates the word practiced. (The boys are
learning to kick the ball. They want to learn to
kick well. They kick the ball many times.)
6. You learn to do many things at school and at
home. You have to practice a lot to do them
well. Tell your partner three things that you
practiced last week.
7. Now lets say practiced together three more
times: practiced, practiced, practiced.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
favorite
Word 4
wrinkled
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
favorite
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is favorite. Say

it with me: favorite. Favorite means the thing
you like the most. Maybe you have a favorite
toy that you always like to play with. Maybe
you have a favorite food that you always like
to eat.
2. En espaol, favorite quiere decir favorito o
preferido, lo que te gusta ms que los otros.
Depronto tienes un juguete favorito con el
que siempre juegas. O tal vez tienes alguna
comida favorita que preeres comer.
3. Favorite in English and favorito in Spanish are
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is wrinkled. Say

it with me: wrinkled. Wrinkled means having
many lines or folds on your skin or your
clothes. As people get older, their skin gets
wrinkled. Our clothes get wrinkled after we sit
on them for a long time.
2. En espaol, wrinkled quiere decir lleno de
lneas o pliegues, arrugado. Nuestra ropa
se pone arrugada si nos sentamos sobre ella
mucho tiempo. Cuando la gente envejece, su
piel se pone arrugada.
word wrinkled. (Point to the dog in the
photo.) Look at this dog. Hes very wrinkled.
(Point to several wrinkles.) Each line is a
wrinkle. We say the dog is wrinkled because
he has so many wrinkles.
52
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Inspirestock/PunchStock. (b) Photodisc/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
word favorite. (Point to the girl and the teddy
bear in the photo.) This girl loves her toy bear.
She likes to hold it and play with it. Look at
her face. She is very happy with her toy bear.
Its her favorite toy.
5. Tell your partner your favorite color. Tell your
partner your favorite food. Tell your partner
two more favorite things.
6. Tell your partner which part of the school day
is your favorite. Explain why.
7. Now lets say favorite together three more
times: favorite, favorite, favorite.
Word 4
wrinkled
MOVEMENT
4. This dog has a lot of wrinkles. Lets point to
each wrinkle on his leg and count them.
5. Lets make some wrinkles. Take a piece of
paper. Crush it in your hand. Now smooth it
out. Look at all the wrinkles. You made the
paper wrinkled.
6. Now lets say wrinkled together three more
times: wrinkled, wrinkled, wrinkled.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
settled
Word 6
cuddle
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
settled
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is settled.

Say it with me: settled. Settled means got
comfortable. When you sit down, you move
around a little until you feel comfortable in
your chairor until you are settled. You do
the same thing when you get in bed.
2. En espaol, to settle quiere decir
acomodarse, ponerse cmodo. Cuando
te sientas, te mueves sobre la silla un poco
hasta que te sientes cmodo en ella. Haces lo
mismo cuando te acuestas en tu cama. Esto es
acomodarse.
word settled. (Point to the dog in the photo.)
This dog looks very comfortable, doesnt he?
He is settled on the sofa. Now he will take
a nap.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets settle in our chairs. First, stand up. Now
sit down. Are you comfortable? Are you
settled?
5. Lets pretend we are tired. We are going to
take a nap. Put your arms on the table. Now
put your head down on your arms. Get settled.
Now have a nice nap!
6. Now lets say settled together three more
times: settled, settled, settled.
Key Vocabulary
Word 6
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is cuddle. Say

it with me: cuddle. To cuddle means to give
hugs. Its nice to cuddle babies. Its nice to
cuddle our pets.
2. En espaol, to cuddle quiere decir dar
abrazos, abrazar. Uno abraza a los bebs y
a sus mascotas.
word cuddle. (Point to the boy and dog in the
photo.) This boy loves his dog. He cuddles him
a lot. The dog feels soft and warm.
cuddle
MOVEMENT
4. Pretend you are holding a dog or a cat. Cuddle
your dog or cat.
5. Pretend you are holding a baby. Cuddle the
baby.
6. Now lets say cuddle together three more
times: cuddle, cuddle, cuddle.
54
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ryan McVay/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Oppenheim Bernhard/Photodisc/Getty Images.
Word 1
hardly
Word 2
quietly
Word 1
hardly
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, hardly means almost never or

not. If you are hardly sick, it means that you
are almost never sick. If you can hardly wait
for your birthday, it means that you cannot
wait. Say it with me: hardly.
2. En espaol, hardly quiere decir casi nunca;
casi no; no muchas veces. Si casi nunca te
enfermas, quiere decir que no te enfermas
muchas veces. Si casi no puedes esperar hasta
tu cumpleaos, quiere decir que es difcil
esperar.
3. This picture shows the word hardly. This
family looks like theyre excited to leave
somewhere. They cannot wait. They can
hardly wait to go.
4. I am going to say some sentences. You have

to replace the word always with hardly.
I can always stay awake.
I can always t into my old shoes.
I can always nish dinner.
5. What do you hardly ever do? Make up your
own sentences using the word hardly and
share with the class. (Responses include: I
hardly eat peas. I am hardly at my grandmas
house. I hardly play with my old toys.)
6. Repeat the word three times with me: hardly,
hardly, hardly.
Word 2
quietly
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, quietly means with very little

noise. Say it with me: quietly. If you work
quietly, I cant hear you working.
2. En espaol, quietly quiere decir
silenciosamente; sin hacer mucho ruido. Si
hacen tu trabajo silenciosamente, casi no los
oigo.
3. This picture shows the word quietly. These
children arent making much noise when
theyre painting. They are painting quietly.
4. Pretend you are a mouse that needs to creep

around a sleeping cat to get into your mouse
hole. Do you move quietly or noisily? Show
how you move quietly.
5. What are some things you need to do quietly?
Some examples are: I need to sit quietly when
the teacher is talking. I need to talk quietly so
I wont disturb anyone.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: quietly,
quietly, quietly.
56
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockbyte/Getty Images. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
Word 3
after school
Word 4
back in school
Word 3
after school
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. When the last bell tells us that school is out

for the day, it is after school. Say it with me:
after school. After school, it is time to go
home to do other things.
2. En espaol, after school quiere decir despus
de clases. Despus de clases, es hora de irnos
a casa para hacer otras cosas.
3. This picture shows the phrase after school.
The last bell rang! After school, these kids like
to run around and play.
4. Pretend you had a long day, and youre

really tired. I just dismissed you from class.
What does your face look like when its after
school?
5. Some kids play sports after school. Some
kids do their homework right after school.
What do you do after school? (Call on a few
students to share.)
6. Repeat the words three times with me: after
school, after school, after school.
Word 4
back in school
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. When we use the phrase back in school, we

mean that we are sitting in class again. Say
it with me: back in school. After summer
vacation, we are back in school.
2. En espaol, back in school quiere decir de
regreso a clases. Despus de las vacaciones
de verano, es hora del regreso a clases.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase back
in school. These children probably just came
back from summer vacation. They are back in
school now.
4. Pretend you just had a long summer vacation,

and you were able to sleep late and play every
day. But now, you are back in school. How do
you feel? tired? excited?
5. When you get out of school for the day, you
are usually back in school the next morning.
When are you not back in school the next
morning? (Im not back in school the next
morning if its a Friday. Im not back in school
if Im sick.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: back
in school, back in school, back in school.
58
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Polka Dot Images/PunchStock. (b) Laurence Mouton/PhotoAlto/Jupiterimages.
Basic Words
Unit 1 Week 5
My Name Is Yoon
alphabet, lines, circle,

letter, drawing, symbol
alphabet
lines
circle
letter
drawing
symbol
ROUTINE
59
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Susan LeVan/Photodisc/Getty Images. (tc) Gary S Chapman/Photographers Choice RF/Getty Images. (tr) McGraw-Hill Companies.
(bl) Polka Dot Images/Jupiterimages. (bm) Ken Cavanagh, photographer/McGraw-Hill Companies. (br) Clark Dunbar/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
exclaimed
Unit 2 Week 1 Babus Song
Word 2
concern
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
exclaimed
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is exclaimed. Say

it with me: exclaimed. Exclaimed means
shouted or said something with excitement.
When you see something very good or very
surprising, you might exclaim, Wow!
2. En espaol, to exclaim quiere decir gritar
o decir algo en voz alta con entusiasmo,
exclamar. Si uno v algo muy bueno o
sorprendente podra exclamar, Caramba!
3. To exclaim in English and exclamar in Spanish
4. Now lets look at a picture that shows the word
exclaimed. (Point to the parents in the photo.)
This child has just learned how to ride his bike
without training wheels. They felt very excited
about it. They all exclaimed, Yay!
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is concern. Say

it with me: concern. Concern means care or
worry. For example, if your friend seems sad,
you might feel concern about him or her. If
you ask your friend whats wrong or how you
can help, you are showing your concern.
2. En espaol, concern quiere decir cuidado
o preocupacin. Por ejemplo, si tu amigo
parece estar triste, podras sentir preocupacin
por l o ella. Si le preguntas qu tiene o en
qu le puedes ayudar, le ests mostrando a tu
amigo tu preocupacin.
word concern. (Point to the bandage in the
photo.) This little boy hurt himself. His mother
is showing her concern because he is hurt. She
wants him to feel better, so she is putting a
bandage on him.
62
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Cohen/Ostrow/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (b) Stockdisc/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
5. Look at the picture again. What do you think
the kids are excited about? Tell your partner.
Then tell your partner what you think they
exclaimed. (Examples include: Hooray! Yes! Oh
yeah.)
6. Now think about a time you were excited. Tell
your partner about it. Tell what happened and
what you exclaimed.
7. Now lets say exclaimed together three more
times: exclaimed, exclaimed, exclaimed.
Word 2
concern
PARTNER TALK
4. Imagine you and your partner have a sick
friend. What can you do to show your
concern? What can you say? (Examples
include: Give a hug. Ask whats wrong. Try to
help.)
5. Pretend your partner is feeling sad. Use your
body, your face, and your words to show your
concern.
6. Now lets say concern together three more
times: concern, concern, concern.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
vendors
Word 4
figure
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
vendors
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is vendors. Say

it with me: vendors. Vendors are people who
sell things. Sometimes we see vendors selling
things on the street or at a market.
2. En espaol, vendors quiere decir personas
que venden un producto, vendedores. A
veces vemos vendedores en la calle o en un
mercado ofreciendo sus productos.
3. Vendors in English and vendedores in Spanish
word vendors. (Point to the two girls in the
photo.) These girls are selling lemonade.
They are lemonade vendors.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is gure. Say it

with me: gure. Figure means a drawing or
model of a person or animal. If you draw a
person, thats a gure.
2. En espaol, gure quiere decir un dibujo o
modelo de una persona o un animal, gura.
Cuando dibujas a una persona, haces una
gura.
3. Figure in English and gura in Spanish are
word gure. (Point to the snowman in the
photo.) Look at this snowman. Its not a real
person. Its a model of a person. Its a gure.
These two children made it.
64
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Royalty-Free/Corbis. (b) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages.
PARTNER TALK
5. Talk about the picture with your partner. How
do you know these girls are vendors?
6. Pretend your partner is a lemonade vendor.
You want to buy lemonade. What do you say
to the vendor? What does the vendor say to
you?
7. Now lets say vendors together three more
times: vendors, vendors, vendors.
Word 4
figure
MOVEMENT
5. Lets make gures. Take a piece of paper and
a pencil. Draw a gure of a boy. Draw a gure
of a girl.
6. Lets make a gure of an animal. Draw your
favorite animal.
7. Now lets say gure together three more
times: gure, gure, gure.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
collection
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
collection
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is collection. Say

it with me: collection. A collection is a group
of things. Some people have a collection
of cards. Some people have a collection of
dolls or of pretty stones. Many people make
collections of things they like.
2. En espaol, collection quiere decir
agrupacin o grupo de cosas, coleccin. Hay
personas que tienen colecciones de muecas
o de piedras bonitas. Muchas personas hacen
colecciones de las cosas que ms les gustan.
3. Collection in English and coleccin in Spanish
word collection. (Point to the cards in the
photo.) Look at all these cards. These are
baseball cards. This boy really likes baseball
cards. He has a big baseball card collection.
66
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ed-imaging/McGraw-Hill Companies.
PARTNER TALK
What do you think the boy does with his
collection of cards? (Possible answers: He
looks at them. He shows them to his friends.
He plays games with them.)
6. Do you have any collections? Tell your partner
about your collections, or about your familys
and friends collections.
7. Now lets say collection together three more
times: collection, collection, collection.
Word 1
past
Word 2
into
Word 1
past
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, if you go past something, then you

have gone farther than it. Say it with me: past.
Watch me walk past this desk. (Walk past the
desk.) I walked farther than the desk. The
desk is behind me now.
2. En espaol, past quiere decir pasar por el
lado. Voy a pasar por el lado del escritorio.
(Pase al lado del escritorio.) Ya estoy ms all
del escritorio. El escritorio qued atrs.
3. This picture shows some children going past
something. These children are running past
some trees. Soon, the trees will be behind the
children.
4. Imagine you are walking to the playground

from our classroom. What places do you walk
past on the way there? Take turns telling
your partner what places you walk past. For
example: First we walk past the cafeteria.
Then we walk past the
.
5. Now imagine you are walking to school from
your house. What places do you walk past?
Tell your partner.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: past,
past, past.
Word 2
into
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use the word into to talk about

going inside something. Say it with me: into.
When you go into your house, you go inside
of your house.
2. En espaol, into quiere decir dentro de.
Cuando entras a tu casa, ests dentro de ella.
3. This picture shows the word into. This ball
went into the net. The ball is inside of the net
now. I think the goalie is upset that the ball
went into the net. He couldnt stop the ball
from going into the net.
4. Imagine that someone walked into our

classroom. Whats the rst thing that person
would see? Finish this sentence with your
partner: As you walk into our classroom, you
will see
.
5. Look around the classroom. Find an object
you can put into something else. Your partner
will tell the class what you did. (Jinny put the
pencil into her desk.)
6. Repeat the word three times with me: into,
into, into.
68
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) JupiterImages/ Comstock Images/Alamy Images. (b) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
Word 3
toward
Word 4
after
Word 3
toward
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, toward means in the direction

of. Say it with me: toward. Watch as I walk
toward the door. I walk to the door.
2. En espaol, toward quiere decir hacia; en la
direccin de. Voy a caminar hacia la puerta.
Camino en la direccin de la puerta.
3. This picture shows someone going toward a
net. This soccer player is going toward the
net. He will kick the ball toward the net.
Maybe the ball will go into the net.
4. Lets all face toward the windows. Lets turn

our bodies to look at the windows.
5. Now lets all look up, toward the ceiling. Lets
look in the direction of the ceiling.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: toward,
toward, toward.
Word 4
after
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, if you run after someone, then

you run behind that person, or you look for
that person. Say it with me: after. My dog ran
away. I am going after him.
2. En espaol, to go after something quiere decir
perseguir; buscar. Si persigues a alguien,
ests corriendo detrs de esa persona. Mi
perro se escap. Voy a buscarlo.
3. This picture shows the word after. This boy
is running after his sister. Maybe he wants to
catch her. Maybe they are playing tag.
4. I am going to name some games. Think about

how you play them. If you run after someone,
say you run after someone. If not, say nothing.
hide and seek
tag
soccer
jump rope
5. Now Im going to describe some situations.
Listen carefully and tell me what I should do.
My sister challenged me to a race, and then
she started running. What should I do? (Run
after her!)
My dog grabbed my sandwich and ran away.
What should I do? (Run after him!)
6. Repeat the word three times with me: after,
after, after.
70
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) ColorBlind Images/Blend Images/Corbis/Corbis. (b) Big Cheese Photo/PunchStock.
net, goal, ball,

uniform, soccer, eld
Basic Words
Unit 2 Week 1
Babus Song
net
goal
ball
uniform
soccer
eld
ROUTINE
71
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) BananaStock/Alamy Images. (tc) image100/PunchStock. (tr) Image Source/PunchStock
(bl) Jupiterimages/BananaStock/Alamy Images. (bm) Jupiterimages/BananaStock/Alamy Images. (br) image100/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
finally
Unit 2 Week 2 Toms and the Library Lady
Word 2
thorny
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
finally
1. One word in the selection is nally. Say it

with me: nally. Finally means at last. Some
things take a long time to nish. You work
and work, and when you are nished, you can
say, I nally nished!
2. En espaol, nally quiere decir por n,
nalmente. Algunas cosas tardan mucho en
terminarse. Trabajas y trabajas y ya, cuado has
terminado, exclamas, Por n lo termin!
3. Finally in English and nalmente in Spanish are
word nally. (Point to the girl in the photo.)
This girl worked hard to nish her homework.
She worked and worked. She is nally
nished. Look how happy she is.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is thorny. Say it

with me: thorny. Thorny means covered with
thorns. Some plants have thorns. Thorns are
sharp. If you touch a thorny plant, it hurts.
2. En espaol, thorny quiere decir lleno de
espinas, espinoso. Algunas plantas, como las
rosas, estn llenas de espinas. Las espinas son
puntiagudas. Te puedes lastimar si tocas una
planta espinosa.
word thorny. (Point to a few thorns on the
plant in the photo.) Look at all these thorns.
This plant has a lot of thorns. Its a very
thorny plant.
74
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Dynamic Graphics/Jupiterimages. (b) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
5. We are going to do a big job. At the end, we
will say, Finally! Take a piece of paper and
write your name ve times. One, two three,
four, ve. Is everybody nished? Finally, we
nished! Say it with me: Finally!
6. Now we are going to walk in a line. Walk
with me, slowly and carefully, all around the
room. Keep walking. Now everybody sit down.
Finally, we sat down. Say it with me: Finally!
7. Now lets say nally together three more
times: nally, nally, nally.
Word 2
thorny
MOVEMENT
4. Thorns are sharp. They can hurt you. Lets
pretend the plant in the picture is a real plant.
Lets touch some thorns. Ouch! That hurts!
Say it with me: Ouch! That plant is thorny!
5. Pretend that your pencil is a thorny plant.
Pick it up. What do you say and do?
6. Now lets say thorny together three more
times: thorny, thorny, thorny.
TEACHER TALK
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
eager
Word 4
glaring
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
eager
1. Another word in the selection is eager. Say it

with me: eager. Eager means excited about
doing something. Maybe you feel eager
when you plan to go to a party or take a trip.
2. En espaol, eager quiere decir deseoso o
ansioso por hacer algo. Tal vez te sientes
deseoso cuando haces planes para ir a una
esta o viajar.
word eager. (Point to the people on the
chairlift in the photo.) This family is riding to
the top of the mountain. When they get to
the top, they will ski down. It will be a lot of
fun. They are eager to ski down the mountain.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is glaring. Say

it with me: glaring. Glaring means looking at
someone with anger. Sometimes when we
are very angry, we glare, like this. (Glare). Im
glaring.
2. En espaol, to glare quiere decir mirar a
alguien con disgusto. A veces, cuando
estamos muy enfadados, miramos a alguien
con disgusto as. (Mire con disgusto.)
word glaring. (Point to the girls eyes in the
photo.) This girl is staring, and she is frowning.
She is glaring because something made
her angry.
76
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Royalty-Free/Corbis. (b) Barbara Penoyar/Photodisc/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
How do you know the family is eager to ski?
(They are smiling. They look happy. They are
probably talking about skiing.)
5. Think about the things you will do later today
or tomorrow. What are you excited about
doing? Tell your partner. Use the sentence
frame: I am eager to
.
6. Now lets say eager together three more
times: eager, eager, eager.
Word 4
glaring
MOVEMENT
4. Lets practice glaring. Pretend that you are
angry. Now, glare.
5. When we glare, we use our face to show our
anger. We can use our body too. Some angry
people do this. (Put hands on hips and glare).
Do it with me. Or this. (Make tight sts and
glare.) Do it with me.
6. Now lets say glaring together three more
times: glaring, glaring, glaring.
TEACHER TALK
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
peeked
Word 6
lap
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
peeked
1. Another word in the selection is peeked. Say

it with me: peeked. Peeked means looked
at something quickly. Sometimes you want
to take a secret look at something. You peek
quickly, then turn your face away, like this.
(Peek at something, then turn face away.)
2. En espaol, to peek quiere decir mirar algo
rpidamente y a escondidas, dar un vistazo.
A veces quieres mirar algo sin que nadie ms
se d cuenta. Das un vistazo rpidamente y
mueves tu cabeza hacia el lado opuesto, as.
(D un vistazo y vuelva su cabeza hacia el
otro lado.)
word peeked. (Point to the girl and the fan.)
This girl is holding a very big fan. She peeked
quickly over the top. Then she hid her face
behind the fan. Nobody saw her peek.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets peek. Put your hands over your eyes.
Now, peek! You peeked.
5. Lets peek again. Fold your arms on the table.
Hide your face in your arms. Now try to peek
without me noticing. Ill tell you if I see you
peek. (Name), you peeked!
6. Now lets say peeked together three more
times: peeked, peeked, peeked.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is lap. Say it

with me: lap. To lap means to drink like a
dog. Dogs and other animals drink with their
tongues, like this. (Mime lapping.) They cant
drink out of a glass like we do.
2. En espaol, to lap quiere decir tomar agua
como un perro, beber a lengetazos. Los
perros y otros animales beben agua con sus
lenguas, as. (Demuestre la accin.) No pueden
beber agua de un vaso como nosotros.
word lap. (Point to the dog in the photo.) This
dog is drinking water from the dish. Look at
the dog lap the water with its tongue.
78
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Sean Justice/Corbis. (b) ImageSource/PunchStock.
Word 6
lap
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend we are dogs. Weve been playing
in the sun, and now we are very hot and
thirsty. Lets each hold our hands in front of
us like a bowl. Now lets lap water from the
bowls like thirsty dogs.
5. Lets pretend that we are little kittens. We
are hungry. Lets make bowls with our hands
again. Lets lap milk from the bowl like hungry
little kittens.
6. Now lets say lap together three more times:
lap, lap, lap.
TEACHER TALK
Word 1
for a long time
Word 2
bump-bumped along
Word 1
for a long time
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, if we say something is done for a

long time, then it is done for more minutes
or hours than usual. Say it with me: for a long
time. At an amusement park, you sometimes
have to wait in line for a long time to get on a
ride. You wait and wait and wait.
2. En espaol, for a long time quiere decir por
mucho tiempo; minutos u horas ms de lo
normal. En un parque de diversiones, a veces
hay que esperar mucho tiempo en la la para
subirse a un juego mecnico. Hay que esperar
y esperar.
3. This picture shows the phrase for a long time.
This girl is practicing on her piano. She has
to practice for a long time to get better. Do
you think she practices for ve minutes or
an hour?
4. Im going to name some things we do. If

its something we do for a long time, longer
than one hour, stretch your arms like this
(Demonstrate outstretched arms.) and say the
phrase for a long time.
We sleep at night.
We are in school.
We drink a glass of water.
We listen to a song on the radio.
Repeat the sentences, but use for a long time.
I talked on the phone for two hours!
I waited for the bus for an hour!
I walk every morning for 90 minutes.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: for a
long time, for a long time, for a long time.
Word 2
bump-bumped along
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, if we say something bumped along,

we mean it moved with jerks or jumps. When
a car goes over railroad tracks, it bumps along.
It moves across the tracks with little jumps. By
repeating the word bump, in bump-bumped
along, the words feel like theyre bumping
along, too. Say it with me: bump-bumped
along.
2. En espaol, to bump-bump along quiere decir
moverse a brinquitos. Cuando un coche
cruza las rieles de tren, se mueve a brinquitos.
Cruza dando brinquitos.
3. This picture shows the phrase bump-bumped
along. This boy rides a mountain bike over the
dirt and rocks. The bike bump-bumped along
down the hills.
4. Im going to name some activities. If the

activity involves something bump-bumping
along, say bump, bump, bump.
golf (yes)
ice hockey (yes)
swimming (no)
running (no)
soccer (yes)
5. Think of something else that might bumpbump along. Tell us about it.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me:
bump-bumped along, bump-bumped along,
bump-bumped along.
80
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) vocal image communications/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (b) Nicole Katano/JupiterImages/ Brand X/Alamy Images.
Word 3
brightly
Word 4
softly
Word 3
brightly
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, if we say someone smiles brightly,

we mean that person has a big, lively smile.
Say it with me: brightly. Brightly means
shining with lots of light but it can also
mean in a lively or cheerful way.
2. En espaol, brightly quiere decir radiante;
con brillo. Radiante quiere decir con mucha
luz, pero tambin quiere decir vivo o
alegre. Una persona puede tener una sonrisa
radiante.
3. This picture shows the word brightly. This
boy is smiling brightly. His smile is big and
cheerful.
4. Im going to name some things. If they shine

brightly, shield your eyes from the brightness.
If not, dont do anything.
new snow after a snowstorm
the sun on a hot summer day
a night with no moon
a big ashlight
5. Now I am going to say some words. If they
mean the same thing as brightly, give a
thumbs-up. If not, give a thumbs-down.
angrily
lively
cheerfully
sadly
brightly, brightly, brightly.
Word 4
softly
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, if we say something is done softly,

we mean it is done gently or quietly. Say it
with me: softly. When you talk in a low voice
or a whisper, you speak softly.
2. En espaol, softly quiere decir suavemente.
Cuando hablas en voz baja, hablas
suavemente.
3. This picture shows the word softly. This
ballerina moves softly across the stage. Her
soft satin shoes make no noise. If her shoes
had heels and a hard sole, she would move
loudly across the stage.
4. Lets imagine what softly means. I am going

to describe some situations and you show me
what they mean:
I speak softly to my friend.
I pet a kitten softly.
I walk softly when Mom is sleeping.
I close the door softly.
5. Lets pretend we are blowing bubbles. Lets
blow the bubbles softly. Dont let them break!
6. Repeat the word three times with me: softly,
softly, softly.
82
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) G.K. and Vikki Hart /Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
Basic Words
Unit 2 Week 2
Toms and the Library Lady
pick, look for, open,

check out, read, listen
pick
look for
open
check out
read
listen
ROUTINE
83
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Yellow Dog Productions/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (tc) Comstock Images/Alamy Images. (tr) Photodisc/Getty Images
(bl) SW Productions/Photodisc/Getty Images. (bm) BananaStock/PunchStock. (br) SW Productions/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
safe
Unit 2 Week 3 Fighting the Fire
Word 2
flames
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
safe
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is safe. Say it with
me: safe. Safe means cant get hurt. For
example, if you wear a warm coat on a cold
day, you are safe from the cold. The cold cant
hurt you.
2. En espaol, safe quiere decir que no se
puede lastimar, a salvo de peligro o dao.
Por ejemplo, si te pones un saco en un da
fro, ests a salvo del fro. El fro no te puede
lastimar.
3. Now lets look at a picture that keeps us safe.
(Point to the helmets in the photo.) These
helmets keep the children safe when they ride
their bicycles. If one child falls, her head wont
get hurt because she has a helmet.
4. The children want to be safe on their bicycles.

They wear helmets. What more can they do
to be safe on their bicycles? Tell your partner.
(Example include: Watch out for cars. Ride
slowly. Ride carefully.)
5. How can you be safe when you walk outside?
Tell your partner. (Examples include: Stay on
the sidewalk. Watch for cars. Stay with an
adult.)
6. Now lets say safe together three more times:
safe, safe, safe.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
PARTNER TALK
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is ames. Say

it with me: ames. Flames means pieces of
re. A re is made of many ames. Flames
are very hot. They can burn you.
2. En espaol, ames quiere decir pedazos de
fuego, llamas. Un incendio est compuesto
por muchas llamas. Las llamas son muy
calientes. Te pueden quemar.
3. Now lets look at a picture of ames. (Point to
different ames in the photo.) These ames
are burning the grass. Soon they will burn the
tree. They are very hot. It isnt safe to stay
near ames.
flames
4. Talk about the ames in the picture with your

partner. Tell what they look like and feel like.
5. Pretend you are in the picture. You see the
ames. What do you do? (Examples include:
Run away. Call for help. Put water on the
ames.)
6. Now lets say ames together three more
times: ames, ames, ames.
86
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stuart Pearce/Pixtal/age fotostock. (b) Mark Gibson/Digital Vision/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
forest
Word 4
heat
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
forest
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is forest. Say it
with me: forest. Forest means a place where
there are a lot of trees. Forests are in places
away from cities. There are many animals in a
forest, but few people.
2. En espaol, forest quiere decir un lugar con
muchos rboles, un bosque. Los bosques
estn alejados de la ciudad. Hay muchos
animals en los bosques, pero pocas personas.
3. Now lets look at a picture forest. (Point to
several trees in the photo.) Look at all these
trees. This picture shows us just a small part
of the forest. There are many, many trees in
the forest.
4. Have you ever visited a forest with your

family? Have you ever read a story or fairytale
that takes place in a forest? Tell your partner
about a time you have visited or read about
a forest. Tell your partner what it was called
and what it was like.
5. First, take a minute to draw a picture of what
you think a forest looks like. Now take turns
with your partner showing him or her your
picture. Tell your partner what you put in the
forest and why.
6. Now lets say forest together three more
times: forest, forest, forest.
Key Vocabulary
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is heat. Say it

with me: heat. When something is hot, it has
heat. Something that is hot gives off a lot of
heat. A re in a forest is very hot. It makes a
lot of heat.
2. En espaol, heat quiere decir calor. Algo que
est caliente emite calor. Un incendio en un
bosque es muy caliente. El incendio produce
mucho calor.
3. Now lets look at a picture of something
that makes heat. (Point to the ames in the
photo.) These ames make heat. The heat will
cook food in the pan by making it very hot.
heat
MOVEMENT
4. On a hot day, there is a lot of heat. Lets show
how we act on a day with a lot of heat. Do it
with me. (Wipe brow. Fan face with hands.)
5. We use heat to cook food. Then the food is
very hot. Pretend you are eating hot soup. Eat
carefully!
6. Now lets say heat together three more times:
heat, heat, heat.
88
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Bruce Heinemann/Stockbyte/Getty Images. (b) Steve Allen/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
PARTNER TALK
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
containers
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
containers
TEACHER TALK
4. With your partner, look around the classroom.

What containers do you see? Choose one to
show the class.
5. Draw a picture of two or three containers.
Show the picture to your partner. Tell
your partner what you can put inside your
containers.
6. Now lets say containers together three more
times: containers, containers, containers.
1. Another word in the selection is containers.

Say it with me: containers. Containers are
things that hold other objects. Boxes are
containers. Cans, bottles, glasses, and jars are
containers.
2. En espaol, containers quiere decir objetos
en los que puedes guardar otras cosas,
recipientes. Las cajas son recipientes. Las
latas, las botellas, los vasos y los frascos o
tarros son recipientes tambin.
3. Now lets look at a picture of different
containers. (Point to the containers in the
photo.) These containers hold different
kinds of food. (Point to the jar of rice.) This
container holds rice. (Point to the jar of
beans.) This container holds beans.
PARTNER TALK
90
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockbyte/Getty Images.
Word 1
close
Word 2
nearby
Word 1
close
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, if two things are close, then there

is not much space between them. Say it with
me: close. [Name]s desk and [Name]s desk are
very close together.
2. En espaol, close quiere decir cerca de;
prximo a; sin mucho espacio de por medio.
Los escritorios de estos dos nios quedan muy
cerca.
3. This picture shows the word close. These two
houses are close together. There is not much
space between them. Houses in the city are
often very close together.
4. Sit close to your partner. Now sit far from your

partner.
5. Put your hand close to your heart. What do
you feel?
6. Repeat the word three times with me: close,
close, close.
Word 2
nearby
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, if something is nearby, then it is

close or near. Say it with me: nearby. Its nice
to have a park nearby, isnt it? What else do
we have nearby?
2. En espaol, nearby quiere decir cerca, a
la mano. Es bonito tener un parque cerca,
verdad? Qu otro lugar nos queda cerca?
3. This picture shows the word nearby. This boy
has his classmate nearby in case he needs
help. I think he likes having his friend nearby.
4. Think about what other buildings or

businesses are close to our school. Take turns
with your partner telling what is nearby.
5. Now think about what is around your home.
Ask your partner to imagine he or she is at
home with you. Tell him or her what is nearby.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: nearby,
nearby, nearby.
92
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Philip Coblentz/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (b) Bill Aron/PhotoEdit.
Word 3
give off
Word 4
get away
Word 3
give off
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, to give off means to put or send

out. Say it with me: give off. Fires give off
heat and smoke. Skunks give off a bad smell.
2. En espaol, to give off quiere decir despedir;
soltar. El fuego despide calor y humo. Un
zorrillo despide un mal olor.
3. This picture shows the phrase give off. This
rocket gives off a lot of smoke and heat. As it
launches, it sends out smoke in all directions.
4. Help me nish these sentences:

A re gives off
.
A rotten egg gives off
.
A car running down the road gives off
.
5. Lets think about things that give off a bad
smell. A skunk gives off a strong smell. What
else gives off a strong smell? (Examples
include garbage, gasoline, bleach, and garlic.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: give
off, give off, give off.
Word 4
get away
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, get away means to escape or run

from someone or something that may hurt
you. Say it with me: get away. When a mouse
runs from a cat, it is trying to get away.
2. En espaol, to get away quiere decir
escaparse o alejarse de algo o alguien que
pueda lastimarte. Cuando un ratn huye de
un gato, est tratando de escaparse.
3. This picture shows the phrase get away. These
buildings have re escapes on the outside.
The re escapes help people get away if there
is a re.
4. I am going to describe some situations. If you

should not stay, say the phrase get away. If
you want to stay, say the word stay.
There is a re in the school.
We are having a party in the classroom.
It starts to rain hard while you are outside.
A big dog is barking at you.
5. What kinds of animals should you get away
from? (Examples include mean dogs, tigers,
snakes, bees, or sharks.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: get
away, get away, get away.
94
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Pixtal/age fotostock. (b) image100/Corbis.
Basic Words
Unit 2 Week 3
Fighting the Fire
reghter, helicopter, engine company,

rehouse, reboat, re truck
reghter
helicopter
engine company
rehouse
reboat
re truck
ROUTINE
95
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Comstock/Jupiterimages. (tc) Michael Turek/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (tr) ThinkStock LLC/Index Stock Imagery
(bl) Stockbyte/Getty Images. (bm) Corbis Premium RF/Alamy Images. (br) Tom Carter/PhotoEdit.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
collectors
Unit 2 Week 4 One Grain of Rice
Word 2
store
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
collectors
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is collectors. Say it

with me: collectors. Collectors means people
who make collections. Collectors make
collections, or groups, of things they like or
need. Farmers are collectors of food.
2. En espaol, collectors quiere decir
las personas que hacen colecciones,
coleccionistas. Los coleccionistas hacen
colecciones, o grupos de cosas que les
gustan o que necesitan. Los granjeros son
coleccionistas de alimentos.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows some
collectors. (Point to the pinecones in the
photo.) Look at this collection of pinecones.
This boy and his friends found pinecones and
put them together in a group. The children
are pinecone collectors.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is store. Say

it with me: store. To store means to keep
something to use later. We store things that
we will use later. For example, when you nish
drawing, you store the crayons in a box. Then
you can use the crayons again later.
2. En espaol, to store quiere decir guardar
algo para usarlo despus, almacenar. Por
ejemplo, cuando terminas de hacer un dibujo,
almacenas todos los creyones en una caja.
Cuando los quieras volver a usar, los puedes
sacar de la caja.
something that has been stored. (Point to
the food in the photo.) People store food in
a refrigerator. The refrigerator keeps the
food cold.
98
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/Jupiterimages. (b) amana productions inc./Getty Images.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets be collectors. Everybody put your pencil
in the middle of the table. Look at our pencil
collection. We are pencil collectors.
5. With a partner, collect at least three objects
from our classroom for another collection. Tell
the class what kind of collector you are.
6. Now lets say collectors together three more
times: collectors, collectors, collectors.
Word 2
store
PARTNER TALK
4. Look at the picture of the refrigerator. What
food is stored there? Tell your partner.
5. Tell your partner about things you store at
home. Where do you store your clothes?
Where do you store your books? Where do
you store food?
6. Now lets say store together three more times:
store, store, store.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
reward
Word 4
clever
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
reward
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is reward. Say

it with me: reward. To reward means to give
a prize for a good job. When you do a good
job, your teacher rewards you. He might say,
Good job. Or he might give you a sticker.
2. En espaol, to reward quiere decir dar un
premio por una buena accin, recompensar.
Cuando haces un buen trabajo, tu profesor te
recompensa. Tal vez te diga, Hiciste un muy
buen trabajo. Tal vez te d una calcomana o
pegatina.
3. Now lets look at a picture of a reward. (Point
to the trophy in the photo.) Look at this big
prize! These girls did a good job. They won
the game. Their coach rewarded them with
this trophy.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is clever. Say

it with me: clever. Clever means smart.
Clever people can nd the answer easily. Their
answers are sometimes creative.
2. En espaol, clever quiere decir inteligente
o listo. Las personas listas encuentran
soluciones a problemas con facilidad. Sus
soluciones suelen ser creativas.
it is like to be clever. (Point to the girl in the
photo.) This girl knows the answer to the
math problem. She is explaining it to the class.
She is a clever girl.
100
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) moodboard/Corbis. (b) Mel Yates/Digital Vision/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Look at the picture. The coach rewarded
these girls. Are they happy about it? How do
you know? How do you feel when someone
rewards you? Tell your partner.
5. Your teachers reward you when you do a good
job. How do your teachers reward you? Tell
your partner.
6. Now lets say reward together three more
times: reward, reward, reward.
Word 4
clever
PARTNER TALK
4. Everyone is clever in different ways. Im very
good at solving puzzles, so you could say Im
clever at solving puzzles. What are you clever
at? Tell your partner.
5. There are a lot of different words that mean
almost the same as clever. For example, we
already said that clever means smart. What
are some other words that mean the same
thing as clever? Tell your partner. (Examples
include: good at, intelligent, bright)
6. Now lets say clever together three more
times: clever, clever, clever.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
double
Word 6
amount
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
double
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is double. Say

it with me: double. Double means two times
bigger or two times as much as something.
(Hold up one pencil.) Look, I have one pencil
in my hand. (Now hold up another pencil.)
Now I have two pencils, or double the number
of pencils I had before.
2. En espaol, double quiere decir dos veces
ms grande o dos veces la cantidad de algo,
doble. (Muestre un lpiz.) Miren, tengo un
lpiz en mi mano. (Ahora muestre un lpiz
ms.) Ahora tengo dos, o sea, ahora tengo
doble cantidad de lpices.
3. Double in English and doble in Spanish are
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is amount. Say

it with me: amount. The amount of something
tells how many or how much. For
example, what is the amount of milk you drink
at lunch? Do you drink one glass or more?
2. En espaol, amount quiere decir cantidad.
La cantidad de algo te dice cunto. Por
ejemplo, cuntos vasos de leche tomas
durante el almuerzo? El nmero de vasos de
leche que tomas es la cantidad de leche que
tomas.
an amount of something. (Point to the
vegetables on the scale in the photo.) This
person weighs the vegetables to nd out the
amount of weight. What do you think? Is it
one pound, more than one pound, or less than
one pound?
102
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (b) Richard Hutchings/PhotoEdit.
MOVEMENT
4. Now lets look at a picture that shows double
of something. (Point to the girls in the photo.)
Look at these two girls. They are twins. Their
parents had to buy double the clothes and
double the headbands they would have
bought for one child!
5. We are going to make double the number of
circles we draw. Fold a piece of paper in half.
Draw a circle and cut it out, making sure you
cut through both sides. You cut one circle, but
you have double the number of circles!
6. (Distribute a handful of beans to each pair
of students.) With your partner, make a set
of three beans. Now, I want you to show
me double the amount of beans. How many
beans is that? (six)
7. Now lets say double together three more
times: double, double, double.
Word 6
amount
MOVEMENT
4. Lets nd out the amount of pencils we have.
Everybody put all your pencils on the table
and count them. Now lets add them all up.
How many pencils are there?
5. Lets nd out the amount of children in this
room. Lets count. Which amount is larger?
The number of children or the number or
pencils?
6. Now lets say amount together three more
times: amount, amount, amount.
Word 1
today
Word 2
tomorrow
Word 1
today
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, today means this day. Say it with

me: today. Today is (name the current day
of the week). We have a lot of things to do
today!
2. En espaol, today quiere decir hoy; este da.
Hoy es (diga el da la semana.). Hay mucho
que hacer hoy!
3. This picture shows the word today. Today,
these students are going to nish their model
airplane. Tomorrow, they will launch it.
4. What happened at school today? Did anything

special happen to you today? (Call on a few
students for their response.)
5. Is today anyones birthday? If today is your
birthday, raise your hand! If you know anyone
whose birthday is today, raise your hand! Tell
me the name of the persons birthday, and
well say, Today is
s birthday!
6. Repeat the word three times with me: today,
today, today.
Word 2
tomorrow
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, tomorrow means the day after

today. Say it with me: tomorrow. If youre
going to do something tomorrow, youre
going to do it the day after today.
2. En espaol, tomorrow quiere decir maana;
el da despus de hoy. Si vas a hacer algo
maana, lo hars el da despus de hoy.
3. This picture shows the word tomorrow. Today,
these kids are going to the park with their
parents. Tomorrow, they are all going to the
beach.
4. What day is tomorrow? What day is today?

Give the exact date for both. (Call on a few
students for their response.)
5. What are you going to do tomorrow? Is there
school tomorrow? (Call on a few students for
their response.)
tomorrow, tomorrow, tomorrow.
104
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/PunchStock. (b) BananaStock/Jupiterimages.
Word 3
very well
Word 4
surely
Word 3
very well
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the phrase very well to say

okay, thats ne. Say it with me: very well.
After I order food at a restaurant, a waiter
might say to me, Very well. I will bring your
food soon.
2. En espaol, very well quiere decir est bien;
bueno. Despues de pedir mi comida, el
mesero me puede decir, Est bien. Enseguida
vuelvo con su orden.
3. This picture shows the phrase very well. The
lady probably asked the boy if he wants some
vegetables. He must have said, Very well. Ill
have some vegetables.
4. Pretend you are at the dinner table. Your mom

asks if you would like some gravy on your
mashed potatoes. You say, Very well, I would
like some gravy on my mashed potatoes.
Would you use the phrase very well if she
asked you if you wanted peas? salad? bread?
5. What are some other words or phrases that
mean the same thing as very well? (Responses
include: Okay. Sure. Thats ne. Yes, please.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: very
well, very well, very well.
Word 4
surely
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, the word surely means denitely.

Say it with me: surely. If something will surely
happen, then it will denitely happen.
2. En espaol, surely quiere decir de seguro;
denitivamente. Si algo suceder de seguro,
suceder denitivamente.
3. This picture shows the word surely. These
children are running around in the water.
Surely they will get wet.
4. Im going to say some things we do at school.

If I say something we are surely going to do
today, say surely.
Eat lunch
Take a nap
Have a dance party
Go home
5. What will surely happen tomorrow? Will you
surely come to school? Will you surely eat
dinner at home? (Call on a few students for
their response.)
6. Repeat the word three times with me: surely,
surely, surely.
106
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/Alamy Images. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
receive, give, eat,

pour, gather, carry
Basic Words
Unit 2 Week 4
One Grain of Rice
receive
give
eat
pour
gather
carry
ROUTINE
107
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) AsiaPix/Alamy Images. (tc) Image Source/PunchStock. (tr) Sean Justice/Corbis
(bl) Rozet /AgenceImages/Jupiterimages. (bm) PhotoLink/Photodisc/Getty Images. (br) Paul A. Souders/Corbis.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
allowed
Unit 2 Week 5 African-American Inventors
Word 2
powerful
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
allowed
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is allowed. Say

it with me: allowed. Allowed means let
or permitted. Your parents and teachers
let you do some things, but not others.
For example, little children are not usually
allowed to ride the bus alone.
2. En espaol, to allow quiere decir dejar o
permitir. Tus padres y tus profesores te
dejan hacer algunas cosas pero no otras. Por
ejemplo, los nios pequeos normalmente no
se les permite montar en el bus solos.
word allowed. (Point to the children in the
photo.) These children are watching TV. They
are allowed to watch TV in bed. Their parents
let them do it.
PARTNER TALK
What are the children doing? What is the
mother doing? What is the father doing? Are
you allowed to do these things?
5. What are some things you are not allowed
to do in school? Tell your partner. Use the
sentence frame: We are not allowed to
.
6. Now lets say allowed together three more
times: allowed, allowed, allowed.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is powerful. Say

it with me: powerful. Powerful means very
strong. A powerful car can go very fast. A
powerful wind can blow trees down.
2. En espaol, powerful quiere decir muy fuerte,
poderoso. Un carro poderoso puede ir muy
rpido. Una brisa poderosa puede derrumbar
rboles.
word powerful. (Point to the barge in the
photo.) Look at the boat. See how it pushes
through the water. Its a powerful boat. It
moves down the river very fast.
powerful
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend to be powerful airplanes. Stand
up and show me your wings. Lets make a
sound like a powerful airplane. Now lets y
around the room.
5. Animals can be powerful, too. Lets be
powerful lions. Let me hear your powerful
roar.
6. Now lets say powerful together three more
times: powerful, powerful, powerful.
110
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/PunchStock. (b) IMS Communications Ltd/Capstone Design/FlatEarth Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
invented
Word 4
instrument
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
invented
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is invented. Say

it with me: invented. Invented means made
up something new. For example, many years
ago people used candles to see in the dark.
Then somebody invented electric lights. Now
we usually use electric lights to see in the
dark.
2. En espaol, to invent quiere decir crear algo
nuevo, inventar. Por ejemplo, hace mucho
tiempo las personas usaban velas para ver en
la oscuridad. Despus alguien invent la luz
elctrica y los bombillos. Ahora usamos luz
elctrica para ver en la oscuridad.
3. To invent in English and inventar in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is instrument.

Say it with me: instrument. Instrument means
tool. An instrument helps us do a job. A
pencil is an instrument we use to write. A
knife is an instrument we use to cut our food.
2. En espaol, instrument quiere decir
herramienta o instrumento. Un instrumento
te ayuda a hacer una tarea. Un lpiz es un
instrumento que usamos para escribir. Un
cuchillo es un instrumento que usamos para
cortar nuestra comida.
3. Instrument in English and instrumento in
languages.
112
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Keith Brofsky/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
word invented. (Point to the tin can in the
photo.) This boy invented a telephone. He
talks into the can. His friend in another room
can hear him. This telephone was the boys
idea. He invented it.
5. Look at the picture. How did the boy make
the telephone? Talk about it with your
partner.
6. People invented cars over a hundred years
ago. What do you think? How did people go
places before they invented cars? Talk about
it with your partner.
7. Now lets say invented together three more
times: invented, invented, invented.
Word 4
instrument
PARTNER TALK
4. Now lets look at a picture that demonstrates
the word instrument. (Point to the dental tool
in the photo.) The dentist is xing the girls
teeth. The dentist uses this instrument to do
the job.
5. When you draw a picture, what instruments
do you use? Tell your partner. (crayons,
pencils, pens)
6. What instruments do you use when you eat?
Tell your partner. (fork, spoon, knife)
7. Now lets say instrument together three more
times: instrument, instrument, instrument.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
products
Word 6
design
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
products
PARTNER TALK
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is products. Say

it with me: products. Products are things you
can buy in a store. Different kinds of stores sell
different kinds of products. For example, at a
supermarket we buy food. The different kinds
of food are the products in a supermarket.
2. En espaol, products quiere decir las
cosas que puedes comprar en una tienda o
almacn, productos. Distintas tiendas venden
distintos productos. Por ejemplo, en un
supermercado compramos comida. Los tipos
de comida o alimentos que se encuentran
en un supermercado son los productos del
supermercado.
3. Products in English and productos in Spanish

word products. (Point to the hat in the photo.)
This is a special kind of hat. People wear it
when they build houses and other buildings. It
is a special product for builders. They can buy
it at a store that sells things for builders.
5. We buy lots of things in a supermarket.
What are some of the products we can
nd in a supermarket? Tell your partner.
(Examples include: foods like bread, fruits
and vegetables, and meat; drinks; batteries,
medicine)
6. What are some of the different products we
can nd in a toy store? (Examples include:
board games, video games, dolls)
7. Now lets say products together three more
times: products, products, products.
Key Vocabulary
Word 6
PARTNER TALK
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is design. Say

it with me: design. Design means a plan for
making something. If youre going to make
something complicated, it helps to have a
design before you start.
2. En espaol, design quiere decir el plan para
hacer o construir algo, diseo. Si vas a hacer
algo complicado, ayuda hacer un diseo antes
de comenzar.
3. Design in English and diseo in Spanish are
word design. (Point to the design in the
photo.) This is a design for a house.
The builder will build the house to match
the design.
design
5. How do you think having a design might

help you make something? Tell your
partner. (Examples include: You know what
its supposed to look like. You know what
materials you need.)
6. With your partner, make a design for a new
product. Talk about what your product will
do and what it will look like, then draw the
design together.
7. Now lets say design together three more
times: design, design, design.
114
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ingram Publishing/Fotosearch Stock Photography. (b) Don Farrall/Getty Images.
Word 1
every year
Word 2
every day
Word 1
every year
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the phrase every year to

talk about something that happens once in a
year. Say it with me: every year. For example,
you have a birthday every year.
2. En espaol, every year quiere decir cada
ao; una vez al ao. Cada ao celebras tu
cumpleaos.
3. This picture shows something that happens
every year. These kids are celebrating
someones birthday, which happens every
year.
4. I am going to name some events. If it happens

every year, stomp your feet and say the phrase
every year. If it does not happen every year,
dont do anything.
Your 10th birthday
New Years Day
winter
Mothers Day
You go to a new school
5. What other things can you think of that
happen every year? (Call on a few students to
respond.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: every
year, every year, every year.
Word 2
every day
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the phrase every day to talk

about something that happens at least one
time each day. Say it with me: every day. The
sun rises every day.
2. En espaol, every day quiere decir cada da;
todos los das. El sol sale cada da.
3. This picture shows something that you should
do every day. Brushing your teeth is a healthy
habit that you should do every day. If you
dont brush your teeth at least once every day,
they wont stay clean and healthy.
4. I am going to name some events. If they

happen every day, raise your hands and
say the phrase every day. If not, dont do
anything.
lunchtime
your birthday
the sun goes down
it rains
5. What are some other things that happen every
day? (Call on a few students to respond.)
day, every day, every day.
116
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages. (b) Big Cheese Photo/PunchStock.
Word 3
still
Word 4
break up
Word 3
still
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the word still to talk about

something that started in the past and is
also happening now. Say it with me: still. For
example, we came to school this morning and
we are still here now.
2. En espaol, still quiere decir todava; an.
Esta maana llegamos a la escuela y todava
estamos aqu.
3. This picture shows the word still. This clock is
still ticking. It started ticking some time in the
past, and it is still ticking now.
4. Think about how our classroom looked at

the beginning of the school year. Now look
around the classroom. What is still here from
the beginning of the year? Tell your partner.
5. Did any of you play sports when you were
younger? Do you still play? What sports do
you play now? Tell your partner.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: still,
still, still.
Word 4
break up
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use the phrase break up to tell

how something falls apart. Say it with me:
break up. For example, the ice on a frozen
lake may break up as the weather gets
warmer.
2. En espaol, to break up quiere decir
quebrarse; romperse. El hielo sobre un lago
congelado puede quebrarse en un da clido.
3. This picture demonstrates the phrase break
up. The plate is broken into many different
pieces. I wonder what happened to this
plate that caused it to break up into all these
pieces. Do you think someone threw it or
dropped it?
4. With your partner, think of things that can

break up. What do these things have in
common?
5. Have you ever built a sand castle? Did it break
up? Did the waves wash it away? Tell your
partner about anything that you ever built
that broke up.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: break
up, break up, break up.
118
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (b) Ken Cavanagh, photographer/McGraw-Hill Companies.
Basic Words
soap, shampoo, shaving cream,

glue, clock, folding chair
Unit 2 Week 5
African-American Inventors
soap
shampoo
shaving cream
glue
clock
folding chair
ROUTINE
119
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Photodisc/Getty Images. (tc) Stockbyte/Getty Images. (tr) BananaStock/Jupiter Images/Alamy Images
(bl) Stephen Ogilvy photographer/McGraw-Hill Companies. (bm) Stockbyte/Getty Images. (br) Ingram Publishing (Superstock Limited)/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
perform
Unit 3 Week 1 The Alvin Ailey Kids: Dancing as a Team
Word 2
effort
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
perform
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is perform. Say it

with me: perform. When you perform, you do
something in front of an audience. You might
sing, dance, or act in a play.
2. En espaol, perform quiere decir hacer algo
en frente de otras personas o una audiencia.
Tal vez interpretes una cancin, bailes o
actes en una obra de teatro en frente de
otros.
3. Now lets look at the picture that shows
how people perform. (Point to the folkloric
dancers.) These children perform folkloric
dances. See their colorful costumes? Lots of
people watch the dancers perform.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is effort. Say

it with me: effort. When you put a lot of
effort into something, you use a lot of energy
to do it.
2. En espaol, effort quiere decir la fuerza o el
nimo que pones para lograr algo, esfuerzo.
Cuando uno hace mucho esfuerzo para hacer
algo, usa mucha energa para hacerlo.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows effort.
(Point to the children playing tug-o-war.)
These children are putting a lot of effort into
their game. They are playing tug of war. It
takes a lot of effort, or energy, to pull the
rope. They sure are working hard!
122
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Kayte M. Deioma/PhotoEdit. (b) Image Source Black/Jupiterimages.
MOVEMENT
4. Think of a dance or a song you can perform
with your partner. (Call on one or two pairs to
perform for the class.)
5. Do you know how to act when you watch
someone perform? You watch and listen
quietly when the performers are singing
or dancing. You clap at the end to let the
performers know you liked what you saw.
Lets pretend to watch someone perform
together.
6. Now lets say perform together three more
times: perform, perform, perform.
Word 2
effort
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk to your partner about something you do
that takes a lot of effort. Maybe its playing a
sport or learning to play a musical instrument.
Tell your partner why you do it.
5. Which takes more effort for you: sports or
schoolwork? Tell your partner and explain
why. Use this sentence frame:
takes more effort for me because
.
6. Now lets say effort together three more
times: effort, effort, effort.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
remember
Word 4
mood
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
remember
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is remember.

Say it with me: remember. To remember
means to keep something from the past in
your mind. If you forget something, you do
not remember it. It is important to remember
homework assignments.
2. En espaol, remember quiere decir mantener
algo del pasado en tu mente, recordar. Si se
te olvida algo, no lo recuerdas. Es importante
recordar las tareas que te di tu profesor.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows it is
important to remember things. (Point to the
boy at the microphone.) The man asked the
boy to spell a word. Do you think the boy can
remember how to spell the word? I think he
remembers. He is spelling the word correctly.
He remembers.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is mood. Say it

with me: mood. Your mood is how you feel
right now. When youre in a good mood, you
feel happy. You may smile and laugh. If youre
sad or angry, youre in a bad mood. Raise your
hand if youre in a good mood today.
2. En espaol, mood quiere decir cmo te
sientes en un momento, humor. Cuando
ests de buen humor, te sientes contento.
Sonres y te res. Si estas triste o enfadado,
ests be mal humor. Alza la mano si ests de
mal humor hoy.
someones mood. (Point to the happy
children.) These children are in a good mood. I
know this because theyre smiling and having
fun. What would they look like if they were in
a bad mood? Show me.
124
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Dirk Anschutz/Stone/Getty Images. (b) PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Do you remember your last birthday? Do you
remember exactly what happened? Tell the
class all that you remember from your last
birthday.
5. When someone tells you to clean your room,
do you remember to do it? Or do you forget?
Use the sentence frame: When someone tells
me to clean my room, I usually
to do it.
6. Now lets say remember together three more
times: remember, remember, remember.
Word 4
mood
MOVEMENT
4. (Write the following words onto slips of
paper: happy, angry, sad, tired, excited, loving,
playful.) Lets play mood charades. First,
someone will pick a piece of paper out of a
hat full of moods. Read your mood, but dont
tell the class! Try to show or act out your
mood without talking. The class will try to
guess your mood.
5. Imagine that your favorite toy just broke.
What mood would you be in? Show your
partner. Now, imagine youre having a really
good day. You just got 100 on a big test. What
mood are you in now? Show your partner.
6. Now lets say mood together three more
times: mood, mood, mood.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
proud
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
proud
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is proud. Say it

with me: proud. When you feel proud you feel
good about yourself because you know you
did a good job. You may be proud of yourself
if you win a soccer game or a spelling bee.
Your parents may also be proud of you when
you do something good.
2. En espaol, proud quiere decir sentirse
bien sobre uno mismo por algo que hizo,
orgulloso. Tal vez ests orgulloso porque
ganaste un partido de ftbol o un concurso
de deletreo. Tus padres tambin se sienten
orgullosos cuando haces algo bien.
is proud. (Point to the boy with his diploma.)
This boy is proud of himself. It looks like he
graduated. Maybe now hes going to high
school. His parents must be proud of him, too.
126
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockbyte/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Imagine you just won rst place in an art
contest. Would you be proud? Would your
parents be proud of you? Would you still be
proud if you won second place? (Ask one or
two pairs for their response.)
5. Think of the last time you felt proud of
yourself for doing something. Tell your
partner about it. Finish this sentence: I was
proud of myself for
.
6. Now lets say proud together three more
times: proud, proud, proud.
Word 1
each spring
Word 2
hundreds of
Word 1
each spring
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the phase each spring to

talk about something that happens ever year
during the months of March, April, or May.
Say it with me: each spring. Each spring, baby
animals are born. Snow melts each spring.
Flowering plants begin to bloom each spring.
2. En espaol, each spring quiere decir cada
primavera . Algo que ocurre cada primavera
ocurre en los meses de marzo, abril o mayo.
Cada primavera, nacen los animalitos. La nieve
se derrite. Las ores empiezan a salir.
each spring. Each spring, tulips pop out of the
ground. When you see tulips in the garden,
that mean spring has arrived.
4. I am going to name some events. If I say

something that happens each spring, clap and
say each spring. If it does not happen each
spring, dont do anything.
New Years Day
tulips bloom
snow melts
Fourth of July
Repeat the sentences, but use the phrase each
spring to tell when each thing happens.
The tulips bloom every year.
Snow starts to melt around March or April.
Baby birds are born between March and May.
I celebrate my birthday in April.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: each
spring, each spring, each spring.
Word 2
hundreds of
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, hundreds of means a lot, or

an amount that would take a long time to
count. Say it with me: hundreds of. It could
be 200, 300, 400 or more. There might be
hundreds of seats in a movie theater. A book
can have hundreds of pages.
2. En espaol, hundreds of quiere decir cientos.
Es una cantidad que tomara mucho tiempo
para contar. Puede ser 200, 300, 400 o ms.
Puede haber cientos de asientos en un teatro.
Un libro puede tener cientos de pginas.
3. This picture shows hundreds of penguins.
Hundreds of penguins are walking on the ice.
It would take you a long time to count them
all. How many penguins do you think there
are? 200? 300?

yes or no.
Do we have hundreds of students in our
school?
Do you have hundreds of pets?
5. Is there anything you would like to have
hundreds of? What would you like to have
hundreds of? Where would you put them all?
(Call on a few children to respond.)
hundreds of, hundreds of, hundreds of.
128
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Sandra Ivany/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (b) Gerald Kooyman/Corbis.
Word 3
stay together
Word 4
exactly the same time
Word 3
stay together
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, to stay together means to do

things at the same time in a group. Say it
with me: stay together. For example, when
singers in a choir stay together, they sing at
the same time. They sound good.
2. En espaol, to stay together quiere decir
hacer las cosas al mismo tiempo todos
juntos. Por ejemplo, cuando todos en un coro
cantan juntos al mismo tiempo, suenan bien.
3. This picture shows what it means to stay
together. These musicians stay together
to play the song well. If they do not stay
together while they play, the whole audience
will hear the mistake.
4. Think of times in school when we stay

together. Do we stay together when we say
the Pledge of Allegiance? Do we stay together
when we sing a song?
5. Lets count to ten together. Lets stay
together. Lets count at the same time.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: stay
together, stay together, stay together.
Word 4
exactly the same time
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, when something happens at

exactly the same time, it happens at the very
moment as something else. Say it with me:
exactly the same time. If I sneezed at the very
moment you did, then we sneezed at exactly
the same time.
2. En espaol, exactly the same time quiere
decir exactamente al mismo tiempo. Si yo
estornudo en el preciso momento que t,
estornudamos exactamente al mismo tiempo
3. This picture shows people doing something at
exactly the same time. These two runners are
waiting for the signal to start running. They
will start running at exactly the same time. Do
you think they will nish the race at exactly
the same time?
4. Think about things you like to do. Do you ever

have to do something at exactly the same
time as someone else? Tell your partner about
it.
5. Think of what time school is over every day.
Does everyone leave school at exactly the
same time? Do some people stay behind? Tell
your partner.
exactly the same time, exactly the same time,
exactly the same time.
130
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Andrew Resek/McGraw-Hill Companies. (b) Bill Lai/Corbis.
Basic Words
Unit 3 Week 1
The Alvin Ailey Kids: Dancing as a Team
practice, glide, tap,

dance, march, stomp
practice
glide
tap
dance
march
stomp
ROUTINE
131
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Scott T. Baxter/Photodisc/Getty Images. (tc) Stockbyte/Getty Images. (tr) G.K. and Vikki Hart/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages
(bl) Glyn Jones/Corbis. (bm) SW Productions/Jupiter Images/ Brand X/Alamy Images. (br) AbleStock.com/Jupiterimages.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
medium
Unit 3 Week 2 Abuelo and the Three Bears
Word 2
arrive
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
medium
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is medium. Say it

with me: medium. Medium means not too
big and not too little. Medium is right in
the middle.
2. En espaol, medium quiere decir de un
tamao no muy grande ni muy pequeo,
mediano. Un tamao mediano est en la
mitad, entre el pequeo y el grande.
3. Medium in English and mediano in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture of something that
is medium in size. (Point to the three differentsized plants.) I see three plants. One plant is
small. One plant is medium. One plant is large.
Which one is the medium-sized plant?
PARTNER TALK
5. With your partner, think of the different sizes
of animals. A mouse is small, a dog is medium,
and a horse is large. Name other animals that
are small, medium, and large.
6. Think of a watermelon, a grape, and an apple.
Tell your partner about their size. Use the
words small, medium, and large. (Call on one
or two pairs to share their response.)
7. Now lets say medium together three more
times: medium, medium, medium.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is arrive. Say it

with me: arrive. To arrive means to come or
to get to a place. When a plane lands at the
airport, it arrives.
2. En espaol, to arrive quiere decir aproximarse
a un lugar, llegar. Cuando un avin aterriza
en el aeropuerto, ha llegado al aeropuerto.
someone arriving. (Point to the kids arriving
at a house.) These children have just come for
a visit. Look how happy the lady looks. She is
very happy to see them arrive.
arrive
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend youre visiting your family. You
havent seen them in two months. When you
arrive, what do you say? Tell your partner.
(Examples include: Hi. I missed you. Its
great to see you!)
5. After a long day at school, you nally get
back to your house. Whats the rst thing you
do when you arrive? Do you play outside? Do
you eat a snack? Finish this sentence: When
I arrive home after school, I
.
(Call on one or two pairs for their response.)
6. Now lets say arrive together three more
times: arrive, arrive, arrive.
134
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Chris Windsor/ Digital Vision/Getty Images. (b) DreamPictures/Blend Images/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
argue
Word 4
stubborn
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
argue
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is argue. Say

it with me: argue. To argue means to talk
about something with someone who has a
different opinion or to ght with words.
If you dont agree with someone, you might
argue with that person.
2. En espaol, to argue quiere decir hablar
de algo con alguien que tiene una opinin
distinta, pelear con palabras, discutir. Si no
ests de acuerdo con alguien, es probable que
discutas con esa persona.
3. Now lets see what it looks like to argue.
(Point to the people arguing.) It looks like
these customers are arguing with a ticket
agent at an airport. Maybe the customer is
saying, I need to get on that plane! The
ticket agent may be saying, Sir, the plane
is full. Im sorry. When people argue, they
sometimes raise their voice. It looks like the
man is raising his voice.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is stubborn.

Say it with me: stubborn. When people are
being stubborn, nothing can make them
change their mind.
2. En espaol, stubborn quiere decir que no
cambia de parecer o su forma de pensar,
terco. Cuando alguien es terco, es difcil
hacerle cambiar de opinin o parecer.
is being stubborn. (Point to the girl in the
dentist chair.) Look at this girl. The dentist
wants to examine her teeth. She is being
stubborn. She wont open her mouth. Maybe
shes thinking, No. I wont open my mouth
and you cant make me!
136
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Source/Corbis. (b) Andersen Ross/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
PARTNER TALK
4. Do you have a brother or sister? If so, do
you sometimes argue? How can you settle
an argument with another person? Tell your
partner. (Call on one or two pairs for their
responses.)
5. What might make you argue with someone?
Do you argue often or not much? Tell your
partner. Use this sentence: I sometimes argue
with
because
.
6. Now lets say argue together three more
times: argue, argue, argue.
Word 4
stubborn
PARTNER TALK
4. Imagine that you and your partner are a
parent and a child. The parent wants the
child to do something, but the child is being
stubborn. You can use these words: No! I
wont do it! You cant make me! No way!
5. When might you be stubborn? At the
doctors ofce? In a toy store? When theres
something yucky on your dinner plate? When
youre outside playing? How might you act if
youre stubborn? (Have one or two pairs share
their responses.)
6. Now lets say stubborn together three more
times: stubborn, stubborn, stubborn.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
noticed
Word 6
cozy
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
noticed
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is noticed.

Say it with me: noticed. If you have noticed
something, then you have seen it.
2. En espaol, to notice quiere decir darse
cuenta de algo, notar. Si has notado algo, lo
has visto o sentido.
3. To notice in English and notar in Spanish are
someone who noticed something. (Point to
the man and the girl.) The man and the girl
have just noticed something small. They are
looking through their magnifying glass to see
it more closely.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is cozy. Say

it with me: cozy. Cozy means warm and
comfortable. I feel cozy when Im sitting on
my sofa with a big cup of hot chocolate and a
uffy blanket.
2. En espaol, cozy quiere decir caliente y
cmodo o confortable. Me siento cmodo
cuando me siento en mi sof con una taza de
chocolate y una cobija suavecita.
3. Now lets look at a picture of some girls
that are cozy. (Point to the girls in the bed.)
These girls look warm and cozy. They are in
their bed. They are under a blanket. They are
reading a book.
138
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Corbis. (b) Frare/Davis Photography/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
PARTNER TALK
5. I have noticed that the weather is changing.
Have you noticed? When the weather
changes, it gets colder, warmer, windier,
or wetter. What have you noticed about
the weather? Tell your partner. Use this
sentence: I have noticed that the weather is
.
6. (Arrange two books, a plant, a few pencils,
and a binder on your desk. Point to them as
you name them.) Take a good look at my
desk. Remember everything on it. Now, close
your eyes. (Remove a pencil.) Open your eyes.
What is missing? Did you notice what is gone?
Discuss it with your partner. (Ask a pair of
children to share their observation.)
7. Now lets say noticed together three more
times: noticed, noticed, noticed.
Word 6
cozy
PARTNER TALK
4. Imagine that you are going to sleep. What
makes you feel cozy? Do you have a special
blanket? How about a pillow or a nightlight?
(Call on a few pairs to respond.)
5. What would feel more cozy, a hard oor
or a soft bed? Tell your partner. Say, A
feels cozy. A
does not feel cozy. (Ask one or two pairs for
their response.)
6. Now lets say cozy together three more times:
cozy, cozy, cozy.
Word 1
bring tears to my eyes
Word 2
get late
Word 1
brings tears to my eyes
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, if I say something brings tears to

my eyes, I mean it makes me cry or it makes
my eyes water. Say it with me: brings tears
to my eyes. If I hit my toe on something, the
pain brings tears to my eyes. Ouch!
2. En espaol, to bring tears to my eyes quiere
decir me lloran los ojos. Si digo que me
lloran los ojos, quiero decir que lloro o me
lagrimean. Si topo mi dedo del pie contra
algo, me lloran los ojos de puro dolor. Ay!
3. This picture shows something that would
bring tears to my eyes. When I chop onions,
my eyes get irritated. Chopping onions brings
tears to my eyes. It looks like chopping onions
brings tears to this womans eyes, too.
4. Think of some things that would bring tears to

your eyes. Something can bring tears to your
eyes because youre sad, happy, or because
you hurt yourself. Tell your partner. Use the
sentence frame: Something that brings tears
to my eyes is
.
5. Think of the last time something brought
tears to your eyes. How long ago was it? Do
you remember why it brought tears to your
eyes? Tell your partner about it.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: bring
tears to my eyes, bring tears to my eyes, bring
tears to my eyes.
Word 2
get late
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we say it gets late when weve

been doing something for a long time and
were ready to be nished. Say it with me: get
late. For example, right before the bell rings
at the end of the school day, I might say, Its
getting late. Everybody put away your things
and get ready to go!
2. En espaol, to get late quiere decir hacerse
tarde. A veces se nos hace tarde cuando
estamos haciendo algo y casi terminamos. Por
ejemplo, antes de que suene la campana de la
salida, puedo decir, Se est haciendo tarde.
Hay que recoger nuestras cosas para irnos.
3. This picture shows the day getting late. The
sun is beginning to disappear, and the skiiers
are heading home before it gets dark. Theyre
probably thinking, Its getting late. Its time
to go home.
4. Pretend you are playing outside. How do you

know when its getting late and it is time to
go in? Do your parents tell you to come in in?
Do you go when it starts to get dark? Share
with the class.
5. What does the sky look like when it gets late?
Is it sunny and blue? Or is it a little dark? (Call
on a few students for their response.)
late, get late, get late.
140
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Flint/Corbis. (b) Ingram Publishing/age fotostock.
Word 3
follow her nose
Word 4
head straight to
Word 3
follow her nose
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, when someone says she smells

something, she might follow her nose to nd
out what she smells. Say it with me: follow her
nose. If a girl smells yummy apple pie, she may
follow her nose to the kitchen.
2. En espaol, to follow her nose quiere decir
rastrear con su olfato. Por ejemplo, si una
nia huele pastel de manzana, puede rastrear
con su olfato para seguir el aroma hasta la
cocina.
3. This picture shows someone who followed her
nose. This girl probably smelled her brothers
soup from another room. She followed her
nose to the dining room.
4. Pretend Im making hot chocolate at my desk.

Youre just starting to smell it in the air. Sniff
around. Yum. It smells good. Now, get up and
follow your nose to my desk to see what it is.
5. Smoke is something else you might smell in
the air. Pretend theres smoke coming from
the lamp in the reading center. Lets pretend
we smell it in the air. Now lets follow our
nose to the lamp to see where the smoke is
coming from.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: follow
your nose, follow your nose, follow your nose.
Word 4
head straight to
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, to head straight to something

means to go to it as soon as possible. Say it
with me: head straight to. If Im thirsty when
I get home from school, I head straight to the
refrigerator and pour myself a glass of cold
water.
2. En espaol, to head straight to quiere decir
dirigirse a un lugar lo ms pronto posible.
Si yo tengo mucha sed al llegar de la escuela,
puedo dirigirme directamente al refrigerador
para servirme un vaso con agua.
3. This picture shows a runner heading straight
to the nish line. Hes probably been running
for a while and hes ready to nish the race.
He is probably happy to be headed in that
direction.
4. Stand up. I want you to head straight to the

nearest person who is wearing blue. Now
head straight to the nearest person who is
wearing red. Now head straight to your seat.
5. Pretend the bell is about to ring. Head straight
to the door and line up. Now pretend school
just started. Head straight to your seat again.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: head
straight to, head straight to, head straight to.
142
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Laurence Mouton/PhotoAlto/PunchStock. (b) image100/PunchStock.
cold, hot, scratchy,

lumpy, soft, hard
Basic Words
Unit 3 Week 2
Abuelo and the Three Bears
cold
hot
scratchy
lumpy
soft
hard
ROUTINE
143
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Jules Frazier/Photodisc/Getty Images. (tc) liquidlibrary/Jupiterimages. (tr) Juniors Bildarchiv/Alamy Images.
(bl) Jason Hindley/Photonica/Getty Images. (bm) Digital Archive Japan/Alamy Images. (br) Russell Illig/Photodisc/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
impossible
Word 2
treasures
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
impossible
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is impossible.

Say it with me: impossible. If something is
impossible, it cannot be done.
2. En espaol, impossible quiere decir que no se
puede hacer o lograr, imposible. Encontrar
un unicornio es imposible.
3. Impossible in English and imposible in Spanish
impossible. (Point to the girls dressed up as
fairies.) Is it possible for girls to be fairies on
top of owers? Its impossible, isnt it?
PARTNER TALK
5. Think of a story you have heard, such as
Cinderella. Does something impossible happen
in the story? Tell your partner about it. (Ask
one or two pairs to tell about impossible
events in a story.)
6. What other things are impossible? Is it
possible to y to the moon in a shoe? Tell
your partner what other things are impossible.
Finish this sentence: Its impossible to
.
7. Now lets say impossible together three more
times: impossible, impossible, impossible.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is treasures. Say

it with me: treasures. Treasures are special
or valuable things. A special piece of jewelry
might be a treasure. A special babys dress
that is passed down from parent to child
might be a treasure.
2. En espaol, treasures quiere decir cosas
muy valiosas o especiales, tesoros. Una joya
especial puede ser un tesoro. Un vestido de
beb que ha sido pasado de generacin en
generacin puede ser un tesoro.
3. Treasures in English and tesoros in Spanish are
Word 2
treasures
PARTNER TALK
treasures. (Point to the treasure chest.) This
chest is full of treasures. If you had a treasure
chest, what would you put in it?
5. Do you have any family treasures? Draw a
picture of real or imaginary treasures and
show it to your partner. Tell your partner what
makes the treasures special or valuable.
6. My most special treasure is a necklace my
grandmother gave me. What is your most
special treasure? Tell your partner about it.
My most special treasure is
.
7. Now lets say treasures together three more
times: treasures, treasures, treasures.
146
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Gail Shumway/Photographers Choice/Getty Images. (b) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
talent
Word 4
pleasant
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
talent
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is talent. Say it

with me: talent. When you have a talent, you
are very good at something. Some people are
good at singing and dancing. Some people are
good at playing sports. What is your talent?
2. En espaol, talent quiere decir una abilidad
para hacer algo muy bien, un talento.
Algunas personas cantan o bailan muy bien.
Otras personas juegan un deporte muy bien.
Cul es tu talento?
3. Talent in English and talento in Spanish are
4. Now, lets look at a picture of someones
talent. (Point to the girl playing violin in the
photo.) This girl can play the violin. She has
talent. It takes a lot of talent to play the
violin. It also takes lots of practice.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is pleasant.

Say it with me: pleasant. When something is
pleasant, it is nice to hear, touch, smell, taste,
or look at.
2. En espaol, pleasant quiere decir agradable.
Cuando algo es agradable, es un placer
escucharlo, tocarlo, olerlo, probarlo o mirarlo.
3. Now lets look at a picture that tells us more
about the word pleasant. (Point to the boy
and his dog.) The boy and the dog seem
happy. They must be looking at something
pleasant. This picture is also pleasant. It
makes me feel good to look at it.
148
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Somos/PunchStock. (b) Stockdisc/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
5. What talent do you have? Can you draw? Can
you sing? Can you dance? Tell your partner
about your talent.
6. Imagine that we are having a talent show.
What talent would you and your partner
perform together? Plan it with your partner.
Say, We could
in the talent
show.
7. Now lets say talent together three more
times: talent, talent, talent.
Word 4
pleasant
PARTNER TALK
4. What is more pleasant to touch, sandpaper or
a fuzzy toy bear? Compare other things that
are pleasant and unpleasant to touch. Find
out what your partner thinks.
5. What musical instrument makes the most
pleasant sound, a piano, a drum, or a
bell? Finish this sentence: I think that the
makes the most pleasant
sound. (Call on one or two pairs to share their
preference.)
6. Now lets say pleasant together three more
times: pleasant, pleasant, pleasant.
Word 1
years from now
Word 2
of today
Word 1
years from now
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, the phrase years from now means

at least two years in the future. Say it with
me: years from now. If something is going to
happen years from now, you will have to wait
a few years for it to happen. Many years from
now, you will be an adult.
2. En espaol, years from now quiere decir por
lo menos dos aos ms adelante. Si algo
suceder unos aos ms adelante, tendrs que
esperar aos para que pase. Dentro de muchos
aos, sers un adulto.
3. This picture shows something that may
happen years from now. This child is planting
a tree. Years from now, that tree will be big.
Years from now, the tree will be bigger than
the child!
4. Think of where you will be years from now.

Do you think you will still be living in this
city? Where would you like to live years from
now? Years from now, I would like to live in
.
5. How old will you be ten years from now? (Call
on a few students for their response.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: years
from now, years from now, years from now.
Word 2
of today
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, the phrase of today means

very modern. Say it with me: of today. If
something is of today, it is not old. Cars of
today look a bit different from old-fashioned
cars. Cars of today go a lot faster, too.
2. En espaol, of today quiere decir de hoy en
da; moderno. Algo de hoy en da no est
viejo. Los coches de hoy en da son distintos
a los coches antiguos. Los coches de hoy son
ms rpidos tambin.
3. This picture shows many buildings and cars of
today. The buildings of today are very high.
Many buildings of today are made of steel and
glass.
4. Think about the telephones of today. About a

hundred years ago, all telephones were black.
What color are telephones of today? How else
are telephones of today different from oldfashioned telephones?
5. Draw a picture of something old and
something modern. Tell your partner about
your drawing. Use the sentence frame:
Old-fashioned
are different from
of today because
.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: of
today, of today, of today.
150
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) JupiterImages/Comstock Images/Alamy Images. (b) Alasdair Drysdale/McGraw-Hill Companies.
Word 3
thousands of years ago
Word 4
thousands of years old
Word 3
thousands of years ago
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, if we say something happened

thousands of years ago, we mean it happened
a long, long time ago. Say it with me:
thousands of years ago. These are things you
read about in history books.
2. En espaol, thousands of years ago quiere
decir hace miles de aos. Algo que sucedi
hace miles de aos sucedi hace mucho,
mucho tiempo. Son cosas que aparecen en los
libros de historia.
3. This picture shows something that lived. This
is a picture of a dinosaur. Thousands of years
ago, dinosaurs roamed the Earth. Its hard to
imagine what the Earth looked like thousands
of years ago when the dinosaurs lived.
4. Thousands of years ago, people got food

differently than they do today. There was no
frozen or canned food to buy. There were
no restaurants. How do you think people got
their food thousands of years ago? Draw a
picture. Tell your partner about it.
5. Life was very different thousands of years ago.
What do you think it might have been like?
Use your imagination! Tell your partner
about it.
thousands of years ago, thousands of years
ago, thousands of years ago.
Word 4
thousands of years old
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, something that is thousands of

years old is very, very old. It is ancient. It is
probably mentioned in history books. Say it
with me: thousands of years old. Egyptian
pyramids are thousands of years old.
2. En espaol, thousands of years old quiere decir
con miles de aos de antigedad. Algo que
tiene miles de aos de antigedad es muy,
muy viejo. Es antiguo. Probablemente esa
cosa se menciona en los libros de historia. Las
pirmides de Egipto tienen miles de aos de
antigedad.
3. This picture shows something that is
thousands of years old. This stone tablet
is very, very old. Look at the writing on
the tablet. Thats how some people wrote
thousands of years ago.
4. In museums, we can see things that are

thousands of years old. Why do you think we
put these things in museums? Why do people
want to see things that are thousands of years
old? (to learn about people that lived a long
time ago)
5. Have you ever seen something that was
thousands of years old? Tell your partner
about it. (Call on a few children to share with
the class.)
thousands of years old, thousands of years old,
thousands of years old.
152
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) DAJ/Getty Images. (b) Burke/Triolo/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
Basic Words
Unit 3 Week 3
Music of the Stone Age
concert, instrument, recorder,

recording, singer, ute
concert
instrument
recorder
recording
singer
ute
ROUTINE
153
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) A. Ramey/PhotoEdit. (tc) Photodisc/Getty Images. (tr) Stockbyte/Getty Images.
(bl) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages. (bm) Digital Vision/Getty Images. (br) Stockbyte/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
impatient
Unit 3 Week 4 Click, Clack, Moo: Cows That Type
Word 2
furious
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
impatient
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is impatient. Say it

with me: impatient. If you are impatient, you
do not want to wait. I get impatient before
my birthday. I hate waiting for birthday cake!
2. En espaol, impatient quiere decir que no
espera con calma, impaciente. Siempre me
pongo impaciente antes de mi cumpleaos.
No me gusta esperar mucho mi torta!
3. Impatient in English and impaciente in
languages.
4. Now lets look at a picture of some impatient
people. (Point to the line of people.) Look at this
long line. These people are waiting and waiting.
They have been waiting a long time. They are
looking at their watches. They are getting
impatient. They do not want to wait anymore.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is furious. Say

it with me: furious. Furious means very, very
angry. When people are furious they might
scream and yell. Some people even cry when
they are furious.
2. En espaol, furious quiere decir muy enojado,
furioso. Cuando una persona est furiosa, a
veces grita o llora por el enojo.
3. Furious in English and furioso in Spanish are
156
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Michael Blann/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (b) SuperStock/Alamy Images.
PARTNER TALK
5. Think about a time you had to wait for
something. Were you waiting in line at the
store? Were you waiting for someone to come
to your house? Were you impatient? Tell
your partner about what made you lose your
patience. (Ask one or two pairs to share their
experience.)
6. Think of another time you were impatient.
How did you feel? What did you do? Tell your
partner how you act when you feel impatient.
7. Now lets say impatient together three more
times: impatient, impatient, impatient.
Word 2
furious
MOVEMENT
4. Now lets look at a picture of a furious boy.
(Point to the boy.) This boy is furious. Look at
him. His sts are clenched. Clench your sts
like him. He is really angry about something.
What do you think made him so mad?
5. I am furious! Someone broke my car window!
Stand up and show your furious face, like me.
Stomp your feet. Clench your sts.
6. What can you say when you are furious? You
can say, Aaargh! Say it with me: Aaargh!
7. Now lets say furious together three more
times: furious, furious, furious.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
emergency
Word 4
demand
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
emergency
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is emergency.

Say it with me: emergency. An emergency is
something that happens that is unexpected
and dangerous. When theres an emergency,
you need to act quickly and calmly. Someones
life may be in danger.
2. En espaol, emergency es algo peligroso que
ocurre de repente. Cuando hay una emergencia,
hay que actuar rpidamente pero con calma. La
vida de una persona puede estar en peligro.
3. Emergency in English and emergencia in Spanish
are cognates. They sound almost the same and
4. Now lets look at a picture of an emergency.
(Point to the ambulance in the photo.) Someone
is hurt or sick. They have to get to the hospital.
This ambulance gets someone to the hospital
quickly. What sound does an ambulance make?
When you hear that sound, it means, Get out
of the way! This is an emergency!
PARTNER TALK
5. Pretend that you and your partner see a small
wildre near your house. What should you
do in this emergency? Discuss it together.
(Examples include: Tell an adult what you saw.
Call 911.)
6. During an emergency, you may hear different
warning sounds. What does a re alarm sound
like? How about an ambulance? How about a
police car? Tell your partner.
7. Now lets say emergency together three more
times: emergency, emergency, emergency.
Key Vocabulary
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is demand.

Say it with me: demand. When you demand
something, you ask for it in a strong way.
2. En espaol, to demand quiere decir pedir
algo con rmeza, exigir. Cuando exiges algo,
lo pides de una manera fuerte.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows someone
demanding something. (Point to the coach.)
Look at this baseball coach. He looks serious,
doesnt he? He wants the boys to win the game.
He demands that they play their best.
demand
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk to your partner about what the coach is
saying to the boys. Complete this sentence: I
demand that you
!
5. Do you think it would be a good idea to
demand pizza for dinner? Could you demand
that your teacher let you have recess all day?
With your partner, come up with a list of silly
things to demand. Share one or two of them
with the class.
6. Now lets say demand together three more
times: demand, demand, demand.
158
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ryan McVay/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (b) JupiterImages/ Thinkstock/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
sincerely
Word 6
neutral
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
sincerely
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is sincerely. Say

it with me: sincerely. When you say something
sincerely, you really mean it. You are telling
the truth.
2. En espaol, sincerely quiere decir de
verdad, sinceramente. Cuando dices algo
sinceramente, dices la verdad. Realmente
crees lo que dices.
3. Sincerely in English and sinceramente in Spanish
are cognates. They sound almost the same and
is acting sincerely. (Point to the woman being
sworn in.) Look at this woman. She has her
right hand up. In a courtroom, that means
that you promise to tell the truth. Everyone
expects you to speak truthfully and sincerely.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is neutral. Say

it with me: neutral. If you are neutral about
two things, you dont feel strongly about
either one. Both sides are the same to you.
2. En espaol, neutral quiere decir que no
preere o se inclina por ninguna de dos
opciones, neutral. Las dos opciones te dan
igual o te parecen lo mismo.
3. Neutral in English and neutral in Spanish are
someone being neutral. (Point to the umpire.)
Look at this umpire. He has to decide whether
the player is safe or not. To do his job, he has
to be neutral. If he werent neutral, he would
help his favorite team win. That would be
cheating, wouldnt it? Umpires cant belong to
either side. They must be neutral.
160
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) William Fritsch /Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (b) Photodisc/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
5. I am sincerely tired today. I didnt sleep well.
How about you? How do you feel today? Are
you happy, tired, angry, surprised? Tell your
partner. Say, I am sincerely
.
6. Another word for sincerely is truly. Listen to
this sentence: I truly promise to do my best.
Now say the same sentence, but with sincerely
instead of truly. Listen to your partner and
help him or her say all the words correctly.
7. Now lets say sincerely together three more
times: sincerely, sincerely, sincerely.
Word 6
neutral
PARTNER TALK
5. Think of two fruits that you like equally,
such as an apple and an orange. Say to
your partner, I like
and
the same. Im neutral.
6. You know that an umpire needs to be neutral.
Who else needs to be neutral:
a judge listening to both sides of the
argument?
a mom listening to her two children?
someone choosing an ice cream avor?
Discuss it with your partner. Say,
needs to be neutral. (Call on
one or two pairs to respond.)
7. Now lets say neutral together three more
times: neutral, neutral, neutral.
Word 1
in the background
Word 2
up front
Word 1
in the background
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, if we say something is in the

background, we mean it is in the part of a
view that is toward the back. It is not in front.
Say it with me: in the background. If I look
out the window, I see some things in the
background. I see telephone poles. I see trees.
Those things are in the background. They are
far away.
2. En espaol, in the background quiere decir
en el fondo. Algo que est en el fondo no
est enfrente. Si miro por la ventana, veo
objetos en el fondo. Veo postes de telfono.
Veo rboles. Esas cosas estn en el fondo.
Estn lejos.
3. This picture shows something in the
background. The grass and water are in the
front. The mountains are in the background.
The mountains are far away.
4. (Show a picture of a landscape from a book.)

Look at this picture. What does it show? What
do you see in the background?
5. Sometimes we can hear noise in the
background. Lets be quiet for a moment.
What background noises do you hear? I
hear birds. I hear the clock ticking. What
other background noises do you hear in the
background?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: in
the background, in the background, in the
background.
Word 2
up front
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, if we say you sit up front, we mean

you sit ahead of everyone else. You dont sit in
the back. Say it with me: up front. The desks
that are closest to the board are up front. All
the other desks are behind those desks.
2. En espaol, up front quiere decir enfrente.
Si te sientas enfrente, no ests en la parte
trasera. Los pupitres ms cercanos al pizarrn
estn enfrente. Los dems pupitres estn
detrs.
3. This picture shows someone up front. (Point
to girl in foreground.) This girl is standing up
front. She is the rst one we see. She is up
front. The rest of the girls are behind her.
4. Who is sitting up front today? Raise your

hand. Now, who is not sitting up front? Raise
your hand.
5. Lets pretend were getting in line to go to
lunch. Lets get in line from tallest to shortest.
Who is up front?
up front, up front, up front.
162
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ron Nichols/USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service. (b) Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
Word 3
all night long
Word 4
all day long
Word 3
all night long
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use the phrase all night long to

talk about something that happens during the
night and continues until morning. Say it with
me: all night long. Sometimes the moon is out
all night long. I like to sleep all night long.
How about you?
2. En espaol, all night long se reere a algo
que sucede toda la noche y contina hasta
la madrugada. A veces se ve la luna toda la
noche. Me gusta dormir toda la noche. Y a ti?
3. This picture shows a place that is open all
night long. Look at the lights. Look at all the
people. It seems that people dont sleep! They
are awake all night long, enjoying the sights
and sounds of the city.
4. Sometimes, you hear things all night long.

Then you cant sleep. For example, I heard
a dog barking all night long. Did you hear
anything last night? Did you hear it all night
long, or just for a little while? Tell your
partner about it.
5. Some stores are open all night long. Have
you ever seen one of these stores? Why do
you think they are open all night long? (Some
people work all day, so they have to shop at
night.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: all
night long, all night long, all night long.
Word 4
all day long
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the phrase all day long to

talk about something that happens during the
day and goes on for a long timeuntil the
afternoon or the evening. Say it with me: all
day long. Our school is open all day long. I am
usually awake all day long.
2. En espaol, all day long se reere a algo
que sucede durante el da y contina por
mucho tiempo, quizs hasta la tarde. Nuestra
escuela se mantiene abierta todo el da. Por lo
general, yo estoy despierta todo el da.
3. This picture shows something that goes on
all day long. This looks like a farmers market.
People sell fruits and vegetables all day long.
When it gets dark, the sellers pack up and go
home.
4. Im going to name some things. If I name

something you would do all day long, nod
your head and say all day long.
eat breakfast
drive on a long car trip
take a nap
play outside on a Saturday
5. Many doctors ofces are open all day long,
but they close at night. What other places are
open all day long, but then close at night?
(bank, school, post ofce, library)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: all day
long, all day long, all day long.
164
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Comstock Images. (b) Lars A. Niki, photographer/McGraw-Hill Companies.
Basic Words
Unit 3 Week 4
Click, Clack, Moo: Cows That Type
dairy, milk, eggs,

cow, chickens, barn door
dairy
milk
eggs
cow
chickens
barn door
ROUTINE
165
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) D. Hurst/Alamy Images. (tc) Bob Coyle, photographer/McGraw-Hill Companies. (tr) Photodisc/Jupiterimages.
(bl) Photo 24 /Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (bm) image100/PunchStock. (br) Digital Vision/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
creating
Unit 3 Week 5 Stirring Up Memories
Word 2
familiar
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
creating
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is creating. Say it

with me: creating. Creating something means
making something, like a work of art.
2. En espaol, to create quiere decir hacer algo,
crear. Uno crea una obra de arte.
3. To create in English and crear in Spanish are
someone creating. (Point to the girl with her
painting.) This girl is putting up her nished
painting. She likes creating artwork with
colorful paint.
PARTNER TALK
5. There are many ways you can create things,
like sculpting, painting, drawing, and
sketching. How do you like creating things?
What kinds of tools do you use? Tell your
partner.
6. Try creating different shapes with your hands.
Can you create a triangle with your ngers?
How about a square? Now, with your partner,
try creating a shape with your bodies and
show the class. (Call on one or two pairs to
show their shape creation.)
7. Now lets say creating together three more
times: creating, creating, creating.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
familiar
PARTNER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is familiar. Say it

with me: familiar. When something is familiar
to you, you have seen it before.
2. En espaol, familiar quiere decir que es
conocido, familiar. Si algo te parece familiar
es porque lo has visto antes.
3. Familiar in English and familiar in Spanish are
the word familiar means. (Point to the
children.) The children in the picture are
familiar with taking the bus to and from
school. It is a familiar activity.
5. In the United States, we celebrate

Thanksgiving and the Fourth of July. If you
lived in another country, would you be
familiar with these holidays? Why or why not?
Tell your partner what you think.
6. When you nd an old toy that you used to
play with when you were a baby, does it seem
familiar to you? How about some old photos
or clothes? Tell your partner about some
familiar things from when you were a baby.
7. Now lets say familiar together three more
times: familiar, familiar, familiar.
168
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Katy McDonnell/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (b) SW Productions/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
occasions
Word 4
memories
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
occasions
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is occasions. Say

it with me: occasions. An occasion is a special
event or celebration. On special occasions,
like holidays, people do things that they dont
normally do every day. For example, my mom
makes her famous chicken casserole on special
occasions, like when Granny comes to visit.
2. En espaol, occasions quiere decir eventos
especiales o celebraciones, ocasiones. En
ocasiones especiales, como los das festivos,
uno hace cosas que no hace todos los das.
Por ejemplo, mi mam hace su guiso de pollo
famoso en ocasiones especiales, como cuanolo
nos visita Abuela.
3. Occasions in English and ocasiones in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is memories.

Say it with me: memories. Memories are things
or thoughts from the past. As you get older,
youll have more and more memories from
when you were younger.
2. En espaol, memories quiere decir las cosas
o pensamientos que tienes del pasado,
recuerdos. Como pasan cosas todo el tiempo,
las personas que han vivido ms aos tienen
mas recuerdos que los jvenes.
3. Now lets look at a picture of people sharing
memories. (Point to the girl and her grandma.)
This girl and her grandmother are looking at
a photo album. It is full of pictures from the
past. These pictures are memories.
170
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Big Cheese Photo/PunchStock. (b) Dennis MacDonald/Alamy Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Now lets look at a picture of a family during
a special occasion. (Point to the family.) They
are at a table and are getting ready to eat
outside. Do people usually eat outside or
inside? This family must eat outside for some
special occasions.
5. On certain occasions, people use a special
tablecloth or wear a special outt. What does
your family like to do on special occasions?
Tell your partner.
6. A birthday or graduation is a special occasion.
What are some other special occasions that
you can think of? Talk about them with your
partner. (Call on one or two pairs to respond.)
7. Now lets say occasions together three more
times: occasions, occasions, occasions.
Word 4
memories
PARTNER TALK
4. Memories can be good or bad. A good
memory can be when you rst learned to ride
your bike. A bad memory can be when you fell
and hurt yourself. Tell your partner about two
good memories from your past.
5. When a friend moves away, sometimes they
leave something for you to remember them
by. It makes you think of the good memories
you shared. If you had to move away, what
would you give your friends as a memory?
6. Now lets say memories together three more
times: memories, memories, memories.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
imagination
Word 6
glamorous
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
imagination
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is imagination.

Say it with me: imagination. When you use
your imagination you make up pictures or
stories in your mind, or you pretend. All kinds
of things are possible in your imagination that
are not possible in real life.
2. En espaol, imagination se dice imaginacin.
Cuando usas tu imaginacin, pintas cosas o creas
historias en tu mente. Hasta las cosas que no
ocurren en vida real son posibles en tu mente.
3. Imagination in English and imaginacin in
languages.
4. Now lets look at a picture of a girl with a big
imagination. (Point to the girl with the tiara.)
This girl is using her imagination to pretend
shes a princess. Shes not a princess in real
life. But she can be anything she wants to be
in her imagination.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is glamorous.

Say it with me: glamorous. Glamorous means
beautiful or fancy. When you are dressed up
in fancy clothes, you might look glamorous.
2. En espaol, glamorous quiere decir atractivo,
bello o elegante; glamouroso. Cuando te
vistes con ropa elegante, te ves glamouroso.
people in glamorous outts. (Point to the
girls.) The girls in this picture are wearing
dresses and the boys are wearing suits. They
look very glamorous!
172
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Sean Justice/Corbis. (b) Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
MOVEMENT
5. Use your imagination! Pretend you are a bird
ying in the sky. Now, imagine that youre a
frog. Make a frog sound: Ribbit! Ribbit!
6. Use your imagination and pretend you are an
animal. Make the sound your animal makes.
We will try to guess what animal you are.
7. Now lets say imagination together three more
times: imagination, imagination, imagination.
Word 6
glamorous
PARTNER TALK
4. Who is more glamorous: a bride in her
wedding gown or a construction worker on
the job? Tell your partner and explain why.
5. Beauty queens and movie stars are glamorous
people. Who are some other glamorous
people? Think of as many as you can. Name
them to your partner.
6. Now lets say glamorous together three more
times: glamorous, glamorous, glamorous.
Word 1
within
Word 2
next door
Word 1
within
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use the word within to talk

about something inside. Say it with me:
within. When you color with crayons, you
usually color within the lines. When I drive, I
stay within my lane. I dont cross the yellow
line.
2. En espaol, within quiere decir dentro, en
el interior. Cuando coloreas, te mantienes
dentro de las lneas. Cuando manejo, me
quedo dentro de mi carril. No cruzo la lnea
amarilla.
3. This picture shows something within. The
baby kangaroo is within the pouch of its
mother. The baby kangaroo stays inside the
pouch.
4. Draw a picture of something within something

elsemaybe something inside a container
or an animal inside a cave. Tell your partner
about your picture.
5. There are a lot of things within the four walls
of this room. I see some desks. I see some
chairs. Make a list of ve things within our
room. Compare your list with your partners.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: within,
within, within.
Word 2
next door
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the phrase next door to

talk about the building or room on either side
of yours. Say it with me: next door. I have
a neighbor next door to me. He lives in the
house to the right of my house. He is very
nice.
2. En espaol, next door se reere al edicio
o cuarto al otro lado del tuyo. Yo tengo un
vecino que vive al otro lado. Vive en la casa
que sigue de la ma. Es un seor amable.
3. This picture shows what next door means.
(Point to one of the houses.) This house is next
door to that house. The person who lives in
this house is a next-door neighbor.
4. Who lives next door to you? Do you know

your next-door neighbors name? (Call on a
few students to respond.)
5. Lets think about the classroom next to ours.
Which class is next door to our class?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: next
door, next door, next door.
174
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ingram Publishing/Alamy Images. (b) FlatEarth Images.
Word 3
most of the time
Word 4
sometimes
Word 3
most of the time
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, something we use the phrase most

of the time to talk about something that
happens a lotalmost all the time. Say it
with me: most of the time. Most of the time,
everyone in our class is at school. Most of the
time, you are all here.
2. En espaol, most of the time se reere a
algo que sucede mucho, es ms, casi todo el
tiempo. Casi todo el tiempo, nuestro grupo
est completo. La mayora de veces, no falta
nadie.
most of the time. The sun shines most of the
time. Sometimes we have cloudy days, but
that doesnt happen a lot. Most of the time,
we can see the sun.
4. Most of the time, I am happy. I feel good. I

dont feel sad or angry very often. How do you
feel most of the time? Tell your partner.
5. Think about what you do at recess. What
game do you play most of the time? Do you
play catch? Do you jump rope?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: most
of the time, most of the time, most of the
time.
Word 4
sometimes
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, sometimes means once in a while,

occasionally, not all the time. Say it with me:
sometimes. Sometimes I drink iced tea with
my dinner. I only drink it one or two times a
week. I dont drink it every day. In fact, most
of the time, I drink water.
2. En espaol, sometimes quiere decir de vez en
cuando; no todo el tiempo. De vez en cuando
tomo t helado con mi cena. Slo lo tomo una
o dos veces a la semana. No lo tomo todos los
das. De hecho, casi siempre tomo agua
sometimes. This family is reading at the park.
This is something they like to do sometimes.
They dont go every day. Sometimes the
children fall asleep. They dont fall asleep at
the park all the time. They probably fell asleep
today because they were tired.
4. Im going to name some things we do at

school each day. Tell whether youre supposed
to do each thing sometimes or most of the
time.
learn new things
listen when someone else is speaking
talk with friends
walk around the classroom
5. Think about places you go sometimes, but not
every day. Sometimes I go to the mall. I dont
go every day. Sometimes I go to my sisters
house. Where do you go sometimes?
sometimes, sometimes, sometimes.
176
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) DAJ/Alamy Images. (b) Digital Archive Japan/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 3 Week 5
Stirring Up Memories
sons, daughters, wife,

children, adult, husband
sons
daughters
wife
children
adult
husband
ROUTINE
177
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Jack Hollingsworth/PunchStock. (tc) Rubberball Productions/Jupiterimages. (tr) Image Source/Getty Images.
(bl) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages. (bm) Amos Morgan/PhotoDisc. (br) B2M Productions/Digital Vision/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
gasped
Unit 4 Week 1 Head, Body, Legs
Word 2
attached
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
gasped
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is gasped. Say it with

me: gasped. To gasp means to make a noise like
this. (Demonstrate a gasp.) Often when people
are shocked or surprised, they gasp.
2. En espaol, to gasp quiere decir jadear,
quedar boquiabierto. Es hacer un ruido as.
(Jadee.) Cuando una persona est sorprendida,
puede jadear.
3. Now lets look at a picture of a girl who has
gasped. (Point to the girl.) Doesnt she look
shocked? The girl is listening to her brother
read a story. She probably gasped after
hearing something shocking.
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend your friends threw you a surprise
birthday party. What would you sound like if
you gasped? Show your partner.
5. Take turns telling your partner something
shocking. Your partner will gasp in surprise.
Then switch roles.
6. Now lets say gasped together three more
times: gasped, gasped, gasped.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
MOVEMENT
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is attached.

Say it with me: attached. Attached means
connected. When two or more things
are attached, they are connected or joined
together.
2. En espaol, attached quiere decir atado o
conectado. Cuando dos cosas estn atadas,
estn conectadas o unidas.
is attached. (Point to the tomatoes.) These
tomatoes are all attached to the same vine.
attached
4. Stand up with your partner. Lets play Simon

Says! Im going to tell you some things to
do. If I say Simon Says you should do what
I say. If I dont say Simon Says you should
stay still. Simon says attach your elbow to
your partners. Simon says attach your head to
your partners. Now, attach your hip to your
partners. Simon didnt say! Simon says attach
your bottom back onto your chair.
5. Show me what you would look like with your
hand attached to your head. Now, show me
what you would look like with your hand
attached to your other hand. Arent you glad
that our hands arent attached to anything
but our arms?
6. Now lets say attached together three more
times: attached, attached, attached.
180
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Michael Newman/PhotoEdit. (b) Ingram Publishing (Superstock Limited)/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
frantically
Word 4
swung
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
frantically
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is frantically.

Say it with me: frantically. Frantically means
wildly. If you realize your backpack is
missing right before the bus comes, you might
look for it frantically.
2. En espaol, frantically quiere decir
frenticamente o desesperadamente.
Si el autobs escolar est por llegar y
no encuentras tu mochila, la buscaras
frenticamente.
3. Now lets look at people paddling frantically
in a kayak. (Point to the people in the kayak.)
These men are paddling frantically so they
have control of the kayak. If they werent
paddling so hard and fast, the water might tip
the kayak over or carry them somewhere else.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is swung. Say

it with me: swung. Swung is a past form of
swing, which means to move while hanging.
Imagine a monkey that used a vine to go from
one tree to the other. That monkey swung on
the vine.
2. En espaol, to swing quiere decir columpiarse
o deslizarse por el aire. Imagina que un mono
us una enredadera para saltar de rbol en
rbol. Ese mono se columpi de la enredadera.
has swung. (Point to the girl swinging.) This
girl has swung on her swing ever since she
was a little girl. Now that shes older, shes not
afraid to swing very high.
182
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Duomo/Corbis. (b) mylife photos/Alamy Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Have you ever gotten a bloody nose? Your
parents might have searched frantically for a
tissue or a towel to help you with it. What are
some other situations when you might look
for something frantically? Tell your partner.
5. Pretend you are playing hide-and-seek. The
seeker starts counting very fast and you run
to nd a good hiding spot. Do you search
for a hiding place frantically, or do you look
for one calmly? Tell your partner. Use this
sentence: I would search for a good hiding
spot
.
6. Now lets say frantically together three more
times: frantically, frantically, frantically.
Word 4
swung
PARTNER TALK
4. Have you ever swung on something that
wasnt a swing? Tell your partner about it.
Then try to think of other ways to swing.
(Examples include: on the monkey bars, from a
rope, from a tree branch)
5. The last time you swung on a swing, did
you swing high? If youve never swung on a
swing, do you think youd like to swing high?
Exchange answers with your partner.
6. Now lets say swung together three more
times: swung, swung, swung.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
delicious
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
delicious
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is delicious. Say

it with me: delicious. When something tastes
really good, it is delicious. I think chocolate
cake is delicious.
2. En espaol, delicious quiere decir delicioso,
sabroso, de buen sabor. A m me parece
delicioso el pastel de chocolate.
3. Delicious in English and delicioso in Spanish
and mean the same thing in both languages
4. Now lets look at a picture of a family eating a
delicious meal. (Point to the family.) The boy
in this picture is about to eat an apple. You
can tell he thinks the apple is delicious by the
look on his face.
184
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Laureen March/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
5. Pretend you are very hungry. You have a
choice to eat an apple or a carrot. Which do
you think is more delicious? Tell your partner.
6. What foods do you think are delicious? What
foods do you think arent so delicious? Talk
about delicious foods with your partner.
7. Now lets say delicious together three more
times: delicious, delicious, delicious.
Word 1
on top of
Word 2
in the middle
Word 1
on top of
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, we use the phrase on top of to tell

about something that is on the highest part of
another thing. Say it with me: on top of . My
cat sometimes sleeps on top of my bed. My
pillows are on top of my bed.
2. En espaol, on top of quiere decir sobre;
encima de. Mi gato a veces duerme sobre mi
cama. Mis almohadas estn sobre mi cama.
3. This picture shows something on top of a
rock. This mountain goat is on top of a rock.
Also, the mountain goat has horns on top of
its head.
4. Lets play Simon Says. Do what I say, but only

when I say Simon Says. Simon says put your
hand on top of your head. Simon says put your
hands on top of your shoulders. Put one hand
on top of the other hand.
5. Now lets all put our hands on top of our
desks. Now lets put our heads on top of our
hands. Good night!
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: on top
of, on top of, on top of.
Word 2
in the middle
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, in the middle means in the center

or the part that is halfway between two
places. Say it with me: in the middle. My nose
is in the middle of my face.
2. En espaol, in the middle quiere decir en el
medio, en la mitad entre una cosa y otra. Mi
nariz est en medio de mi cara.
3. This picture shows the phrase in the middle.
Look at this big mountain goat. Most of its
body is in the middle. He is very big in the
middle.
4. (Have three children stand in a row.) Here are

three children. Who is in the middle? Change
places. Who is in the middle now?
5. Now raise your right hand. Look at your palm.
Thats the part without ngers. Poke your
right palm in the middle. Use the nger of
your left hand.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: in the
middle, in the middle, in the middle.
186
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Chase Swift/Corbis. (b) Chase Swift/Corbis.
Word 3
at the bottom
Word 4
on tiptoe
Word 3
at the bottom
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, at the bottom means on the

lower part of something. Say it with me: at
the bottom. My feet are at the bottom of my
body. Sand is at the bottom of the sea.
2. En espaol, at the bottom quiere decir en la
parte ms baja; en el fondo. Mis pies estn
en la parte ms baja de mi cuerpo. Hay arena
en el fondo del mar.
3. This picture shows something at the bottom.
Heres the big mountain goat again. (Point
to the goats hooves.) His hooves are at the
bottom of his body. I wonder what is at the
bottom of the mountain. Maybe other goats
are at the bottom.
4. Im going to ask some questions about my

body. Answer yes or no. If you answer
no, say the sentence correctly.
My head is at the bottom of my body.
My feet are at the top of my body.
My belly button is in the middle of my belly.
My elbow is in the middle of my arm.
5. (Stack three different books and display
them.) Which book is at the bottom of this
pile?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: at the
bottom, at the bottom, at the bottom.
Word 4
on tiptoe
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, on tiptoe means on the tips of

your toes. Say it with me: on tiptoe. I may
walk on tiptoe if someone is sleeping. I walk
very, very quietly, like this. (Demonstrate
walking on tiptoe.)
2. En espaol, on tiptoe quiere decir de
puntillas. Camino de puntillas si alguien
est durmiendo. Camino as, silenciosamente.
(Demuestre cmo se camina de puntillas.)
3. This picture shows someone dancing on
tiptoe. Ballerinas can walk and dance on
tiptoe. They dance on tiptoe across the stage.
Ballerinas must have very strong toes.

yes or no. If you answer no, say why.
You are playing soccer. Do you run on tiptoe?
Your mom just mopped the oor. Do you walk
across on tiptoe?
The baby is sleeping. Do you walk on tiptoe?
You want to reach something high. Do you go
on tiptoe?
5. Finish this sentence: I walk on tiptoe when
respond.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: on
tiptoe, on tiptoe, on tiptoe.
188
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Chase Swift/Corbis. (b) George Doyle/Stockbyte/Getty Images.
Basic Words
Unit 4 Week 1
Head, Body, Legs
grab, reach, stretch,

stand, swim, bounce
grab
reach
stretch
stand
swim
bounce
ROUTINE
189
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Tom Grill/Jupiterimages. (tc) CS Productions/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (tr) Stockbyte/PunchStock.
(bl) ImageState/PunchStock. (bm) PhotoLink/Photodisc/Getty Images. (br) Deborah Jaffe/Digital Vision/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
attention
Unit 4 Week 2 Ofcer Buckle and Gloria
Word 2
buddy
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
attention
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is attention. Say

it with me: attention. If you are paying
attention to your teacher, then you are
looking and listening carefully. It is important
to pay attention in class so you dont miss
anything important.
2. En espaol, attention quiere decir atencin
o inters. Si le pones atencin a tu maestra,
ests mostrando inters y escuchando con
cuidado. Es importante poner atencin en
la clase para que no te pierdas de nada
importante.
3. Attention in English and atencin in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is buddy. Say

it with me: buddy. Buddy is another word
for friend. When I was growing up, my
neighbor Kate was my best buddy.
2. En espaol, buddy quiere decir amigo o
amiga. Cuando yo era nia, mi vecina Kate
era mi mejor amiga.
3. Now lets look at a picture of a boy with his
buddy. (Point to the boys.) The boy in the
green shirt is playing with his buddy in the
yellow shirt.
192
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ragnar Schmuck/fStop/Getty Images. (b) Masterfile.
MOVEMENT
someone paying attention. (Point to the
dog.) This dog is really paying attention to
something. What do you think hes looking
at? Maybe the owner has a treat for him.
5. Pretend that you are walking in a park. You
see your friend across the eld. How do you
get your friends attention? Do you jump up
and down? Do you yell or wave? Using your
inside voice, get up and show how you would
get your friends attention.
6. Do you give your total attention to your
teacher during class? If you are paying
attention right now, raise your hand. Now,
everybody show me what it looks like when
youre paying attention.
7. Now lets say attention together three more
times: attention, attention, attention.
Word 2
buddy
PARTNER TALK
4. What do you like to do with a buddy? Do you
like to play outside? Do you like to watch
movies? Tell your partner.
5. Do you think it is better to have one really
good buddy or a bunch of buddies? Tell
your partner and explain your answer. Use
this sentence: I think it is better to have
because
.
6. Now lets say buddy together three more
times: buddy, buddy, buddy.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
accident
Word 4
tip
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
accident
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is accident. Say

it with me: accident. An accident is something
that wasnt meant to happen. An accident
can be small, like when you spill a glass of
water. Or an accident can be big, like when
somebody falls off a ladder and gets hurt.
2. En espaol, accident quiere decir accidente.
Un accidente es algo que sucede sin intencin.
Un accidente puede no tener importancia,
como cuando se derrama un vaso de agua.
Un accidente puede ser grave, como cuando
alguien se cae de una escalera y se lastima.
3. Accident in English and accidente in Spanish
messy accident. (Point to the people in the
restaurant.) The waitress spilled food all over
the ladys white shirt. Surely the waitress
didnt mean to spill the food on the lady. It
was an accident.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is tip. Say it

with me: tip. A tip is a helpful suggestion.
When someone gives you a tip, they tell you
a way to do something better.
2. En espaol, tip quiere decir sugerencia
o consejo. Cuando alguien te da una
sugerencia, es para ayudarte a hacer algo de
una mejor manera.
someone giving a tip. (Point to the boy and
woman.) This woman is giving the little boy a
writing tip. Maybe shes telling him to write
neatly and leave space between words.
194
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stanley Fellerman/Corbis. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
5. What can you say if you have a small accident
or cause someone else to have an accident?
Tell your partner. (Examples include: Excuse
me! Im sorry! I didnt mean to do that. It was
an accident.)
6. Tell your partner about an accident you had.
Did you spill grape juice on the carpet? Did
you drop your books down the stairs? Tell
your partner all about it.
7. Now lets say accident together three more
times: accident, accident, accident.
PARTNER TALK
Word 4
tip
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend your partner is in a spelling contest.
Give your partner a tip to help him or her get
ready for it. (Examples include: Write down
your words two times each. Spell your words
out loud. Go with your rst guess.)
5. All of you are learning a new language:
English. What tips could you give a new
student who is just starting to learn English?
6. Now lets say tip together three more times:
tip, tip, tip.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
enormous
Word 6
obeys
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
enormous
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is enormous.

Say it with me: enormous. Enormous means
very, very big. An elephant and a whale are
both enormous. Theyre some of the biggest
animals on Earth!
2. En espaol, enormous quiere decir enorme,
muy grande. Un elefante y una ballena
son enormes. Son unos de los animales ms
grandes del mundo.
3. Enormous in English and enorme in Spanish
4. Now lets look at a picture of an enormous
sandwich. (Point to the sandwich.) Have you
ever seen such an enormous sandwich? Its so
big! How long do you think it would take you
to eat this enormous sandwich?
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is obeys. Say

it with me: obeys. Obeys means does what
someone tells you to do. When a child obeys
his mother, he or she does what she says.
2. En espaol, to obey quiere decir obedecer;
hacer lo que alguien te pide que hagas.
Cuando un nio obedece a su mam, hace lo
que la mam le pide.
3. To obey in English and obedecer in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture that shows how
someone obeys. (Point to the kids crossing the
street.) It is important to follow the rules of
crossing the street. Look how everyone obeys
the crossing guard. They only cross the street
when the crossing guard tells them to.
196
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Heide Benser/zefa/Corbis. (b) Andersen Ross/Blend Images/Jupiterimages.
MOVEMENT
5. What is the most enormous animal youve
ever seen? Where did you see it? In a zoo? Tell
your partner all about it.
6. Draw a picture of something enormous.
Compare your drawing with your partner. Talk
about which thing would be more enormous
in real life.
7. Now lets say enormous together three more
times: enormous, enormous, enormous.
Word 6
obeys
MOVEMENT
5. A well-trained dog obeys his owner. Pretend
you are a dog and that I am your owner. Do
what I tell you to do.
Sit!
Jump!
Speak!
Down!
Good kids.
6. Lets play Simon Says! In this game,
everyone obeys Simon, but only when I say
Simon Says. Simons says stand up. Simon
says raise your left hand. Put your hand down.
Simon didnt say! Simon says stand on one
foot. Simon says sit down.
7. Now lets say obeys together three more
times: obeys, obeys, obeys.
Word 1
always
Word 2
never
Word 1
always
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, always means continually, every

time, or forever. Say it with me: always.
I always brush my teeth in the morning. I
always take a shower in the evening.
2. En espaol, always quiere decir
continuamente; todo el tiempo; siempre.
Siempre me cepillo los dientes en la maana.
Siempre me bao por la tarde.
3. This picture shows the word always. This
family always wears helmets when they ride
their bikes. You should always wear a helmet
when you ride your bike, too. Do you always
wear a helmet?
4. I am going to say some sentences. If you

agree with the sentence, repeat the sentence.
If you dont agree, dont repeat it.
You should always look both ways when
crossing the street.
You should always punch your neighbor
in the arm.
You should always eat breakfast before
coming to school.
You should always watch television until
midnight.
5. Now I am going to ask some questions.
Answer the questions using the word always.
Where do you go on Fridays?
What do you do at recess?
Where do you go for lunch?
Where do you go after school?
6. Repeat the word three times with me: always,
always, always.
Word 2
never
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, never is the opposite of always. It

means at no time, not ever, not at all. Say it
with me: never. I never come to school late. I
never forget my cell phone.
2. En espaol, never quiere decir nunca; en
ningn momento; jams. Es lo opuesto a
siempre. Nunca llego tarde a la escuela. Nunca
olvido mi telfono mvil.
3. This picture shows something you should
never do. This picture shows a construction
site. Only workers can come in here, and only
if they are protected with hard hats. The
sign says danger. You should never go near a
construction site without proper protection
because it could be dangerous.
4. Think about things you do all the time.

Think about things never do. Listen to these
statements. Call out always or never.
School starts at [start time] in the morning.
School is over at 6:30 in the evening.
We have lunch at [lunch time].
We go to school on Sundays.
5. Tell me a food you never eat. For example, I
never eat green olives. I dont like them. Say
I would never eat
. (Call on
a few children to respond.)
6. Repeat the word three times with me: never,
never, never.
198
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ben Blankenburg/Corbis. (b) Kevin Jordan/Digital Vision/Getty Images.
Word 3
again and again
Word 4
as usual
Word 3
again and again
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, again and again means often or

many times. Say it with me: again and again.
We might sing a new song again and again
until we all know it. You may spell a word
again and again until you can remember how
to spell it correctly.
2. En espaol, again and again quiere decir una
y otra vez. Podemos cantar una cancin una
y otra vez hasta aprenderla. Puedes deletrear
una palabra una y otra vez hasta que te
acuerdes cmo se escribe.
3. This picture shows what it means to do
something again and again. This girl looks like
she is good at jumping rope. I think she can
jump again and again. Maybe her friends are
counting, one, two, three, four... Will the
girl ever miss?
4. Think of what we do in school again and

again. Do we sing again and again when we
are learning a song? Do we recite math facts
again and again? What else do we do again
and again? (Call on a few children to respond.)
5. Lets snap our ngers. Lets snap our ngers
again and again. Lets snap for 30 seconds.
one, two, three, go!
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: again
and again, again and again, again and again.
Word 4
as usual
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, we use the phrase as usual to talk

about something that happens regularly,
frequently, or always the same way. Say
it with me: as usual. The bus was late this
morning as usual. As usual, I had orange juice
with my breakfast.
2. En espaol, as usual quiere decir como de
costumbre. Como de costumbre, el autobs
lleg tarde esta maana. Como de costumbre,
tom jugo de naranja con mi desayuno.
3. This picture shows the phrase as usual. These
children are arriving at school as usual. Every
day, the bus picks them up at the bus stop.
Today the bus picked them up at as usual.
4. We all have a morning routine. We do the

same thing each morning before school.
Today, I made myself a cup of coffee as usual.
What do you usually do? With your partner,
talk about what you did this morning as usual.
5. Think of what you had for breakfast or lunch
yesterday. Was it the same thing you have all
the time? If so, tell your partner, As usual, I
had
for breakfast (or lunch).
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: as
usual, as usual, as usual.
200
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) AGB Photo/Alamy Images. (b) SW Productions/Photodisc Green/Getty Images.
Basic Words
Unit 4 Week 2
Ofcer Buckle and Gloria
swivel chair, shoelace, electrical

storm, spill, thumbtacks, hammer
swivel chair
shoelace
electrical storm
spill
thumbtacks
hammer
ROUTINE
201
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Ingram Publishing (Superstock Limited)/Alamy Images. (tc) C Squared Studios/Photodisc/Getty Images. (tr) Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
(bl) Steven Errico/Photodisc/Getty Images. (bm) Jacques Cornell/McGraw-Hill Companies. (br) Jupiter Images/ Comstock Images/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
serious
Unit 4 Week 3 A Trip to the Emergency Room
Word 2
personal
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
serious
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is serious. Say it

with me: serious. Serious means important
or not funny. A serious problem can be very
difcult to solve.
2. En espaol, serious quiere decir serio;
importante; grave. Un problema serio es
difcil de resolver.
3. Serious in English and serio in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture of a serious matter.
(Point to the doctors.) These doctors are looking
at something important in an x-ray. Their facial
expressions are very serious. You can tell they
dont think this problem is funny at all.
PARTNER TALK
5. Pretend you are in a play. You have to say
some very serious lines. Say them for your
partner in a very serious voice. This is a very
serious problem. I dont know what were
going to do about it.
6. Are you a serious person, or are you always
laughing and joking around? Tell your partner
if you think he/she is serious or not.
7. Now lets say serious together three more
times: serious, serious, serious.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
PARTNER TALK
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is personal. Say

it with me: personal. Personal means having
to do with one person, private. Personal
information is usually not shared with many
other people. It is private.
2. En espaol, personal quiere decir personal;
privado. La informacin personal no se
comparte con mucha gente. Es privada.
3. Personal in English and personal in Spanish are
the word personal. (Point to the patient
and doctor.) The doctor is writing down
the patients personal information. Her
information will only be shown to other
doctors who need to see it.
personal
5. We dont share personal information and

personal thoughts with everybody. But there
are some people we can share personal things
with. Who can you share your most personal
thoughts and ideas with? Tell your partner.
(Examples include: a best friend, parents, a
special teacher)
6. If you dont have a journal, pretend you write
in one. Would you ever share your journal
with someone, or are your thoughts too
personal? Tell your partner what you think.
7. Now lets say personal together three more
times: personal, personal, personal.
204
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Source Black/Getty Images. (b) Jose Luis Pelaez, Inc/Blend Images/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
informs
Word 4
heal
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
informs
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is informs. Say

it with me: informs. Informs means tells or
gives information. If someone informs you
about something, that person tells you about
it and gives you the information that you
need to know.
2. En espaol, to inform quiere decir informar;
dar informacin. Si alguien te informa sobre
algo, esa persona te da informacin que
necesitas.
3. To inform in English and informar in Spanish
word informs. (Point to the nurse and patient.)
Here, the nurse informs her patient about the
doctors plan. The nurse is telling the patient
what she needs to know.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is heal. Say it

with me: heal. To heal means to get well.
When you are injured, you have to wait a
while for your injury to heal.
2. En espaol, to heal quiere decir sanar; curar.
Cuando te lastimas, hay que esperar un
tiempo para que la herida sane.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows how the
word heal is used. (Point to the boy and his
mom.) This boy broke his wrist. The doctor put a
cast on the boys wrist. This will help it heal.
206
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Thinkstock Images/Jupiterimages. (b) Stockbyte/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
5. If you got an A+ on your report card, how
would you inform your parents? Would you
run into the house and scream, I GOT AN
A+!? or would you inform them quietly
during dinner? Show your partner how you
would inform your parents about your A+.
6. A newspaper columnist informs people about
what is happening in the town or world.
Pretend you are a newspaper columnist. What
would you like to inform people about? Use
this sentence: I would like to inform people
about
.
7. Now lets say informs together three more
times: informs, informs, informs.
Word 4
heal
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend you fell on your knee and scraped it.
How long will it take to heal? What do you do
to help it heal? Do you put a bandage on your
knee, or do you just clean it? Tell your partner.
5. Scars are there to remind us about our past
injuries. Do you have any scars? Show or tell
your partner about them. Then, tell your
partner how you got your scars and how long
it took for the injuries to heal.
6. Now lets say heal together three more times:
heal, heal, heal.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
aid
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is aid. Say it

with me: aid. Aid means help or support.
Someone who helps people gives them aid.
2. En espaol, aid quiere decir ayudar; asistir.
Cuand una persona asiste a otros, los ayuda.
is giving aid to another person. (Point to the
woman in the picture.) The woman in the
wheelchair needs help. She broke her arm.
The man gives her aid by helping to push
her wheelchair.
208
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Corbis/Jupiterimages.
aid
PARTNER TALK
4. People who work at hospitals provide aid to
other people who need help. I am a teacher
so I can provide aid to my students. What kind
of aid do you need? Tell your partner.
5. Which of these things might someone do to
provide aid to another person?
push a wheelchair
build a table
check someones temperature
plant some corn
6. Now lets say aid together three more times:
aid, aid, aid.
Word 1
probably
Word 2
properly
Word 1
probably
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we use the word probably to talk

about something that is very likely to happen.
Say it with me: probably. I see clouds in the
sky. It will probably rain today.
2. En espaol, probably quiere decir
probablemente, que es casi seguro que
ocurra. Veo nubes en el cielo. Probablemente
va a llover hoy.
3. Probably in English and probablemente in
languages.
4. This picture gives an example of probably. This
boy is doing is homework. If he nishes soon,
he will probably go out to play.
5. Imagine you are at a hospital visiting your

friend. What will you probably see? Finish this
sentence:
At the hospital, I will probably see
.
6. Now I am going to ask some questions.
Answer the questions using the word probably
in your sentence.
What time will you go to sleep tonight?
What time will you wake up tomorrow?
probably, probably, probably.
Word 2
properly
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, properly means in the correct

way. Say it with me: properly. I am going to
spell the word friend properly: f-r-i-e-n-d. Did I
spell the word properly?
2. En espaol, properly quiere decir
correctamente. Voy a deletrear la palabra
amigo correctamente: a-m-i-g-o. Lo hice
correctamente?
3. This picture shows something you should do
properly. This adult is fastening the childrens
seatbelts properly. If they are not fastened
properly, the children may not be safe.
4. Pretend there is a trafc light across the

street. Tell me how to cross the street
properly. Complete these sentences:
First, wait until the light turns
.
Then,
.
5. How do you say your last name properly? (Call
on a few children to respond.) How do you
spell your last name properly?
properly, properly, properly.
210
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (b) Adam Gault/Digital Vision/Getty Images.
Word 3
day and night
Word 4
as quickly as possible
Word 3
day and night
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, day and night means all the time;

while you are awake and while you sleep.
Say it with me: day and night. Some things
happen all the time. A re can start anytime.
Thats why re ghters are available any time
you need help, day and night.
2. En espaol, day and night quiere decir da y
noche; a cualquier hora o en todo momento.
Algunas cosas pueden suceder a cualquier
hora. Un incendio puede suceder a cualquier
hora. Por eso los bomberos estn disponibles
cuando los necesites, da y noche.
3. This picture shows the phrase day and night.
Fireghters must be ready day and night. They
sleep in the rehouse, ready for a call to come
in. When the call comes in, they are ready to
go, day and night.
4. Finish this rhyme:

All the world has day and
.
Night is dark, and day is bright.
5. Answer these questions:
Are we in school day and night?
Does the sun shine day and night?
Do the stars come out day and night?
Does our heart beat day and night?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: day
and night, day and night, day and night.
Word 4
as quickly as possible
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, if we say something happens as

quickly as possible, we mean that it happens
as fast as it can. It cant happen any faster.
Say it with me: as quickly as possible. Watch
me blink my eyes as quickly as possible. (Blink
quickly.)
2. En espaol, as quickly as possible quiere decir
lo ms rpido posible. Cuando haces algo lo
ms rpido posible, no hay manera de que lo
hagas ms rpido. Mira cmo parpadeo lo ms
rpido posible. (Parpade rpidamente.)
3. This picture shows the phrase as quickly as
possible. An ambulance must take an injured
person to the hospital. The driver needs to go
as quickly as possible. All the cars need to get
out of the way!
4. When I was little, I played hide-and-seek. I

had to hide as quickly as possible. Think about
the games you play with your friends. In what
games do you have to move as quickly as
possible? (Examples include tag, jump rope,
baseball.)
5. Lets count to ten as quickly as possible. Lets
start together now.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: as
quickly as possible, as quickly as possible, as
quickly as possible.
212
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Mark Karrass/Corbis. (b) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 4 Week 3
A Trip to the Emergency Room
paramedic, siren, ambulance,

X-ray, patient, wheelchair
paramedic
siren
ambulance
X-ray
patient
wheelchair
ROUTINE
213
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Rubberball Productions/Jupiterimages. (tc) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages. (tr) S. Meltzer/PhotoLink/Photodisc/Getty Images.
(bl) Dynamic Graphics/Creatas Images/Jupiterimagess. (bm) image100/PunchStock. (br) JupiterImages/ Comstock Images/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
young
Unit 4 Week 4 A Harbor Seal Pup Grows Up
Word 2
examines
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
young
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is young. Say it with

me: young. Young means not old. Babies
and children are young. Puppies and kittens
are young, too.
2. En espaol, young quiere decir joven, que no
es viejo. Los bebs y los nios son jovenes.
Los cachorritos y los gatitos son jovenes
tambin.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows a young
animal. (Point to the small seal in the photo.)
Look at this baby seal. He is very young. He
stays with his mother so his mother can take
care of him and keep him safe.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is examines. Say

it with me: examines. Examines means looks at
very carefully. When you visit the doctor, the
doctor examines you to nd out if you are sick.
2. En espaol, to examine quiere decir
examinar; mirar con mucho cuidado.
Cuando visitas el doctor, ste te examina para
ver si ests enfermo o enferma.
3. To examine in English and examinar in Spanish
examines. (Point to the doctor and then the
boy in the photo.) The doctor examines the
boys throat. She looks carefully. She wants to
see why he feels sick.
216
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Creatas Images/Jupiterimages. (b) Michelle D. Bridwell/PhotoEdit.
PARTNER TALK
4. The small seal in the picture is very young. He
needs his mother. Talk about the seals with
your partner. How does the mother seal take
care of the young seal? (Examples include:
She feeds him. She teaches him to swim. She
teaches him to catch sh.)
5. The opposite of young is old. There are some
things you can do when youre young that you
might not be able to do so well when youre
old. Tell you partner some of the things you
can do better when youre young. (Examples
include: play on the monkey bars, run fast,
ride a skateboard)
6. Now lets say young together three more
times: young, young, young.
Word 2
examines
MOVEMENT
5. Lets examine our pencils. Pick up your pencil
and look at it carefully. Look at both ends.
Look at the sides. Is your pencil in good
shape?
6. Lets examine our hands. Look at the backs
of your hands. Look carefully. Now turn your
hands over and look at the other side. Look
carefully.
7. Now lets say examine together three more
times: examine, examine, examine.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
mammal
Word 4
normal
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
mammal
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is mammal. Say

it with me: mammal. A mammal is a warmblooded animal that has hair and makes milk
to feed its babies. Cats and dogs are mammals.
They have hair, they are warm blooded, and
they make milk to feed their babies. Birds are
not mammals.
2. En espaol, mammal quiere decir mamfero.
Un mamfero es un animal de sangre tibia.
Tiene pelo y la madre amamanta a sus cras
con su propia leche. Los gatos y los perros
son mamferos. Tienen pelo, tienen sangre
tibia y amamantan a sus bebs. Los pjaros
no son mamferos.
3. Now lets look at a picture of a mammal.
(Point to the seal in the photo.) A seal is a
mammal. It has very short hair. It has warm
blood. It makes milk to feed its babies.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is normal. Say

it with me: normal. Normal means usual.
Normal is the way things are most of the time.
In the summertime, hot days are normal. Cold
days are not normal in the summer.
2. En espaol, normal quiere decir normal;
usual. Cuando las cosas se hacen de forma
normal, es como se hacen casi siempre. Un da
fro no es normal en el verano.
3. Normal in English and normal in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at the picture. (Point to the
doctor and then to the girl in the photo.) The
doctor is examining the girls neck. Does it feel
normal? If it doesnt feel normal, that could
mean the girl is sick.
218
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Creatas/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Some zoo animals are mammals and some are
not. Tell your partner three zoo animals that
are mammals. How do you know?
5. Tell your partner three farm animals that are
mammals. Explain how you know.
6. Now lets say mammal together three more
times: mammal, mammal, mammal.
Word 4
normal
MOVEMENT
5. Lets walk across the room in a normal way.
Walk how you usually walk. Lets walk across
the room again, but this time lets make very
tiny steps, like this. (Demonstrate taking tiny
steps.) That isnt your normal way to walk, is
it?
6. Take a piece of paper and write your name.
Write how you usually write. Now put your
pencil in your other hand and try to write your
name. That isnt your normal way to write, is
it? Its very different.
7. Now lets say normal together three more
times: normal, normal, normal.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
hunger
Word 6
rescued
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
hunger
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is hunger. Say

it with me: hunger. Hunger is the feeling you
have when you need to eat. Hunger means
you feel hungry. For example, you usually
have hunger in the morning before breakfast.
You want to eat then.
2. En espaol, hunger quiere decir lo que
sientes cuando necesitas comer, hambre.
Cuando no has comido por mucho tiempo,
tienes hambre. Por ejemplo, normalmente
tienes hambre por la maana antes de
desayunar. Hay que comer.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is rescued. Say it

with me: rescued. Rescued is a past form of to
rescue, which means to make safe. We try to
rescue people and animals that are in danger.
For example, if there is a re in a house, remen
will rescue the people in the house. They take
them outside, away from the re.
2. En espaol, to rescue quiere decir rescatar,
liberar a alguien de algn peligro. Hay que
intentar rescatar a las personas y animales
que estn en peligro. Por ejemplo, si hay un
incendio en una casa, un bombero tratara
de rescatar a las personas que se encuentran
atrapadas dentro de la casa.
3. To rescue in English and rescatar in Spanish
220
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/SuperStock. (b) Photo by Robert Gallagher/Zuma Press.
PARTNER TALK
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows kids
feeling hunger. (Point to the kids and then to
the pizza in the photo.) These children must
be pretty hungry. All that pizza should get rid
of their hunger, though.
4. We feel hunger at different times of the day.
When do you usually feel hunger? Tell your
partner.
5. When you feel hunger in the morning, what
do you usually like to eat? Tell your partner.
6. Now lets say hunger together three more
times: hunger, hunger, hunger.
Word 6
rescued
PARTNER TALK
something beign rescued. (Point to the soldier
and the dog in the photo.) This man rescued
this dog. Maybe the dog was in a re. Maybe
it was in water and couldnt swim. The man
helped the dog. The dog is safe now.
5. Lets pretend we are the man in the picture.
We are rescuing the dog. What do we say to
the dog? (Examples include: Come here, dog.
Dont be afraid. I will help you. Im going to
rescue you.)
6. Have you ever heard, read, or seen a story
about someone who was rescued? If not,
imagine a story about someone who was
rescued. Tell your partner all about it.
7. Now lets say rescued together three more
times: rescued, rescued, rescued.
Word 1
become stronger
Word 2
on her own
Word 1
become stronger
TEACHER TALK
PARTNER TALK
1. In English, to become stronger means to

get more powerful. Say it with me: become
stronger. I lift weights so that I can become
stronger. I dont want to be weak. I need to
be able to last through a long day at work.
2. En espaol, to become stronger quiere decir
hacerse ms fuerte. Yo levanto pesas para
ser ms fuerte. No quiero estar dbil. Necesito
tener fuerzas para trabajar todo el da
3. This picture gives an example of someone
who is working to become stronger. This
soccer player already practiced with his team.
But here he is, practicing by himself. He wants
to become stronger. He wants to be a better
player.
4. Think about what we eat. What kinds of

foods can help us become stronger? Tell your
partner what kinds of foods you eat to help
your body grow big and strong. (Examples
include: vegetables, fruits, milk)
5. Exercise helps us become stronger. What
kinds of activities do you like to do to become
stronger? Tell your partner.
become stronger, become stronger, become
stronger.
Word 2
on her own
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, on her own means by herself.

Say it with me: on her own. I am so proud of
my little niece. Shes one year old. Yesterday
she walked on her own. She walked by herself.
Nobody helped her.
2. En espaol, on her own quiere decir ella
sola. Estoy orgullosa de mi sobrina. Tiene
apenas un ao. Ayer dio sus primeros pasos.
Ella solita lo hizo. Nadie le ayud.
3. This picture shows a girl doing something
on her own. This girl has been taking piano
lessons for six months. She practices on her
own. Nobody has to tell her to practice. She
just knows. After school, she practices the
piano on her own.
4. Do you remember my little niece I was telling

you about? Shes only one year old. She cant
do very much on her own. Answer these
questions.
Can she read on her own?
Can she tie her shoes on her own?
Can she pour a glass of milk on her own?
5. What do you think a one-year-old little girl
can do on her own?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: on her
own, on her own, on her own.
222
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) PNC/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (b) Charles Smith/Corbis.
Word 3
almost there
Word 4
in front of
Word 3
almost there
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, almost there means just a little bit

more to go; very near. Say it with me: almost
there. Watch me try to touch the oor. Im
almost there! I have a little bit farther to go.
My ngers are very near to the oor.
2. En espaol, almost there quiere decir que le
falta poco, que casi va a llegor. Voy a tratar
de tocar el piso con mis dedos. Falta poco.
Casi alcanzo! Mis dedos casi tocan el piso.
3. This picture shows some people that are
almost there. Look at these rock climbers.
They have been climbing a long time. This is
hard work. But look, they are almost to the
top of the rock. They are almost there.
4. Pretend youre pedaling as you nish this

rhyme:
Youre riding your bike;
the winds in your hair.
Keep riding, keep riding!
Youre almost ____ .
5. Answer these questions:
What day is today?
Is it almost the weekend?
Are we almost there?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: almost
there, almost there, almost there.
Word 4
in front of
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something that is in front of

something is ahead of all the rest. Its the rst
part that you see. Say it with me: in front of.
What do you see in front of the classroom?
2. En espaol, in front of quiere decir enfrente;
delante de todo lo dems. Es lo primero que
ves. Qu ves enfrente del saln?
3. This picture shows something in front of
someone. This girl looks proud of her drawing.
She is holding it in front of her. She wants you
to see it.
4. (Stand in front of the class.) Am I standing

in front of the class, or in back of the class?
(Walk to the back of the class and repeat.)
Where am I standing now?
5. (Have a volunteer come up and stand in front
of you, facing the class.) Who is standing in
front of me?
front of, in front of, in front of.
224
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Javier Pierini/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (b) Creatas/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 4 Week 4
A Harbor Seal Pup Grows Up
height, temperature, teeth,

heartbeat, eyes, size
height
temperature
teeth
heartbeat
eyes
size
ROUTINE
225
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: Janis Christie/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (tc) Getty Images. (tr) Pedro Del Rio/Pixland/Jupiterimages.
(bl) Keith Brofsky/Photodisc/Getty Images. (bm) BananaStock/PunchStock. (br) Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
menu
Word 2
fetch
Unit 4 Week 5 Mice and Beans
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
menu
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is menu. Say it

with me: menu. Menu means a list of food.
Restaurants have menus. You read the menu
and choose what you would like to eat.
2. En espaol, menu quiere decir men. Un
men es una lista de comidas y bebidas que
ofrece un restaurante. Puedes ver un men y
escoger lo que quieres comer.
3. Menu in English and men in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture of a menu. (Point
to the menu.) This is a menu. (Point to the
two women in the photo.) These two women
looked at the menu. They chose their food.
(Point to the waiter.) Now they are telling the
waiter what food they want.
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner the name of your favorite
restaurant. Tell your partner three things that
are on the menu there.
6. Pretend you are at a restaurant. Your partner
is the waiter, like this person. (Point to the
waiter in the picture.) Read the menu and
tell your partner what you want to eat. Then
switch roles.
7. Now lets say menu together three more
times: menu, menu, menu.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is fetch. Say

it with me: fetch. To fetch means to get
something and bring it back. For example,
some dogs like to fetch a ball. Their owners
will throw the ball, and the dog will run get it
and bring it back.
2. En espaol, to fetch quiere decir recoger algo
y traerlo. Si avientas una pelota, un perro ir
por ella y te la traer.
3. Now lets look at a picture of a dog fetching
something. (Point to the dog in the photo.) This
dog has learned to fetch. He caught the disk.
Now he will bring it back to this owner.
Word 2
fetch
MOVEMENT
4. I will ask each of you to fetch something for
me. (Name), please fetch that book over there.
(Continue by asking other students to fetch
other objects in the classroom.)
5. Now lets pretend to fetch some other things.
Listen carefully and act like youre fetching
what I ask for.
Fetch a ball.
Fetch a bucket.
Fetch a bottle of water.
Fetch a broom.
6. Now lets say fetch together three more times:
fetch, fetch, fetch.
228
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Annabelle Breakey/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (b) Jupiter Images/Comstock Images/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
simmered
Word 4
assembled
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
simmered
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is simmered. Say

it with me: simmered. Simmered is a past form
of the word simmer, which means to heat
food on the stove. When we simmer food,
we let it sit on the stove for a while. It heats
and cooks.
2. En espaol, to simmer quiere decir calentar
a fuego lento la comida en la estufa. Cuando
calentamos as la comida, la dejamos en la
estufa por un buen rato. Se calienta y se cocina.
3. Lets look at a picture of something that has
simmered. (Point to the pot of soup in the
photo.) This soup sat on the stove for a while.
It simmered and simmered. Now it is hot. It is
ready to eat.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is assembled. Say

it with me: assembled. Assembled is a past form
of the word assemble, which means to put
together. (Take apart a ballpoint pen.) This pen
has several parts. I will put them together. I will
assemble them. (Assemble the pen). I assembled
the pen. Now it is ready to use.
2. En espaol, to assemble quiere decir armar;
juntar las piezas. (Desarme un sfero o
pluma.) Esta pluma tiene varias piezas. Las voy
a volver a juntar. (Vuelva a armar la pluma.) Ya
arm la pluma. Ya la puedo usar.
3. Lets look at a picture of something that has
been assembled. (Point to the blocks in the
photo.) Look at all these blocks. The children
assembled them. They put the blocks together
to make a house.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend to simmer soup. Put a pot on the
stove in front of you, like this. (Mime placing
a pot on the table.) Pour a can of soup into
the pot, like this. Now stir. The soup is getting
hot. It is simmering. Mmmmm, it smells good,
doesnt it? Soon it will be ready to eat.
5. We simmered the soup. Now we will eat
it. Pour the soup into a bowl. Be careful. It
simmered for a while so its hot. Now eat your
soup. Eat carefully. Its hot.
6. Now lets say simmered together three more
times: simmered, simmered, simmered.
Word 4
assembled
MOVEMENT
4. Lets assemble our pencils. Put your pencils in
the middle of the table. We put our pencils
together. We assembled them.
5. Lets assemble the class. Lets all get up and
go stand by the door. Now we are standing
together by the door. The class assembled by
the door.
6. Now lets say assembled together three more
times: assembled, assembled, assembled.
230
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Michael Lamotte/Cole Group/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Ken Cavanagh, photographer/McGraw-Hill Companies.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
devoured
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
devoured
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is devoured.

Say it with me: devoured. Devoured means
ate up quickly because of hunger.
Sometimes when we are very hungry, we
devour our food. We eat it fast. We eat
everything we have.
2. En espaol, to devour quiere decir devorar,
comer rpidamente. A veces cuando tenemos
mucha hambre, devoramos la comida. La
comemos rpidamente. Comemos todo lo que
se nos pone enfrente.
3. To devour in English and devorar in Spanish
232
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) James Darell/Digital Vision/Getty Images.
MOVEMENT
4. Now lets look at the picture of the three
girls eating noodles. (Point to the girls in the
photo.) The girls are very hungry. They are
eating fast. They will eat all the noodles. They
have devoured a lot of them already.
5. Lets pretend we are very hungry. We are
going to devour pizza. Pick up your pizza and
eat it. Remember you are very hungry, so eat
fast. Eat the whole pizza. Wow! You devoured
that pizza!
6. Pretend you are eating something. Devour it.
After you nish, we will guess what kind of
food you devoured.
7. Now lets say devoured together three more
times: devoured, devoured, devoured.
Word 1
throw over
Word 2
turn off
Word 1
throw over
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, to throw over means to toss

something up in the air so that it lands
somewhere else or covers something up.
Say it with me: throw over. When you play
volleyball, you throw a ball over the net. Or, if
youre cold, you might throw a blanket over
your shoulders to keep warm.
2. En espaol, to throw over quiere decir lanzar
algo en el aire para que caiga en otro lugar, o
cubrir algo. Cuando juegas voleibol, lanzas la
pelota por encima de una maya. Si tienes fro,
puedes cubrirte los hombros con una manta.
3. This picture gives an example of someone
who throws something over something else.
This basketball player throws over the ball. He
throws it up. He wants it to go over the hoop
and into the basket.
4. Pretend we are having a picnic in the

classroom. We need to throw a blanket over
the oor so we have a comfortable place to
sit. Where should we put the blanket?
5. (Ball up a scrap of paper.) I am going to throw
this ball of paper over my desk. I hope it will
go into the trash can. Tell me if it goes in!
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: throw
over, throw over, throw over.
Word 2
turn off
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, to turn off means to stop

something from operating; to stop something
from being on. Say it with me: turn off. At
home, when I nish making my coffee, I turn
off my coffee maker. When I nish brushing
my teeth, I turn off the water.
2. En espaol, to turn off quiere decir apagar;
cerrar. En mi casa, cuando termino de hacer
mi caf, apago la cafetera. Cuando termino de
cepillarme los dientes, cierro la llave.
3. This picture shows something being turned
off. This woman will turn off the light. When
you leave a room, you should turn off the
light. When we leave the classroom for the
day, what else do we turn off?
4. Lets pretend were going to sleep. Lets turn

off the light. Pull the cord on the lamp: click!
Good night!
5. Lets pretend were driving along. Put your
hands on the steering wheel. Now lets stop
the car and park it. Lets turn off the car by
turning the key.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: turn
off, turn off, turn off.
234
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Sean Justice/Corbis.
Word 3
too late
Word 4
catch her eye
Word 3
too late
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, too late means not on time, after

the usual time. Say it with me: too late. This
morning I ran to the bus stop, but I was too
late. The bus was already gone.
2. En espaol, too late quiere decir demasiado
tarde; pasando el tiempo acostumbrado.
Esta maana sal corriendo para alcanzar el
autobs, pero llegu demasiado tarde. Ya se
haba ido.
3. This picture shows something that was too
late. Look at this toast. It cooked for too long.
It popped out of the toaster too late. Now its
burnt. The man does not look happy.
4. Finish this rhyme about being late:

Get up now! Get up!
School starts right at eight.
But thats the time that you woke up.
You woke up way _______________!
5. Answer this question:
I want to read a story to you before lunch. Is it
too late to do that, or do I still have time?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: too
late, too late, too late.
Word 4
catch her eye
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, to catch her eye means to make

someone look at something interesting. Say
it with me: catch her eye. Maybe Im talking
to you, but then something over here catches
my eye. It could be a hummingbird at the
window. I turn to look at it.
2. En espaol, to catch her eye quiere decir
llamar la atencin. Quizs est hablando
con ustedes, pero veo otra cosa que me llama
la atencin. Puede ser un colibr en la ventana.
Lo volteo a ver.
3. This picture shows what catch her eye
means. This girl is looking up at something.
Something is catching her eye. What do you
think it is? It might be a pretty spider.
4. (Have a girl stand in front of the class, with

you off to the side.) Mary is standing in front
of the class. (Wave to Mary from the side.) Did
I catch her eye? Did she look at me?
5. (Tell the girl to look straight ahead.) Mary is
looking ahead. What can you do to catch her
eye?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: catch
her eye, catch her eye, catch her eye.
236
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stanley Fellerman/Corbis. (b) Tim Pannell/Corbis.
Basic Words
Unit 4 Week 5
Mice and Beans
birthday, cake, lemonade,

candy, present, candle
birthday
cake
lemonade
candy
present
candle
ROUTINE
237
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Bananastock/Jupiterimages. (tc) Photodisc/Getty Images. (tr) Donna Day/Photodisc/Getty Images.
(bl) Image Source/SuperStock. (bm) C Squared Studios/Photodisc/Getty Images. (br) Comstock/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
burst
Word 2
drifts
Unit 5 Week 1 The Tiny Seed
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
burst
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is burst. Say it with

me: burst. When something bursts, it
breaks open.
2. En espaol, to burst quiere decir estallar o
reventar. Cuando algo estalla o revienta, se
abre de repente o violentamente.
burst. (Point to the seed.) This seed has burst.
The seed opened. Soon it will grow.
MOVEMENT
4. Close your hand into a st. Pretend it is a seed.
Now make the seed burst. (Open out hand.)
5. Lets all become very quiet. When I count to
three, lets all burst into a big hello!
one, two, three.
6. Now lets say burst together three more times:
burst, burst, burst.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is drifts. Say

it with me: drifts. When something drifts, it
oats into the air.
2. En espaol, to drift quiere decir otar, o ir a
la deriva. Cuando algo ota o va a la deriva,
no tiene un rumbo jo y es movido a su antojo
por el agua o el aire.
drifts. (Point to the dandelion.) This dandelion
used to be yellow. Now it has dried out and
gone to seed. The tiny seeds drift away as they
y into the air.
drifts
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend to blow on the dandelion seeds.
Watch the seeds drift. How far will the
seeds drift?
5. Pretend that you can drift. Stretch out your
arms. Drift away!
6. Now lets say drifts together three more times:
drifts, drifts, drifts.
240
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Siede Preis/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Angelo Cavalli/Photodisc/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
desert
Word 4
drowns
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
desert
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is desert. Say it with

me: desert. A desert is a place with lots of
sand, is very hot, and gets little rain. Animals
that live in the desert learn to get by with very
little water.
2. En espaol, desert quiere decir desierto. Un
desierto es un lugar que tiene mucha arena,
es muy clido y recibe muy poca lluvia. Los
animales del desierto saben cmo vivir con
poca agua.
3. Desert in English and desierto in Spanish are
desert. (Point to the sand.) Look at this desert.
It has lots of sand. The wind blew the sand.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is drowns.

Say it with me: drowns. When someone or
something drowns, it dies in the water.
2. En espaol, to drown quiere decir ahogarse.
Cuando alguien o algo se ahoga, muere bajo
el agua.
3. Now lets look at a picture of a place where
something drowns. (Point to the ooded
area.) Look at all this water. The houses are
under water. Animals can drown in the water.
People can drown in the water.
242
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/PunchStock. (b) Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
5. Look at the picture of the desert. Tell your
partner what you see. Finish this sentence: In
the desert, there is
.
6. Pretend you are in the desert. Tell your
partner how it feels. Say, The desert is very
.
7. Now lets say desert together three more
times: desert, desert, desert.
Word 4
drowns
MOVEMENT
4. Pretend you have a glass of water. Pretend a
y is drowning in the water. How does the
y move?
5. Pretend you and your partner are in a pool.
How do you swim? How do you stay above the
water? Show your partner how you swim to
avoid drowning.
6. Now lets say drowns together three more
times: drowns, drowns, drowns.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
gently
Word 6
neighbor
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
gently
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is gently. Say it with

me: gently. When you do something gently,
you do it kindly and carefully. You hold eggs
gently so they dont break.
2. En espaol, gently quiere decir suavemente
o delicadamente. Cuando t haces
algo suavemente, lo haces amable y
cuidadosamente. Sostienes huevos
delicadamente para que no se partan.
3. Now lets look at a picture of someone doing
something gently. (Point to the mom.) This
mom is putting a bandage on her daughter.
She is putting the bandage on gently. She
doesnt want to hurt her daughter.
MOVEMENT
4. Touch your partners arm gently. Now touch
your partners hand gently.
5. Pretend you are holding a baby. Hold the baby
gently. Touch the baby gently.
6. Now lets say gently together three more
times: gently, gently, gently.
Key Vocabulary
Word 6
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is neighbor. Say it

with me: neighbor. Someone who lives close
to you is your neighbor. Do you know any of
your neighbors?
2. En espaol, neighbor quiere decir vecino.
Un vecino es alguien que vive cerca de tu casa.
Conoces a alguno de tus vecinos?
3. Now lets look at a picture of some neighbors.
(Point to the people in the picture.) The
people who live next to you are your
neighbors. These neighbors are talking to
each other at the fence between their two
houses.
neighbor
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner what you know about
neighbors. Do neighbors say hello? Do
neighbors help each other out? Finish this
sentence: Neighbors can
.
5. Say hello to your neighbor. Turn to your
partner and say, Hello, neighbor!
6. Now lets say neighbor together three more
times: neighbor, neighbor, neighbor.
244
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Archive Japan/Alamy Images. (b) David R. Frazier Photolibrary, Inc./Alamy Images.
Word 1
higher
Word 2
lower
Word 1
higher
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, something that is higher is taller

than something else. Say it with me: higher.
(Place your hand over your head.) My hand is
up above. My hand is higher than my head.
2. En espaol, higher quiere decir ms alto.
(Coloque su mano sobre su cabeza.) Mi mano
est ac arriba. Est en una posicin ms alta
que mi cabeza.
3. This picture shows someone who is higher
than someone else. This child is up on the
monkey bars. She is higher than her mother.
The mom is looking up at her child, who is
higher than she is.
4. Lets stand up. Raise your arms. Reach up

high. Try to touch the ceiling. Reach higher
and higher!
5. Now see how high you can raise your leg. Can
you raise it higher than your waist?
6. Repeat the word three times with me: higher,
higher, higher.
Word 2
lower
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, lower means below something

else in height or place. Say it with me: lower.
A chair is lower than a table.
2. En espaol, lower quiere decir ms bajo de
estatura o lugar. Una silla es ms baja que
una mesa.
3. This picture shows someone lower. Look at
this boy on the left, with the blue jeans. He is
lower than the boy with the brown pants. The
boy on the left is at a place below.
4. Lets stand up. Now bend your knees. Try to

go low. Go lower and lower. How low can you
go?
5. Now raise your right arm. Raise it up high.
Lower your arm. Lower it slowly until it is as
high as your shoulder.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: lower,
lower, lower.
246
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Keith Eng/McGraw-Hill Companies. (b) Getty Images.
Word 3
fly on
Word 4
fly over
Word 3
fly on
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, to y on means to travel through

the air on something. Say it with me: y on. I
will y on a plane in the summer when I go on
vacation.
2. En espaol, to y on quiere decir volar por
el aire en algo. Volar en avin este verano
cuando me vaya de vacaciones.
3. This picture shows what y on means. This
pilot is ying on a airplane. She is the pilot.
Her job is to guide the airplane safely.
4. Have you ever read or heard of the story of

Aladdin from the book One Thousand and
One Nights? In the story, Aladdin ies on a
magic carpet. Is it really possible to y on a
magic carpet?
5. Have you ever own on an airplane? Where
did you go? Tell me what it was like to y on
an airplane.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: y on,
y on, y on.
Word 4
fly over
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, to y over means to travel

through the air above something. Say it
with me: y over. When I go on vacation, the
plane will y over an ocean. The ocean will be
below the plane.
2. En espaol, to y over quiere decir volar
por encima de algo. Cuando me vaya de
vacaciones, el avin volar por encima de un
mar. El mar estar por debajo del avin.
3. This picture shows how a plane can y over.
This small plane can y over some water.
Maybe the plane is ying to an island.

yes or no. If you answer no, tell me
why you said no.
Can a cow y over the moon?
Can a chicken y over a chair?
Can a bird y over a tree?
5. Finish this sentence: A plane can y over
respond.)
y over, y over, y over.
248
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Big Cheese Photo/PunchStock. (b) MedioImages/SuperStock.
Basic Words
Unit 5 Week 1
The Tiny Seed
petal, seed pod, seed,

stem, roots, leaves
petal
seed pod
seed
stem
roots
leaves
ROUTINE
249
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Daisuke Morita/Getty Images. (tc) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (tr) Burke/Triolo Productions/Getty Images.
(bl) Designpics.com/PunchStock. (bm) Designpics.com/PunchStock. (br) Pixtal/SuperStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
scent
Word 2
trade
Unit 5 Week 2 The Ugly Vegetables
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
scent
TEACHER TALK
Point to the Word 1 image on the opposite.
1. One word in the selection is scent. Say it with

me: scent. Scent is what something smells like.
When something smells good, it has a nice
scent.
2. En espaol, scent quiere decir aroma o
perfume a lo que huele algo. Cuando algo o
alguien huele bien, tiene un aroma o un olor
agradable.
has a good scent. (Point to the ower.) The boy
is smelling the ower. The ower has a sweet
scent. The boy likes the way the ower smells.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is trade. Say it

with me: trade. When people trade, they give
one thing and get another thing.
2. En espaol, to trade quiere decir intercambiar
o comerciar. Cuando alguien comercia,
esa persona da algo a cambio de otra cosa,
comnmente dinero.
3. Now lets look at a picture of children who
trade. (Point to the customer.) This little girl is
giving 25 cents. She will trade the 25 cents for
a glass of lemonade.
252
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) ZenShui/Sigrid Olsson/Getty Images. (b) Purestock/SuperStock.
MOVEMENT
4. Pretend you are smelling a ower with a
wonderful scent. Imagine the scent. Mmm!
5. Perfume has a scent. Pretend you are spraying
perfume on your partner. Smell the scent.
6. Now lets say scent together three more times:
scent, scent, scent.
Word 2
trade
MOVEMENT
4. Pretend that you and your partner each have
a crayon. You have a green crayon and a red
crayon. Trade crayons.
5. Trade places with your partner.
6. Now lets say trade together three more times:
trade, trade, trade.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
muscles
Word 4
prickly
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
muscles
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is muscles. Say it

with me: muscles. Muscles are the parts of our
body that help us move. We all have muscles
in our body. Muscles make us strong.
2. En espaol, muscles quiere decir msculos.
Los msculos son las partes del cuerpo que nos
permiten movernos. Todos tenemos msculos
en nuestros cuerpos. Los msculos nos dan
fuerza.
3. Muscles in English and msculos in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture of some big
muscles. (Point to the biceps.) Look at these
men. They sure have big muscles! They look
strong, dont they?
PARTNER TALK
5. Look at the picture of the men with muscles.
Tell your partner about the muscles. Finish
this sentence: Those men have
muscles.
6. You have muscles, too. Show your partner the
muscles in your arm.
7. Now lets say muscles together three more
times: muscles, muscles, muscles.
Key Vocabulary
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is prickly. Say it

with me: prickly. Something prickly has sharp
points, like needles. A porcupine is a prickly
animal.
2. En espaol, prickly quiere decir espinoso.
Algo que es espinoso tiene puntas aladas
como las agujas. Un puercoespn es un animal
espinso.
3. Now lets look at a picture of something prickly.
(Point to the cactus.) This cactus is prickly. I
wouldnt want to touch this cactus. Ouch!
prickly
MOVEMENT
4. Pretend you have a cactus in front of you. Feel
how prickly it is. Touch it gently. Ouch!
5. A rose has a prickly stem. Pretend to hold a
rose. Be careful of the thorns. They are prickly!
6. Now lets say prickly together three more
times: prickly, prickly, prickly.
254
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Liquidlibrary/Dynamic Graphics/Jupiterimages. (b) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
blooming
Word 6
aroma
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
blooming
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is blooming. Say it

with me: blooming. When a plant is blooming,
that means it has a ower. Our garden is
blooming in the spring.
2. En espaol, to bloom quiere decir orecer.
Cuando una planta est oreciendo, signica
que de esa planta brotan o nacen nuevas
ores. Nuestro jardn est orecido en la
primavera.
3. Now lets look at a picture of owers
blooming. (Point to the owers.) These
plants have beautiful owers. The plants are
blooming.
MOVEMENT
4. Press your ngertips together. Now pretend
that your ngers are blooming. Open your
ngers out, like a ower, slowly and gently.
5. Now lets all crouch down and pretend we are
plants growing in the ground. Lets stand up
slowly, and open out. Reach for the sun. We
are blooming!
6. Now lets say blooming together three more
times: blooming, blooming, blooming.
Key Vocabulary
Word 6
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is aroma. Say it with

me: aroma. A pleasant smell is called an aroma.
2. En espaol, aroma es un olor agradable.
Cuando una cosa tiene un aroma, esa cosa
agrada a quien la huele.
3. Aroma in English and aroma in Spanish are
has a wonderful aroma. (Point to the woman.)
Mmm! she seems to think. This soup must
smell good. It probably has a wonderful
aroma. The woman and the young girl look
pleased.
aroma
PARTNER TALK
5. Look at the picture. What do you think the
soup smells like? Tell your partner. Finish
this sentence: The smell of hot soup is
.
6. The aroma of apple pie baking makes me
hungry. It smells so good it makes me want to
eat a slice. What aromas make you hungry?
Tell your partner.
7. Now lets say aroma together three more
times: aroma, aroma, aroma.
256
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photo 24/Brand X Pictures/Corbis. (b) Jose Luis Pelaez, Inc/Blend Images/Jupiterimages.
Word 1
upside down
Word 2
rightside up
Word 1
upside down
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, something that is upside down has

its top on the bottom. Say it with me: upside
down. (Display a book upside down.) Can you
read this? No, because its upside down. Its
hard to read something thats turned over like
this.
2. En espaol, upside down quiere decir al
revs, bocabajo. Algo que se encuentra
al revs tiene su parte ms baja donde
normalmente va su parte superior. (Muestre
un libro al revs.) Puedes leer esto? No,
porque est al revs. Es difcil leer un libro que
est bocabajo.
3. This picture shows something upside down.
Look at these insects. They are hanging upside
down on a stem. I wonder how long they can
stay that way. I couldnt hang on like that,
could you?
4. Lets stand up. Stand with your legs apart.

Bend over and peek through your legs.
Everything in the classroom is upside down!
5. Find a picture in the classroom. Show me the
right way to look at it. Now turn it upside
down. How does it look now?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: upside
down, upside down, upside down.
Word 2
rightside up
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something that is rightside up

is back in its proper position. The top is at
top. The bottom is at the bottom. Do you
remember the book I showed you that was
upside down? I can turn it back around. Now
its rightside up. Now I can read it. Say it with
me: rightside up.
2. En espaol, rightside up quiere decir en
su posicin normal. La parte superior est
arriba. La parte inferior est abajo. Recuerdas
el libro que estaba al revs? Lo puedo voltear.
Ahora est en su posicin correcta. Ahora s lo
puedo leer.
3. This picture shows someone rightside up. Look
at these children. They are hanging rightside
up. Their feet are at the bottom. Their hands
are at the top.
4. Lets stand up. Stand with your legs apart.

Bend over and peek through your legs. Your
head is upside down! Now stand rightside up.
Go slowly. Your head is in its proper position,
at the top. Say: I am rightside up!
5. Take a book out. Place it upside down. Say:
The book is upside down. Now place it
rightside up. Say: The book is rightside up.
rightside up, rightside up, rightside up.
258
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Creatas Images/Jupiterimages. (b) Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
Word 3
better than
Word 4
different from
Word 3
better than
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, better than means more

desirable. Say it with me: better than.
Drinking water is better than drinking soda.
Eating an apple is better than eating candy.
2. En espaol, better than quiere decir mejor
que. El agua es mejor que la soda. Comer una
manzana es mejor que comer dulces.
3. This picture shows what better than means.
These children are running outside. They are
exercising. Exercising is better than watching
television.
4. I love vegetables. I think carrots taste better

than broccoli. What do you think? What
vegetable tastes better than carrots?
5. Sugary sodas are not good for you. Milk is
better than soda. What else is better than
drinking soda?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: better
than, better than, better than.
Word 4
different from
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, different from means not the

same as. Say it with me: different from. A
pumpkin is different from a carrot. They are
both orange, but a pumpkin is round. A carrot
is long.
2. En espaol, different from quiere decir
diferente a. Una calabaza es diferente a una
zanahoria. Las dos verduras son anaranjadas,
pero la calabaza es redonda. Una zanahoria es
larga.
3. This picture shows how things can be
different from each other. Look at these
peppers. They are all peppers, but they are
different from each other. How are they
different from each other?
4. Finish these sentences with me: Corn looks

different from lettuce. Corn is
,
but lettuce is
.
5. Answer this question: How are vegetables
different from fruit? (Call on a few children to
respond.)
different from, different from, different from.
260
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) ImageDJ/McGraw-Hill Companies. (b) Polka Dot Images/Jupiterimages.
Basic Words
Unit 5 Week 2
The Ugly Vegetables
gardening, digging, watering can,

hand shovel, hose, wheelbarrow
gardening
digging
watering can
hand shovel
hose
wheelbarrow
ROUTINE
261
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Mike Watson Images/PunchStock. (tc) L. Clarke/Corbis. (tr) Ryan McVay/Photodisc/Getty Images.
(bl) C Squared Studios/Getty Images. (bm) Stockdisc/PunchStock. (br) Big Cheese Photo/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
ancient
Word 2
hopeful
Unit 5 Week 3 Meet the Super Croc
Key Vocabulary
ancient
Word 1
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is ancient. Say it

with me: ancient. When something is ancient,
it is very old. Ancient art is rare because it is
hard to keep things for many many years in
good condition.
2. En espaol, ancient quiere decir antiguo.
Cuando algo es antiguo, signica que esa
cosa o persona existi hace mucho tiempo.
Ejemplos de arte antiguo son raros, pues es
difcil guardar algo en buen estado por tantos
aos.
3. Ancient in English and anciano in Spanish are
ancient. (Point to the dinosaur.) These
dinosaur bones are ancient. The dinosaur lived
millions of years ago. The bones are very old.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is hopeful. Say

it with me: hopeful. When people are hopeful,
they look forward to something. They are
waiting for something good to happen.
Whenever we have a game, were hopeful we
will win.
2. En espaol, hopeful quiere decir
esperanzado u optimista. Cuando alguien
es esperanzado u optimista, esa persona ansa
que pase algo bueno. Cuando tenemos un
partido nos sentimos esperanzados de que
ganaremos.
3. Now lets look at a picture of someone who is
hopeful. (Point to the girl.) She is crossing her
ngers. Maybe shes hoping for a sunny day,
because shes going to the park. She is feeling
hopeful.
264
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) Image Source/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
5. Which one is ancient, a dinosaur or a puppy?
Tell your partner. Complete this sentence: A
is ancient.
6. Tell your partner about something that is not
ancient. Say something like this: A new bike
is not ancient. (Call on one or two pairs to
share their sentences.)
7. Now lets say ancient together three more
times: ancient, ancient, ancient.
Word 2
hopeful
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend to be hopeful. Lets cross our
ngers.
5. Pretend that its nighttime. Look at the stars
and make a wish. Making a wish is a way of
being hopeful.
6. Now lets say hopeful together three more
times: hopeful, hopeful, hopeful.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
unable
Word 4
confirm
Key Vocabulary
unable
Word 3
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is unable. Say it

with me: unable. If you are unable to do
something, you cannot do it. Im unable to
put a worm on my hook when we go shing.
2. En espaol, unable quiere decir incapaz.
Cuando alguien es incapaz, esa persona no
puede hacer algo. Soy incapaz de poner una
lombriz en mi anzuelo cuando vamos de
pesca.
unable means. (Point to the cars.) These cars
are unable to move because of the water.
They cannot move.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is conrm.

Say it with me: conrm. When you conrm
something, you make sure that its true. I
conrmed with Mom that we really were
going to the park after school.
2. En espaol, to conrm quiere decir
conrmar. Cuando t conrmas algo,
compruebas que algo es verdadero. Conrm
con mi mam que realement iramos al parque
despus de dases.
3. To conrm in English and conrmar in Spanish
4. Lets look at a picture of someone conrming
something. (Point to the doctor.) This doctor
is conrming his patients problem. Maybe
her neck hurts. The doctor may conrm that
something happened to her neck.
266
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Warren Faidley/Corbis. (b) Image Source/Jupiterimages.
PARTNER TALK
4. Look at the picture of the cars. Tell your
partner what you see. Finish this sentence:
Those cars are unable to
.
5. Pretend that your partner is unable to smile.
Make a funny face, and try to make him or
her smile.
6. Now lets say unable together three more
times: unable, unable, unable.
Word 4
confirm
PARTNER TALK
5. Have your partner recite the alphabet. Can
you conrm that all the letters are in order?
6. Ask your partner what your name is. Can you
conrm that this is your name?
7. Now lets say conrm together three more
times: conrm, conrm, conrm.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
valid
Word 6
site
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
valid
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is valid. Say it with

me: valid. When something is valid, it is true.
It is true because you can prove it with facts.
2. En espaol, valid quiere decir vlido. Si algo
es vlido, es verdadero. Ese dicho o hecho es
verdadero porque se puede comprobar con
pruebas.
3. Valid in English and vlido in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture of something valid.
(Point to the magnet.) Magnets attract metal.
This is a valid idea. A science book will tell you
this is valid.
MOVEMENT
5. Grab a pencil and let it drop to the oor. It
drops because of gravity. Scientists explain
this as a fact, so it is valid.
6. Doctors say that vibrations in your throat
produce sound. Lets conrm that statement.
Hum quietly and touch your throat. Your
throat vibrates. Now we know that statement
is valid. It will always happen this way.
7. Now lets say valid together three more times:
valid, valid, valid.
Key Vocabulary
Word 6
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is site. Say it with

me: site. A site is a special location. The
stadium was the site for the big football
game.
2. En espaol, site quiere decir sitio. Un sitio
es un lugar especco. El estadio fue el sitio
donde se jug el partido de ftbol importante.
3. Site in English and sitio in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture of a site. (Point to
the dig.) These men are digging at a site. They
are looking for things that people used at this
site a long time ago.
site
PARTNER TALK
5. Ask whether your partner knows where the
library is. The library is a special site.
6. Pretend you and your partner are planning a
garden. What is the perfect site for a garden?
(Call on one or two pairs to share their
responses.)
7. Now lets say site together three more times:
site, site, site.
268
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Erin Hogan/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) The Daily Press, Dave Bowman/AP Images.
Word 1
long
Word 2
tall
Word 1
long
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, long means not short; measuring

a lot from one end to the other. Say it with
me: long. (Point out a child with long hair and
a child with short hair.) [Name] has long hair.
[Name] has short hair.
2. En espaol, long quiere decir largo; que
mide mucho de punta a punta. (Seale un
nio de cabello largo y uno de cabello corto.)
[Nombre] tiene cabello largo. [Nombre] tiene
cabello corto.
3. This picture shows something long. Look
at this crocodile. It has a long body. The
crocodile measures more than fteen feet
from its head to its tail.
4. Lets think of some animals. Think of a giraffe,

an elephant, and a tiger. Which animal has a
long necka giraffe or a tiger? Which animal
has a long trunk, an elephant or a giraffe?
Which has a long tail?
5. Finish these sentences with me:
A rabbit has long
.
A chimp has long
.
A snake has a long
.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: long,
long, long.
Word 2
tall
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something that is tall is high up; its

not short. Say it with me: tall. Some buildings
are so tall that you need an elevator to get to
the top oor.
2. En espaol, tall quiere decir alto, que llega
muy arriba; no bajo. Algunos edicios son
tan altos que hay que subir hasta arriba en
ascensor.
3. This picture shows something tall. Look at
these trees. They are very tall. You need to
look way up to see them.
4. (Stand next to a child.) Who is tall? Am I tall,

or are you tall?
5. Think of different animals. Name three
animals that are tall, about as tall as I am.
(Possible responses: horse, bear, ape)
6. Repeat the word three times with me: tall,
tall, tall.
270
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Beren Patterson/Alamy Images. (b) JupiterImages/ Comstock Images/Alamy Images.
Word 3
similar
Word 4
the same
Word 3
similar
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, similar means about the same;

alike. Say it with me: similar. My sister and I
look similar, but we are not exactly the same.
2. En espaol, similar quiere decir similar;
parecido. Mi hermana y yo somos similares,
pero no somos exactamente iguales.
3. Similar in English and similar in Spanish are
4. This picture shows what the word similar
means. These people are doing yoga. They are
all in a similar position. They are seated in a
similar way.
5. Think of a dog and a wolf. How are they

similar? Do they have a similar color? Do they
sound similar? Do they have similar tails?
6. How are a horse and a zebra similar? Do they
have a similar color? Do they have a similar
shape?
7. Repeat the word three times with me: similar,
similar, similar.
Word 4
the same
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, the same means exactly alike; not

different. Say it with me: the same. (Hold
up two pencils that are the same.) These two
pencils are the same. They came from the
same box. They look alike.
2. En espaol, the same quiere decir
exactamente igual; no diferente. (Muestre
dos lpices iguales.) Estos dos lpices son
iguales. Los saqu de la misma caja. Tienen la
misma apariencia.
3. This picture shows how things can be the
same. Look at these tomatoes. They are all the
same. They are all small and red.
4. Look at your shoes. Are they the same? Look

at your partners shoes. Are they the same as
your shoes?
5. Think of some twins you know. Do they look
exactly the same? Is there something a little
different about them?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: the
same, the same, the same.
272
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Source Black/Jupiterimages. (b) Heide Benser/zefa/Corbis.
Basic Words
Unit 5 Week 3
Meet the Super Croc
crocodile, jaw, bone,

length, body, skull
crocodile
jaw
bone
length
body
skull
ROUTINE
273
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Ingram Publishing (Superstock Limited)/Alamy Images. (tc) Creatas/PunchStock. (tr) Christine Eckel/Macmillan/McGraw-Hill.
(bl) JupiterImages/ Comstock Images/Alamy Images. (bm) Con Tanasiuk/Design Pics/Corbis. (br) Christine Eckel/Macmillan/McGraw-Hill.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
giggled
Unit 5 Week 4 Farfallina and Marcel
Word 2
fluttered
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
giggled
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is giggled. Say it

with me: giggled. Giggled means laughed
in a special way. A giggle sounds sillier than
a laugh. This is a giggle (giggle) and this is a
laugh (laugh).
2. En espaol, to giggle quiere decir dar una
risita. Una risita carece de la gracia que
anima a una carcajada. sta es una risita:
ji, ji, ji; esta es una carcajada: ja, ja, ja.
3. Now lets look at a picture of a girl who is
giggling at something. (Point to the girl.)
Maybe shes trying to hide her laugh, but she
giggled instead.
PARTNER TALK
4. Have a staring contest with your partner.
Whoever stays serious the longest, wins. Try
not to giggle!
5. What makes you giggle? Do you giggle when
someone tickles you? How about when
someone tells a joke? Tell your partner.
6. Now lets say giggled together three more
times: giggled, giggled, giggled.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is uttered. Say

it with me: uttered. When a leaf oats down
from a branch, it utters down.
2. En espaol, to utter quiere decir revolotear
u ondear. Cuando la hoja de un rbol cae
otando de una rama, ella revolotea.
something that uttered. (Point to the
butteries.) These butteries uttered onto this
plant. Soon, they will utter to another plant.
fluttered
MOVEMENT
4. What does a buttery look like when it
utters? Flap your arms and utter like a
buttery. Now, utter like a bird.
5. Stand up and pretend youre a leaf. You just
came off a tree branch and youre falling
down. Keep falling until you have uttered to
the ground.
6. Now lets say uttered together three more
times: uttered, uttered, uttered.
276
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ingram Publishing (Superstock Limited)/Alamy Images. (b) Creatas/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
peered
Word 4
recognized
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
peered
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is peered. Say it

with me: peered. Peered means looked
at closely.
2. En espaol, to peer quiere decir observar
o analizar. Si t miras atentamente algo,
observas o analizas ese objeto con mucha
atencin.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows an
animal that peered. (Point to the owl.) This
owl stuck his head through the hole in the
fence and peered through it.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is recognized.

Say it with me: recognized. To recognize
means to see something you have seen
before. Now I recognize all of the children in
class.
2. En espaol, to recognize quiere decir
reconocer. Si t reconoces algo o a alguien,
sabes quin es esa persona o qu es esa cosa
porque ya la has visto antes. Ahora reconozco
a todos los nios en la clase.
3. To recognize in English and reconocer in
languages.
the word recognized is used. (Point to the
children on the grass.) The children are waving
at a friend. They recognized the friend, so
they are greeting her.
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend you are sitting in a movie theater. A
tall person sits in front of you and blocks the
movie screen. Do you peer over that persons
shoulder, or do you move to a different seat?
Discuss with a partner.
5. When you go bird watching, you might bring
along a pair of binoculars. They will help you
peer at faraway birds. What others things do
you use to peer?
6. Now lets say peered together three more
times: peered, peered, peered.
Word 4
recognized
PARTNER TALK
the word recognized is used. (Point to the
children on the grass.) The children are waving
at a friend. They recognized the friend, so
they are greeting her.
5. If you saw your partner outside of school,
would you recognize him or her? What would
you say if you recognized him or her? (Call on
6. Make a funny face at your partner. Your
partner might say, I do not recognize you!
7. Now lets say recognized together three more
times: recognized, recognized, recognized.
278
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) David Tipling/Photographers Choice/Getty Images. (b) Louis Rosenstock/McGraw-Hill Companies.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
vanished
Word 6
snuggled
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
vanished
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is vanished. Say

it with me: vanished. When something has
vanished, it has disappeared.
2. En espaol, to vanish quiere decir desvanecer
o desparecer. Cuando algo o alguien se
desvanece, esa cosa o persona se pierde de
vista.
has vanished. (Point to a tree.) Look at these
trees. Where are all the leaves? They have
vanished. They are gone. In winter, leaves
vanish from the trees.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is snuggled. Say

it with me: snuggled. Snuggled means cuddled
up very close to.
2. En espaol, to snuggle quiere decir
acurrucarse. Cuando te acurrucas con
alguien, te estrechas suavemente contra el
pecho de esa persona.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows two
animals snuggling. (Point to the baby bear.)
This baby bear snuggles against its mother.
The baby bear feels safe and warm when it
snuggles.
280
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Dennis MacDonald/Alamy Images. (b) Creatas Images/Jupiterimages.
PARTNER TALK
4. Lets pretend that lots of snow fell last night.
Look out the window. The grass has vanished.
The owers have vanished. What else has
vanished? Tell your partner.
5. Play a game with your partner. Put three
things between you: a crayon, a pencil, and
a marker. Have your partner close his or her
eyes. Take one thing away. Ask, What
vanished?
6. Now lets say vanished together three more
times: vanished, vanished, vanished.
Word 6
snuggled
MOVEMENT
4. Pretend that its cold in the room. Brrr! Lets
snuggle up close to each other. Lets try to
stay warm.
5. Lets pretend we are warm in our beds. Lets
pretend to snuggle under our blankets.
6. Now lets say snuggled together three more
times: snuggled, snuggled, snuggled.
Word 1
round and round
Word 2
in circles
Word 1
round and round
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, round and round means to move

in a circle over and over again. Say it with
me: round and round. Have you ever seen a
dog chase its tail? That dog goes round and
round, and he never does catch his tail, does
he?
2. En espaol, round and round quiere decir
dando vueltas. Alguna vez has visto a un
perro tratando de alcanzar su cola? Ese perro
da vueltas y vueltas, y nunca alcanza su cola,
no es as?
3. This picture shows something going round
and round. This is a merry-go-round, or
carousel. The children sit on horses and other
animals. The children and the animals go
round and round. In the back, we can see a
Ferris wheel. It goes round and round, too.
4. Do you know this song? Lets sing a different

version that goes like this:
The wheels on the bike go
round and round,
round and round,
round and round.
The wheels on the bike go
round and round,
all through the park.
5. Lets think of other things with wheels. Lets
plug them into the song. For example, the
wheels on the truck, the wheels on car, the
wheels on the skates.
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: round
and round, round and round, round and
round.
Word 2
in circles
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, something that goes in circles goes

round and round. It begins and ends at the
same place. For example, the hands of a clock
go around in circles. Say it with me: in circles.
2. En espaol, in circles quiere decir moverse
haciendo crculos, dando vueltas. Algo que
gira dando vueltas empieza y termina en el
mismo lugar. Por ejemplo, las manecillas del
reloj dan la vuelta al reloj.
3. This picture shows someone going in circles.
Look at these children. They are holding
hands. They are going around in circles. What
might they be playing?
4. Lets stand up. Stretch your arms out at your

sides, like an airplane. Now make your arms
go in circles.
5. Now lift your foot. Make your foot go around
in circles. See how long you can last.
circles, in circles, in circles.
282
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ed Boettcher/Corbis. (b) Stockbyte/Getty Images.
Word 3
together
Word 4
solitary
Word 3
together
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, together means two or more

people in one place, with each other. Say it
with me: together. We are all together in this
room.
2. En espaol, together quiere decir dos o ms
personas juntas. Todos estamos juntos en
este cuarto.
3. This picture shows what together means.
This girl and her father are cleaning the oven
together. They are with each other. They are
doing the job at the same time in the same
place.
4. Think of things you do with a friend or a

brother or sister. Do you play together? Do
you go to school together? Do you have lunch
together?
5. What kinds of things does your family do
together? What things do you do by yourself?
together, together, together.
Word 4
solitary
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, solitary means alone, single, the

only one. Say it with me: solitary. On my
block, there is a solitary blue house. It is the
only blue house on the block.
2. En espaol, solitary quiere decir solitario,
solo, el nico. En mi cuadra, solo hay una
casa azul. Es la nica casa azul de la cuadra.
3. Solitary in English and solitario in Spanish are
4. This picture shows what solitary means. This
girl is washing dishes all by herself. She is the
solitary dish washer. No one is helping her.
5. Listen to these sentences. Then repeat them

using the word solitary.
There is one tree on the hill.
In the parking lot, there is a single car.
The old woman is alone in her house.
6. Would you like to have a solitary pet, or
would you like to have many pets? (Call on
one or two children for their responses.)
7. Repeat the word three times with me: solitary,
solitary, solitary.
284
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Reed Kaestner/Corbis. (b) Thinkstock/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 5 Week 4
Farfallina and Marcel
splatter, reect, drizzle,

swim, ripple, oat
splatter
reect
drizzle
swim
ripple
oat
ROUTINE
285
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Don Mason/Jupiterimages. (tc) Larry Mayer/Creatas Images/Jupiterimages. (tr) Photo 24/Jupiterimages.
(bl) Comstock Images/PunchStock. (bm) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (br) Douglas Pulsipher/Acclaim Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
beloved
Unit 5 Week 5 Nutik, the Wolf Pup
Word 2
promised
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
beloved
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is beloved. Say

it with me: beloved. Something beloved is
something that is loved. Cartoons are beloved
by many children.
2. En espaol, beloved quiere decir querido o
amado. Algo que es querido o amado, es algo
que se quiere o estima mucho. Las caricatures
son estimadas por muchos nios.
is beloved. This girl loves her puppy. The
puppy is beloved.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is promised.

Say it with me: promised. When something is
promised, it is guaranteed. I promised Mom I
would go with her to the store.
2. En espaol, to promise quiere decir prometer.
Cuando se garantiza que algo va a suceder o
ser, es algo prometido. Promet a mam que la
acompaara a hacer la compra.
3. To promise in English and prometer in Spanish
something that is promised. These men are
shaking hands on an agreement. They have
promised each other something.
288
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (b) Simon Marcus/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. With your partner, name each of your family
members. Why are they beloved to you?
5. Talk about a special friend. What is it about
your friend that makes him or her special?
That is why he or she is beloved.
6. Now lets say beloved together three more
times: beloved, beloved, beloved.
Word 2
promised
PARTNER TALK
5. Has someone ever promised to give you
something for your birthday? Tell your partner
about the time this promise was kept, or
about the time is wasnt.
6. What kinds of promises have you made with
your friends? Share your promises with your
partner.
7. Now lets say promised together three more
times: promised, promised, promised.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
wiggled
Word 4
gleamed
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
wiggled
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is wiggled. Say it

with me: wiggled. Wiggled means moved
from side to side with short, quick movements.
The worms wiggled in the soil.
2. En espaol, to wiggle quiere decir menear
o batir. Cuando te meneas te mueves con
movimientos cortos y rpidos de lado a lado.
Las lombrices se meneaban en la tierra.
3. Now lets look at something that is wiggling.
(Point to the kitten.) The kitten looks like it
is trying to escape from the girl. The girl is
holding tightly, but the kitten is wiggling.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is gleamed. Say

it with me: gleamed. If something gleamed,
it was bright and shiny, sometimes because it
was reecting the light. The coin gleamed in
the light.
2. En espaol, to gleam quiere decir relucir o
brillar. Cuando algo reluce o brilla, esa cosa
es brillante y destellante, comnmente porque
reeja la luz. La moneda brillaba con la luz.
gleaming. (Point to the water.) The water
gleams because the sun shines off of it.
290
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Masterfile. (b) Image Plan/Corbis.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets put our hands up in the air. Lets wiggle
our ngers.
5. Lets wiggle our toes. Can you wiggle your
toes with your shoes on?
6. Now lets say wiggled together three more
times: wiggled, wiggled, wiggled.
Word 4
gleamed
MOVEMENT
4. Are you wearing anything shiny or metallic?
Move it into the light. Does it gleam?
5. Use a glass window or a mirror to reect light.
Sometimes the light gleams onto another area.
6. Now lets say gleamed together three more
times: gleamed, gleamed, gleamed.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
glanced
Word 6
noble
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
glanced
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is glanced. Say

it with me: glanced. If you glanced at
something, you looked at it quickly. You did
not stare at it for along time.
2. En espaol, to glance quiere decir ojear.
Cuando ojeas algo, miras ese objeto
rpidamente. No lo miras detenidamente.
someone glancing at someone else. (Point to
the womans eye.) This woman glanced
at something next to her. She looked at
it quickly.
MOVEMENT
4. Glance at your partner. See if he or she notices
you glancing at them.
5. When you walk down the street, do you
glance into shop windows? Or do you walk
looking straight ahead? Show your partner
how you walk down the street.
6. Now lets say glanced together three more
times: glanced, glanced, glanced.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is noble. Say

it with me: noble. Noble means with and
impressive, royal, or distinguished look or
superior. The knights of the round table
were noble. Their shiny armor and stature
made them look important and made them
stand out. They were superior in combat.
2. En espaol, noble quiere decrir de apariencia
impresionante, real o distinguida; superior;
noble. Los caballeros de la mesa redonda
eran nobles. Su armadura brillante y
estatura los haca ver importantes y los haca
destacarse. Eran superiores en el combate.
3. Noble in English and noble in Spanish are
noble. (Point to the wolves.) These wolves
are standing tall and proud. They look noble.
Their posture is distinguished. They look like
they are superior to any other animal that
might try to confront them.
292
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Colorblind/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Tom Brakefield/Photodisc/Getty Images.
Word 6
noble
PARTNER TALK
5. What do you think makes a person noble? Are
they nice? Do they think of others before they
think of themselves? Tell your partner. (Call on
6. What do you think a noble person looks like?
Do they stand tall and straight or slouched
and stooped over? Tell your partner.
7. Now lets say noble together three more times:
noble, noble, noble.
Word 1
sickly
Word 2
well
Word 1
sickly
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, sickly means faint, weak, in poor

health. Say it with me: sickly. When I had the
u, my face had a sickly color. You could tell I
did not feel well.
2. En espaol, sickly quiere decir enfermizo;
plido, en mala salud. Cuando estaba
enferma, mi cara luca enfermiza, estaba
plida. Se notaba que no me senta bien.
3. This picture shows someone looking sickly.
This boy does not feel well. He is sick. He has a
sickly expression on his face.
4. Listen to these sentences. Repeat them using

the word sickly.
After my surgery, I still felt in poor health.
The baby was born 5 weeks early, and he was
weak.
The little boy was always sick.
5. How can you tell when someone is sick? They
have a sickly look, dont they? How do their
eyes look? How does their mouth look? How
do they walk?
6. Repeat the word three times with me: sickly,
sickly, sickly.
Word 2
well
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, when you feel well, you feel ne.

You are not sick. You are happy and healthy.
I feel well today. Say it with me: well. Do you
feel well today?
2. En espaol, well quiere decir bien de salud.
Cuando ests bien, ests contento y saludable.
Yo me siento bien hoy. Y t?
3. This picture shows people who feel well. Look
at these children. They are jumping around.
They are happy and healthy. They are doing
well.
4. Finish this rhyme with me:

I feel good. I feel swell.
I feel great. I feel
.
5. Listen to these sentences. Say them again, but
use the word well.
Yesterday, I was sick. I was not ne.
When I felt better, I went to school.
Today, I am not sick. I am healthy.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: well,
well, well.
294
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Mark Karrass/Corbis. (b) Image Source/PunchStock.
Word 3
tired
Word 4
strong
Word 3
tired
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, when you are tired, you have no

more energy. Say it with me: tired. You need
a nap. At the end of the day, I am tired. I
just want to go home and sit in my soft,
comfortable chair.
2. En espaol, tired quiere decir cansado; sin
energa. Al nal del da, estoy cansada.
Quiero descansar en mi casa. Quiero
acurrucarme en mi silln.
3. This picture shows what tired means. This boy
is yawning, like this. (Yawn.) He must be tired.
He is ready to go to sleep. Do you yawn when
you are tired?
4. Lets imagine that we ran around on the

playground for 15 minutes. We are so tired!
What can we do when we are tired?
5. When I say Im tired, what other words do you
think of? (sleep, rest, energy, nap, bored, sit
down, slow)
6. Repeat the word three times with me: tired,
tired, tired.
Word 4
strong
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, we call a person or animal that has

a lot of power strong. That person or animal
can lift heavy things. Say it with me: strong.
(Flex your muscles.) A strong person has
muscles!
2. En espaol, strong quiere decir fuerte; con
mucho poder. Una persona fuerte puede
levantar algo pesado. (Flexione sus msculos.)
Una persona fuerte es musculosa!
3. This picture shows what the word strong
means. This girl is climbing up. That is really
hard to do. You need strong arms and legs to
do that. The teacher is there to make sure she
doesnt fall down.
4. Im going to name some animals. Which ones

are strong? If it can carry you, make a muscle
and say the word strong:
a mouse
an elephant
a horse
a cat
a chicken.
5. How strong are you? Can you lift a car?
Can you lift a book? Can you lift a big
watermelon? Can you lift your friend sitting
next to you?
6. Repeat the word three times with me: strong,
strong, strong.
296
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Creatas/PunchStock. (b) Image100/Jupiterimages.
Basic Words
Unit 5 Week 5
Nutik, the Wolf Pup
lick, cuddle, wobble,

bound, prance, whimper
lick
cuddle
wobble
bound
prance
whimper
ROUTINE
297
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Stephen Lackie/Corbis. (tc) DLILLC/Corbis. (tr) Comstock Images/PunchStock.
(bl) Leo Dennis Productions /Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (bm) Kit Houghton/Corbis. (br) Andrew catterall/Alamy Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
burrow
Word 2
beyond
Unit 6 Week 1 Dig, Wait, Listen: A Desert Toads Tale
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is burrow. Say it

with me: burrow. A burrow is a hole or tunnel.
Some animals live in a burrow in the ground.
2. En espaol, burrow quiere decir hacer una
cueva, madriguera.
3. Now lets look at a picture of a burrow. (Point
to the animal.) This prairie dog dug through
the ground. It made a tunnel to move around
in. It lives in a burrow.
PARTNER TALK
4. Ask your partner how they get comfy before
going to sleep at night. Do they like to make a
burrow under their blankets? Do you?
5. With your partner, think of animals that live in
a burrow. Explain why you think these animals
live there. Do they do it for fun or for survival?
(Call on one or two pairs to respond)
6. Now lets say burrow together three more
times: burrow, burrow, burrow.
Key Vocabulary
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is beyond. Say

it with me: beyond. Going beyond something
means you have passed it.
2. En espaol, beyond quiere decir ms all,
ms lejos. Si pasas algo, quiere decir que
caminaste ms all de esa cosa.
something that is beyond. (Point to athlete.)
This athlete is jumping very high. Maybe he
is jumping higher than he has ever jumped
before. He is going beyond his own goal.
burrow
beyond
MOVEMENT
4. Draw a circle. Next, draw a star outside of the
circle. The star is not inside the borders of the
circle. The star is past the circles border, so it
is beyond it.
5. Imagine how far your arms will stretch. Now
stretch your arms, reaching as far as you can.
Did your arms stretch beyond where you
thought they would reach?
6. Now lets say beyond together three more
times: beyond, beyond, beyond.
300
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Comstock/PunchStock. (b) David Madison/Photographers Choice RF/Getty Images.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
warning
Word 4
lengthy
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
warning
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is warning. Say it

with me: warning. A warning tells you to be
careful or to look out for something.
2. En espaol, warning quiere decir advertencia,
aviso. Si ves un aviso de algn peligro, es una
advertencia.
3. Now lets look at one kind of warning. (Point
to the rattlesnake.) This rattlesnake has a
rattle. The rattle makes noise. That noise tells
other animals that the snake has a poisonous
bite. The rattle is a warning.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is lengthy. Say it

with me: lengthy. When something is lengthy,
it is long. This road to Granmas house is
lengthy. It takes us a few hours to get there.
2. En espaol, lengthy quiere decir largo,
prolongado. Algo largo mide mucho de
punta a punta. El camino a las casa de mi
abuela es largo. Nos demoramos un par de
horas en llegar.
is lengthy. This ground squirrel has a long tail.
Its tail is lengthy.
302
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Mike Kemp/Rubberball/Jupiterimages. (b) Image100/Jupiterimages.
PARTNER TALK
4. With your partner, see if you can draw a red
stop sign. Remember that it has eight sides!
Is this a type of warning?
5. Think of words that are warnings, like Stop!
Be careful! Share these words with your
partner. (Call on one or two pairs to share
their warning words.)
6. Now lets say warning together three more
times: warning, warning, warning.
Word 4
lengthy
PARTNER TALK
4. Ask your partner to think of books that are
lengthy. Share some book titles with
each other.
5. Think about times when you had a lengthy
wait. Where were you? What were you
waiting for? Tell your partner about it. (Call
on one or two pairs to respond.)
6. Now lets say lengthy together three more
times: lengthy, lengthy, lengthy.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
distant
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
distant
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is distant. Say it

with me: distant. Distant means far away.
We live in the U.S. The South Pole is far from
here. It is a distant place.
2. En espaol, distant quiere decir distante,
lejano. Algo que queda lejos es distante.
Vivimos en Estados Unidos. El Polo Sur nos
qued a lejos. Es un lugar distante.
3. Distant in English and distante in Spanish are
is distant. (Point to the road.) The end of the
road is very far away. It is distant.
304
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) L. Clarke/Corbis. (
PARTNER TALK
5. Tell your partner where your grandparents,
aunts, or uncles live. Do they live somewhere
distant?
6. With your partner, think of distant cities. Then
think of distant countries. (Call on one or two
pairs to name the cities and countries.)
7. Now lets say distant together three more
times: distant, distant, distant.
Word 1
wet
Word 2
dry
Word 1
wet
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something that is wet is covered

or soaked with water. Say it with me: wet.
After I take a shower, I am wet. When I go
swimming, I am wet.
2. En espaol, wet quiere decir mojado; lleno
de agua. Despus de baarme, estoy mojada.
Cuando he nadado, quedo mojada.
3. This picture shows a wet place. This is the
ocean. The sand by the ocean is always wet.
The water goes on the land and makes it wet.
Would you like to go in the ocean?
4. Im going to name some activities. If it is a

wet activity, say the word wet. If it is not a
wet activity, say nothing.
taking a bath
playing in the rain
eating lunch
going swimming
5. What can happen if you stand up in a little
boat? Lets sing about it. One side of the room
sings the part of the child, and the other side
sings the part of the mom:
Child:
Row, row, row the boat.
Mom, are we there yet?
Mom:
Sing a song. It wont be long.
Sit, or youll be wet.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: wet,
wet, wet.
Word 2
dry
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, when something is dry, it does not

have water. Say it with me: dry. It is not wet.
If we put wet clothes in the sun, they will be
dry soon.
2. En espaol, dry quiere decir seco, sin agua.
Si cuelgo la ropa al sol, muy pronto se secar.
3. This picture shows something dry. A desert is
almost always dry. A desert has very little rain.
4. Im going to call out things in a kitchen. Say if

the item is wet or dry.
milk, orange juice, tortilla chips, raisins, water,
peanuts, chicken soup
5. Think about todays weather. Is today a dry
day or a wet day?
6. Repeat the word three times with me: dry, dry,
dry.
306
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Goodshoot/JupiterImages/Alamy Images. (b) PhotoLink/Photodisc/Getty Images.
Word 3
get wet
Word 4
dry up
Word 3
get wet
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, to get wet means to become

soaked with water, to go in the water. Say
it with me: get wet. I get wet when it rains. I
get wet when I take a shower.
2. En espaol, to get wet quiere decir mojarse;
empaparse. Yo me mojo cuando llueve. Me
mojo cuando me bao.
3. This picture shows what get wet means. These
children are having fun. They are getting wet.
It is probably a hot day. It is fun to get wet on
a hot day.
4. Imagine that its a very hot summer day. Do

you want to get wet? How do you get wet?
Do you go the lake? Do you go to the pool?
Do you turn on the sprinklers?
5. What do you wear when you get wet? Do you
wear shorts? Do you wear a bathing suit?
wet, get wet, get wet.
Word 4
dry up
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, to dry up means to absorb water,

to become very dry. Say it with me: dry up.
When it doesnt rain, the creek can dry up.
There is no more water in the creek.
2. En espaol, to dry up quiere decir secarse;
absorber agua. Cuando no llueve por mucho
tiempo, el riachuelo se seca. No hay agua en
el riachuelo.
3. This picture shows how someone can dry up.
These boys were wet. Then they got towels.
They use the towels to dry up.
4. Imagine that I spilled a glass of water. What

can I use to dry up the water?
5. Imagine a rainy day. Imagine a big puddle on
the sidewalk. Now imagine the sun comes out.
The sun shines and shines. What will happen
to that puddle? (It will dry up.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: dry
up, dry up, dry up.
308
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brooklyn Production/Corbis. (b) Mike Kemp/Rubberball Productions/Getty Images.
Basic Words
Unit 6 Week 1
Dig, Wait, Listen:
A Desert Toads Tale
rumble, crunch, scratch,

thump, hammer, plop
rumble
crunch
scratch
thump
hammer
plop
ROUTINE
309
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Edmond Van Hoorick/Photodisc/Getty Images. (tc) Martin Diebel/fStop/Getty Images. (tr) Erich Kuchling/Westend61/Getty Images.
(bl) Thinkstock/PunchStock. (bm) age fotostock. (br) Polka Dot Images/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
beast
Unit 6 Week 2 Splish! Splash! Animal Baths
Word 2
puddles
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
beasts
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is beast. Say it with

me: beast. A beast is a large animal with
four feet. Lions, tigers, and bears are beasts.
2. En espaol, beast quiere decir bestia. Una
bestia es un animal grande de cuatro patas.
Los leones, los tigres y los osos son bestias.
3. Beast in English and bestia in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture of a beast. (Point
to the tiger.) This is a tiger. Tigers are the
largest members of the cat family. They are
large enough to be called beasts.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is puddles. Say

it with me: puddles. Puddles are small pools
of water. When it rains a lot, puddles form on
the sidewalk and in the street.
2. En espaol, puddles quiere decir charcos.
Un charco es un pequeo depsito de agua.
Cuando llueve, se forman charcos en el
pavimento.
3. Now lets look at a picture of a puddle. (Point
to the puddle.) These birds are cleaning
themselves in the water. The birds are taking
a bath in a puddle.
312
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Creatas Images/Jupiterimages. (b) J. Sneesby/B. Wilkins/Stone/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
5. Ask your partner if he or she has any pets.
Are they large? Are they large enough to be
beasts? Do you have any large pets?
6. What do you think a beast usually sound like?
Ask your partner. Are they quiet? Do they
make big noises?
7. Now lets say beast together three more times:
beast, beast, beast.
Word 2
puddles
PARTNER TALK
4. Imagine a puddle. Now imagine a lake. How
are they the same? How are they different?
Tell your partner. (Call on one or two pairs to
respond.)
5. When do puddles usually appear? Ask your
partner.
6. Now lets say puddles together three more
times: puddles, puddles, puddles.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
nibble
Word 4
itches
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
nibble
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is nibble. Say it with

me: nibble. When you nibble your food, you
take small bites of it. Mice nibble cheese with
their little mouths.
2. En espaol, to nibble quiere decir
mordisquear. Cuando mordisqueas la
comida, la muerdes a pequeos bocados. Los
ratones mordisquean el queso con sus bocas
pequeas.
3. Now lets look at something nibbling its food.
(Point to monkey.) This monkey looks like its
nibbling its food. The monkey is taking little
bites of its food.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is itches. Say it

with me: itches. When your skin itches, you
want to scratch it.
2. En espaol, to itch quiere decir picar.
Cuando te pica la piel, te dan ganas de
rascarte.
3. Now lets look at a picture of an animal whose
skin itches. (Point to pig.) Look at this pig. He
is lying in the mud. His skin itches. The mud is
cool and refreshing. The mud must feel good
on his itchy skin.
314
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image100/Jupiterimages. (b) Digital Vision/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend youre nibbling on something. Have
your partner watch your mouth. Does your
mouth move a lot, or does it barely open?
5. I like to nibble on carrots. What do you like to
nibble on? Tell your partner. (Call on one or
two pairs to respond.)
6. Now lets say nibble together three more
times: nibble, nibble, nibble.
Word 4
itches
PARTNER TALK
4. What makes your skin itch? Does a fuzzy
sweater make your skin itch? Does an old
blanket make your skin itch? Tell your partner
what makes you itch.
5. Show your partner what you do when your
nose itches.
6. Now lets say itches together three more
times: itches, itches, itches.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
preen
Word 6
handy
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
preen
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is preen. Say it with

me: preen. When birds preen themselves, they
smooth their feathers with their beaks. Cats
and dogs also preen. They clean their fur with
their tongues.
2. En espaol, to preen quiere decir arreglarse
las plumas o el pelo. Los pjaros se arreglan
las plumas con el pico. Los gatos y los perros
tambin se arreglan. Se limpian el pelo con
la lengua.
3. Now lets look at a picture of an animal that is
preening. (Point to the bird.) The bird is using
its beak to comb its feathers. It is preening.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is handy. Say it

with me: handy. When something is handy, it
is useful. Remote controls are handy. You can
use then to change channels without having
to get up.
2. En espaol, handy quiere decir hbil, til que
tiene uso. El control remoto es algo til. Lo
puedes usar para cambiar el canal sin tener
que pararte.
3. Now lets look at a picture of an animal being
handy. (Point to the chimp.) This chimp is
using tools to nd his food. The tools are
handy. They help the chimp nd and eat
his food.
316
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) mark higgins/Alamy Images. (b) Photo 24/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
PARTNER TALK
4. Dogs and cats dont have beaks. How do dogs
and cats preen themselves? Tell your partner.
5. People can preen, too. When people preen,
they dress up and comb their hair. Pretend you
are going to a fancy party. Show your partner
how you can preen.
6. Now lets say preen together three more
times: preen, preen, preen.
Word 6
handy
PARTNER TALK
4. With your partner, look around the room and
point out handy things. Why are they handy?
5. Tell your partner about a time when you were
handy. Did you help your parents with chores?
Did you x something that was broken?
Explain how you were handy.
6. Now lets say handy together three more
times: handy, handy, handy.
Word 1
underwater
Word 2
against a tree
Word 1
underwater
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something that is underwater is

completely covered in water. Say it with me:
underwater. When you dive to the bottom of
a pool, you are underwater. Fish are almost
always underwater.
2. En espaol, underwater quiere decir bajo
agua; sumergido en el agua. Cuando te tiras
de cabeza a la piscina, terminas bajo agua. Los
peces casi siempre estn bajo agua.
3. This picture shows swimmers who are
underwater. They use goggles to keep the
water out of their eyes.
4. Im going to name some animals. If they live

underwater, say the word underwater. If it
does not live underwater, say nothing.
sh
birds
cats
lobsters
5. Say this rhyme with me:
Id like to be
under the sea
in an underwater village.
Come with me!
underwater, underwater, underwater.
Word 2
against a tree
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, when you are against a tree, you

are resting next to the tree. You can feel the
tree bark. Say it with me: against a tree. In my
garden, I have a little bench against a tree. I
sit there under the shade.
2. En espaol, against a tree quiere decir contra
un rbol. Si ests contra un rbol, puedes
sentir la corteza. En mi jardn, tengo una
banquita contra el rbol. Ah me siento en la
sombra.
3. This picture shows someone against a tree.
This little girl is reading right by the tree. She
has her back against the tree.
4. Lets pretend to be sitting against a tree. Sit

back to back with your partner. Imagine you
are against a tree.
5. Pretend you are scratching your back against
a tree, like a bear does. Scratch up and down.
Doesnt that feel good?
against a tree, against a tree, against a tree.
318
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Reed Kaestner/Corbis. (b) OBrien Productions/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.
Word 3
dirty
Word 4
clean
Word 3
dirty
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something that is dirty has stains or

dirt on it. It needs to be washed. It needs to
get clean. Say it with me: dirty. I put my dirty
clothes in the washing machine.
2. En espaol, dirty quiere decir sucio, que tiene
manchas o mugre. Algo sucio necesita ser
lavado. Pongo mi ropa sucia en la lavadora.
3. This picture shows what dirty means. Look at
this girls hands. They are full of paint. She
needs to wash her hands.
4. What is your favorite way to get dirty? Do you

like to play in the mud? Do you like to play in
the sand? Do you like to look under rocks?
5. My dog likes to roll in the grass. He also likes
to dig holes in the yard. How else do dogs get
dirty?
6. Repeat the word three times with me: dirty,
dirty, dirty.
Word 4
clean
TEACHER TALK
MOVEMENT
1. In English, when you clean something, you

take the dirt off. Say it with me: clean. I need
to clean my shoes. I stepped in some mud this
morning.
2. En espaol, clean quiere decir limpiar o lavar;
quitarle el sucio a algo. Tengo que limpiar
mis zapatos. Esta maana anduve por el lodo.
3. This picture shows how someone is getting
clean. This child is washing his hands. Hes
using soap and water to clean his hands. This
is what we should do before we eat.
4. Lets pretend were all wearing glasses. Lets

take off our glasses and clean them. Clean one
side. Clean the other side. Now put them back
on.
5. Lets all pretend to clean our hands. Put some
soap in your hands. Turn on the water. Rub,
rub, rub. Rinse. Dry. Now you have soft, clean
hands.
6. Repeat the word three times with me: clean,
clean, clean.
320
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Pixland/PunchStock. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 6 Week 2
Splish! Splash! Animal Baths
sprinkle, shower, spray,

squirt, splash, soak
sprinkle
shower
spray
squirt
splash
soak
ROUTINE
321
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) John A. Rizzo/Getty Images. (tc) Design Pics/PunchStock. (tr) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
(bl) Anthony Marsh/Alamy Images. (bm) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (br) inspirestock/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
conservation
Unit 6 Week 3 A Way to Help Planet Earth
Word 2
remains
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
conservation
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is conservation. Say

it with me: conservation. When you practice
conservation, you protect the earth and water.
You help keep our planet clean.
2. En espaol, conservation quiere decir
conservacin, el hecho de proteger algo.
Cuando conservas el medio ambiente, cuidas
la tierra y el agua. Tratas de mantener limpio
el planeta.
3. Conservation in English and conservacin
in Spanish are cognates. They sound almost
languages.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is remains. Say

it with me: remains. When you are done with
something, the remains are the things that
are left. Remains are things you dont need
anymore.
2. En espaol, remains quiere decir restos,
desechos, lo que queda. Despus de usar
algo, lo que queda son los desechos. Los
desechos ya no se necesitan.
3. Now lets look at a picture of peoples
remains. (Point to the trash.) People have left
their remains on the ground, which makes
trash. Lets hope someone picks up these
bottles.
324
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) JupiterImages/Comstock Images/Alamy Images. (b) PhotoAlto.
PARTNER TALK
word conservation. (Point to the mom and her
daughter.) These people are recycling. They
are practicing conservation to help keep the
earth clean.
5. Conservation is important to our planet. What
other things can you conserve? Tell your
partner.
6. Another way to practice conservation is by
using paper again. (Show children a used
sheet of paper.) How can you reuse this sheet
of paper? Tell your partner. (Call on one or
two pairs to show how they would reuse the
paper.)
7. Now lets say conservation together three
more times: conservation, conservation,
conservation.
Word 2
remains
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend you are a really messy eater. You eat
a big sloppy sandwich for lunch. Once you are
done, are there any remains from your lunch?
Where should you put your remains? Tell your
partner.
5. Imagine there is a ood in your house. Many
of your belongings get ruined. The few things
that are left are the remains of the ood. Talk
about the things that you hope would be in
the remains after a ood in your house.
6. Now lets say remains together three more
times: remains, remains, remains.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
trouble
Word 4
extinct
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
trouble
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is trouble. Say it

with me: trouble. People get into trouble
when they do something that they should not
do. Something is trouble if it causes danger
or worry.
2. En espaol, trouble quiere decir problemas
o dicultades. Una persona puede tener
problemas si hace algo indebido. Algo es un
problema si puede causar peligro, molestia
o preocupacin.
word trouble. (Point to the mountain of trash.)
This huge pile of junk is trouble. What could
we do with all this trash?
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is extinct. Say

it with me: extinct. When a kind of animal
is in danger of becoming extinct, people are
worried because there are not many of those
animals left on Earth.
2. En espaol, extinct quiere decir extinguido.
Cuando un animal est en peligro de
extincin, ya no quedan muchos en el planeta.
Se van acabando poco a poco.
3. Extinct in English and extinguido in Spanish
326
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Design Pics/PunchStock. (b) Jeremy Woodhouse/Photodisc/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Would you get in trouble for not cleaning up
your room? What other things would you get
in trouble for? (Call on one or two pairs for
their responses.)
5. You may hear someone say, That puppy is a
lot of trouble! What do you think they mean
by that? Do you think its a good thing or a
bad thing?
6. Now lets say trouble together three more
times: trouble, trouble, trouble.
Word 4
extinct
PARTNER TALK
4. Now lets look at a picture of an animal thats
extinct. (Point to the dinosaur.) Dinosaurs are
extinct. They lived on Earth many, many years
ago, but there are no dinosaurs living anymore.
5. Many other animals are in danger of
becoming extinct. Some are already extinct,
such as dinosaurs and dodo birds. Can you
think of any other animals that are extinct or
in danger of becoming extinct?
6. Lets go back into prehistoric times, when
the dinosaurs, woolly mammoths, and other
animals were not extinct. Imagine you saw
one of these animals. How would you feel?
7. Now lets say extinct together three more
times: extinct, extinct, extinct.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
hardest
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
hardest
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is hardest. Say it

with me: hardest. When something is hardest,
it is the most difcult to do. I think French is
the hardest language to learn.
2. En espaol, hardest quiere decir lo ms
difcil. Yo pienso que el francs es el idioma
ms difcil de aprender.
word hardest. (Point to the boy.) This boy
is doing his math homework. Math is his
hardest subject, so he spends extra time on
his homework.
328
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Digital Vision/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend you have a feather, a book, and a
gallon of water in front of you. Imagine that
you are going to pick up each one of these
objects. Which one is the hardest to lift?
5. In your opinion, what is the hardest musical
instrument to learn how to play? Why? (Call
on one or two pairs for their response.)
6. Now lets say hardest together three more
times: hardest, hardest, hardest.
Word 1
something new
Word 2
something old
Word 1
something new
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something new has never been

seen or used before. Say it with me: something
new. Look at my new shoes. I just got them
yesterday.
2. En espaol, something new quiere decir
algo nuevo. Si tienes algo nuevo, no lo has
estrenado. Estoy estrenando zapatos. Son
nuevos. Apenas ayer los compr.
3. This picture shows something new. This family
gave something new to the mom. The mom is
opening her gift. Its something new. She has
never seen it before.
4. Help me nish this rhyme.

Look what I have
in this box. Its for you!
Its shiny. Its clean.
Its something
!
5. Im going to name some places. If you can get
something new there, give me a thumbs up. If
you cannot get something new there, give me
a thumbs down.
grocery store
trash can
book store
something new, something new, something
new.
Word 2
something old
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something old has been used many

times. It is not new anymore. Say it with me:
something old. I have an old sweater that I
like a lot. I have had it for about ve years.
Its something old I have in my closet.
2. En espaol, something old quiere decir algo
viejo; algo desgastado. Tengo un suter viejo
que me encanta. Lo tengo desde hace cinco
aos. Es algo viejo y querido que tengo en mi
ropero.
3. This picture shows something old. These
plastic bottles are old. Somebody used them
before. Sometimes we can recycle or reuse
something old. This plastic will get recycled,
and it will be new again.
4. Are you wearing something old? I am. I am

wearing my old socks. My socks are old and
comfortable. What are you wearing thats
old?
5. When a bride gets married, she is supposed
to wear something old, something new,
something borrowed and something blue.
What old thing do you think a bride can wear?
For example, she can wear an old necklace.
Or she can wear an old ring. What other old
thing can a bride wear?
something old, something old, something old.
330
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Reed Kaestner/Corbis. (b) PhotoLink/ Photodisc/Getty Images.
Word 3
run out of
Word 4
keep piling up
Word 3
run out of
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, when you run out of something,

it means you have no more. Say it with me:
run out of. When I run out of milk, I go to the
grocery store to buy more.
2. En espaol, to run out of quiere decir
acabarse; no tener ms de esa cosa. Cuando
se me acaba la leche, salgo al supermercado a
comprar ms.
3. This picture shows what run out of means.
Yum. These people are eating pizza. They are
all taking a piece. This pizza looks good. The
people will probably run out of pizza very
soon.
4. Help me nish these sentences:

When I run out of paper, I
.
When I run out of bread, I
.
When I run out of time, I
.
5. What should you do when you run out of
energy? (Possible responses: I should take a
nap. I should rest a little.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: run
out of, run out of, run out of.
Word 4
keep piling up
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, to keep piling up means to gather

in a pile or heap; to add more to a lot of
things. Say it with me: keep piling up. In
the fall, the leaves on my tree go all over my
backyard. I rake them up, but they keep piling
up. It seems I can never get them all.
2. En espaol, to keep piling up quiere decir
amontonarse; apilarse ms y ms. En el
otoo, las hojas de mi rbol se amontonan.
Las junto, pero siguen amontonndose. Es un
cuento de nunca acabar.
3. This picture shows something that keeps
piling up. Look at this garbage. It just keeps
piling up. The mountain of garbage keeps
getting bigger. What can we do?
4. Imagine that you each drew me a picture. You

each put your drawing on my desk, one at a
time. What would happen as you each put
your drawing in the pile? (The drawings would
keep piling up.)
5. Imagine a snowy day. Imagine that it snows
and snows on the ski slopes. Who likes it
when snow keeps piling up? (Skiers and
snowboarders like when snow keeps piling
up.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: keep
piling up, keep piling up, keep piling up.
332
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/Jupiterimages. (b) Design Pics/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 6 Week 3
A Way to Help Planet Earth
shampoo, juice, water,

soda, ketchup, syrup
shampoo
juice
water
soda
ketchup
syrup
ROUTINE
333
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Lawrence Manning/Corbis. (tc) Dynamic Graphics/PunchStock. (tr) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
(bl) Barry Gregg/Corbis. (bm) Jacques Cornell, photographer/McGraw-Hill Companies. (br) Ken Cavanagh, photographer/McGraw-Hill Companies.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
violent
Unit 6 Week 4 Super Storms
Word 2
beware
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
violent
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is violent. Say it

with me: violent. Something that has great
physical force is violent. Violent things cause
pain or discomfort.
2. En espaol, violent quiere decir algo con gran
fuerza fsica, violento. Algo violento causa
dolor o malestar.
3. Violent in English and violento in Spanish are
violent. (Point to the rain.) In this picture, the
weather is violent. The violent wind makes
the rain pour down harder. Look at the man.
He looks like he is not having an easy time
walking. The violent wind is pushing his body.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is beware. Say

it with me: beware. If you need to beware of
something, you need to be careful when you
are near it. Beware of things like barking dogs
and slippery sidewalks.
2. En espaol, beware quiere decir cuidarse de,
guardarse de. Si tienes que cuidarte de algo,
tienes que ser precavido. Cudate de los perros
bravos y las aceras resbalosas.
tells you to beware. (Point to the sign.) This
sign tells people to beware of the dog. The
dog might bark or bite, so people need to be
careful around it.
336
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Warren Faidley/Corbis. (b) Warren Faidley/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
5. Which is more violent, a hurricane or light
rain? A tornado or a light breeze? A ood or
a brief thunderstorm?
6. Which amusement park ride is more violent, a
roller coaster or a merry-go-round? Which ride
do you like better?
7. Now lets say violent together three more
times: violent, violent, violent.
Word 2
beware
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend you come across a big, dark, scarylooking house. Theres a sign on the lawn that
says, Beware! Do you think you should go
into the house? Why or why not?
5. There are other things that people need to
beware of. For example, you should beware
of falling objects at a construction site. Can
you think of other things to beware of? Name
them.
6. Now lets say beware together three more
times: beware, beware, beware.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
prevent
Word 4
uprooted
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
prevent
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is prevent. Say it

with me: prevent. To prevent something is
to keep it from happening. If you want to
prevent yourself from getting wet in the rain,
you can use an umbrella or wear a raincoat.
2. En espaol, to prevent quiere decir prevenir,
no dejar que suceda algo. Si quieres prevenir
mojarte con la lluvia, carga un paraguas o
impermeable.
3. To prevent in English and prevenir in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is uprooted.

Say it with me: uprooted. When something is
uprooted, it is pulled out of the ground. We
uprooted the weeds in our garden to stop
them from growing.
2. En espaol, to uproot quiere decir
desarraigar. Cuando algo es desarraigado,
es arrancado desde la raz. Desarraigamos la
maleza del jardn para parar su crecimiento.
has been uprooted. (Point to the tree and
path.) This tree was uprooted by the strong
winds of a tornado or hurricane. See how the
roots are up? The roots should be under the
ground.
338
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Warren Faidley/Corbis. (b) Jim Reed/Science Faction/Getty Images.
MOVEMENT
people prevent something. (Point to the
wooden boards.) These men are preparing for
a hurricane. They are placing wooden boards
over the store windows to prevent the glass
from breaking.
5. Raise a crayon up in the air, and then drop
it. Have your partner try to prevent it from
hitting the oor by catching it.
6. Pretend a few of your friends have a cold or
u. How can you prevent getting sick? How
can you prevent other people from getting
sick? (Call on one or two pairs to respond.)
7. Now lets say prevent together three more
times: prevent, prevent, prevent.
Word 4
uprooted
PARTNER TALK
4. Have you seen gardeners at work? Sometimes
they pull weeds out. They throw away
the weeds after they uproot them. Do the
gardeners make sure they pull the roots of the
weeds, too? Why do you think so?
5. Pretend you are a giant. Youre twice as tall
as a tree, and your shoe can be a boat. How
would you uproot a tree? Do you grab it by
the top or do you pull the trunk? Show your
partner how you would uproot a tree.
6. Now lets say uprooted together three more
times: uprooted, uprooted, uprooted.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
destroy
Word 6
grasslands
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
destroy
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is destroy. Say it

with me: destroy. To destroy something is to
ruin it or put an end to it. You can destroy a
building with a wrecking ball. You can destroy
a piata with a bat.
2. En espaol, to destroy quiere decir destruir,
deshacer una cosa. Puedes destruir un
edicio con un demoledor. Puedes deshacer
una piata con un bate.
3. To destroy in English and destruir in Spanish
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is grasslands. Say

it with me: grasslands. Grasslands are elds
full of grass. Grasslands are also known as
savannas and prairies.
2. En espaol, grasslands quiere decir pradera.
Una pradera es un terreno donde crece hierba.
Una pradera tambin es una llanura o sabana.
3. Now lets look at a picture of grasslands.
(Point to grasslands.) Look at this picture.
See how there are grass and plants growing
everywhere? This is what grasslands look like.
340
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Warren Faidley/Corbis. (b) Don Farrall/Photodisc/Getty Images.
MOVEMENT
4. Now lets look at a picture of a car that has
been destroyed. (Point to the car.) This car
was battered around in a natural disaster.
Hurricanes, tornadoes, and oods can destroy
many other things, too.
5. Pretend you have a big block tower in front of
you. Now destroy it! Knock it down!
6. Now pretend you are holding onto a balloon.
Try to destroy it! You can sit on it, pop it with
a pencil, or step on it. Say Pop! once you
destroy it.
7. Now lets say destroy together three more
times: destroy, destroy, destroy.
Word 6
grasslands
PARTNER TALK
4. Look at the picture of the grasslands. Describe
the grasslands to your partner. Tell your
partner what colors you see and how tall the
grass is.
5. Animals like lions and prairie dogs live in
grasslands. What other animals might live in
grasslands? Do tigers and elephants live in
grasslands? Tell your partner.
6. Now lets say grasslands together three more
times: grasslands, grasslands, grasslands.
Word 1
every second
Word 2
in just a minute
Word 1
every second
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something that happens every

second happens 60 times a minute. Say it
with me: every second. (Point to a wall clock.)
Look at the clock. Look at the second hand. It
counts every second: one, two, three, four...
2. En espaol, every second quiere decir cada
segundo. Algo que sucede cada segundo
sucede 60 veces por minuto. (Seale un reloj
de pared.) Miren el reloj. Miren el segundero.
Marca cada segundo: uno, dos, tres, cuatro...
every second. The water in the ocean moves
every second. All the time, waves are crashing
on the shore.
4. Finish this sentence with me:

Every second of every day, we
.
(breathe, are alive)
5. Lets count for 30 seconds. Nod your head
every second. Lets start: one, two, three...
second, every second, every second.
Word 2
in just a minute
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, if I say something will happen in

just a minute it means it will happen in 60
seconds, or in a little while. I might say, Wait
just a minute. That means you wont have
to wait very long. I will talk to you in just a
minute. Say it with me: in just a minute.
2. En espaol, in just a minute quiere decir en
un minuto o en 60 segundos; en un momento
corto. Si digo, Esprame un minuto, quiero
decir que no tendrs que esperar mucho
tiempo. En poco te atiendo.
3. This picture shows what can happen in just a
minute. These people are doing jumping jacks.
How many jumping jacks do you think they
can do in just a minute? If they can do one
jumping jack every second, maybe they can do
60 jumping jacks in a minute.
4. How many letters of the alphabet can you

name in just a minute? Lets start now. A, B,
C...
5. Imagine that in just a minute the bell will
ring. What do you do in that minute?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: in just
a minute, in just a minute, in just a minute.
342
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) image100/Corbis. (b) Mike Powell/Digital Vision/Getty Images.
Word 3
per hour
Word 4
each year
Word 3
per hour
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something that happens per hour

happens during one hour. Say it with me: per
hour. I can walk four miles per hour. In other
words, in one hour, I can walk four miles.
2. En espaol, per hour quiere decir por hora.
Yo puedo caminar cuatro millas por hora. O
sea, en una hora puedo caminar cuatro millas.
3. This picture shows what per hour means.
These cars are going fast on the highway.
How many miles per hour do you think they
are going? They might be going 65 miles per
hour. That means that in one hour, they travel
65 miles.
4. Imagine two cars are on the highway. One is

going 65 miles per hour and the other is going
35 miles per hour. Which one is going faster?
5. A doctor can see four patients per hour. How
many patients can he see in two hours?
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: per
hour, per hour, per hour.
Word 4
each year
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something that happens each year

happens every 12 months. Say it with me: each
year. You have a birthday each year. Each
year, we have summer vacation.
2. En espaol, each year quiere decir cada
ao; cada 12 meses. Celebras tu cumpleaos
cada ao. Cada ao, disfrutamos de nuestras
vacaciones de verano.
each year. Look at the pretty colors on the
trees. Each year, in autumn, the leaves turn
colors. Each year, we can see these pretty
colors.
4. What happens each year in the summertime?

(Possible answers: We have vacation. We go
swimming. We go to the beach.)
5. Think of something that happens in our
school each year. What happens each year?
(Possible responses: The fourth graders to to
science camp. We have a carnival in October.)
6. Repeat the phrase three times with me: each
year, each year, each year.
344
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) VisionsofAmerica/Joe Sohm/Digital Vision/Getty Images. (b) Digital Vision/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 6 Week 4
Super Storms
thunderstorm, lightning, hailstorm,

hail stone, snowstorm, rain shower
thunderstorm
lightning
hailstorm
hail stone
snowstorm
rain shower
ROUTINE
345
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Creatas/PunchStock. (tc) PhotoLink/Photodisc/Getty Images. (tr) A. T. Willett/Alamy Images.
(bl) Kent Knudson/PhotoLink/Photodisc/Getty Images. (bm) Ellen McKnight/Alamy Images. (br) Comstock/PunchStock.
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
signal
Unit 6 Week 5 Pushing Up the Sky
Word 2
randomly
Key Vocabulary
Word 1
signal
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is signal. Say it with

me: signal. A signal is something that gives
you a message. For example, a red light is a
signal that means you must stop.
2. En espaol, signal quiere decir seal. Una
seal es un signo que sirve para anunciar o
advertir. Por ejemplo, una luz roja es una seal
que signica alto.
3. Signal in English and seal in Spanish are
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is randomly. Say

it with me: randomly. If something happens
randomly, it happens by chance and is not in
any particular order.
2. En espaol, randomly quiere decir al azar.
Si algo pasa al azar, pasa por casualidad no
pasa en ningn orden.
random. (Point to the dice.) Someone threw
these dice. They landed randomly. They are in
no particular order. The number of dots facing
up on each one happened by chance.
348
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) L. Clarke/Corbis. (b) Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Now lets look at a picture of a signal. (Point
to the trafc light.) This is a trafc light. A
green light is a signal that means go. What
does the yellow light mean? (go with caution)
5. With your partner, think of different types of
signals you see on the road.
6. Try to tell your partner something using
only your hands. Your hand movements are
signals. Then tell your friend what you are
trying to say.
7. Now lets say signal together three more
times: signal, signal, signal.
Word 2
randomly
PARTNER TALK
4. Hold up all your ngers. Have your partner
randomly pick one nger. It is random
because your partner could have chosen any
nger.
5. Discuss with you partner other things in the
classroom that happen randomly. When you
line up to go home, do you line up randomly,
or is there a certain order you must follow?
(Call on one or two pairs to respond.)
6. Now lets say randomly together three more
times: randomly, randomly, randomly.
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
agreed
Word 4
gathered
Key Vocabulary
Word 3
agreed
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is agreed. Say it

with me: agreed. Agreed means felt the same
way about something.
2. En espaol, to agree quiere decir estar de
acuerdo. Si ests de acuerdo con alguien,
los dos piensan lo mismo.
3. Now lets look at people who are agreeing.
They are shaking hands. When two people
shake hands, it means that they feel the same
way about something. They have agreed.
Key Vocabulary
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is gathered. Say

it with me: gathered. When things are put
together into one group, they are gathered.
All of us are gathered in this classroom to learn.
2. En espaol, to gather quiere decir juntar,
reunir. Cuando pones varias cosas en un
grupo, las reunes. Estamos reunidos en este
saln para aprender.
3. Now lets look at a picture of things being
gathered. (Point to the string beans.) These
string beans are being picked and put
together into boxes. They are being gathered
into boxes.
350
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Barry Gregg/Corbis. (b) image100/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk with your partner about your favorite
ice cream avor. Is it your partners favorite
avor, too? If it is, you two have agreed.
5. Think of games or sports that you and your
partner might like. Take turns saying, I think
is a fun sport. See how often
you agree or dont agree.
6. Now lets say agreed together three more
times: agreed, agreed, agreed.
Word 4
gathered
MOVEMENT
4. Put pencils or pens all around your desk. Now
gather them into a neat pile.
5. Gather your books into a pile.
6. Now lets say gathered together three more
times: gathered, gathered, gathered.
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
jabbing
Key Vocabulary
Word 5
jabbing
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is jabbing. Say

it with me: jabbing. When you are jabbing
something, you are poking it. (Poke your arm.)
I am jabbing my arm with my nger.
2. En espaol, to jab quiere decir dar o punzar
levemente con la punta de algo. (Punce su
brazo.) Me punzo el brazo con el dedo, pero
no duele.
3. Now lets look at a picture of a girl who is
jabbing at something. The girl is using a stick
to poke at things in the water. She is jabbing.
352
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Source Black/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Imagine you are making cookies. Pretend you
are jabbing the dough with your nger. How
does it feel? Say, I am jabbing the dough.
It feels
. (Call on one or two
pairs to respond.)
5. Jabbing people is not nice. Have you or your
partner ever jabbed someone to get their
attention? What was their reaction?
6. Now lets say jabbing together three more
times: jabbing, jabbing, jabbing.
Word 1
first
Word 2
second
Word 1
first
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something that is rst is before all

the other ones. Say it with me: rst. (Point to
a child in the rst row.) Who is rst in this row
of children? This child is before all the other
ones in the row.
2. En espaol, rst quiere decir primero; que
precede a o est antes que todos los dems.
(Seale a uno de los nios en la primera la.)
Quin es el primero en la la? Este nio
precede a todos los dems de la la.
3. This picture shows something that is rst.
Here are four little ducks. They are in a line.
(Point to the rst duck.) This duck is rst. He is
before all the other ones.
4. (Have four children stand in line, one behind

the other.) Who is rst?
5. Think of how we start our day. What do we
do rst?
6. Repeat the word three times with me: rst,
rst, rst.
Word 2
second
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something that is second is after

the rst one. It is number two. I drank a glass
of water. Then I drank another glass. I had a
second glass of water. Say it with me: second.
2. En espaol, second quiere decir segundo; que
viene despus del primero. Me tom un vaso
con agua. Luego tom otro vaso. Tom un
segundo vaso con agua.
3. Second in English and segundo in Spanish are
4. Here are four little ducks. They are in a line.
(Point to the second duck.) This duck is
second. (Count the ducks.) He is number two.
He is behind the rst duck.
5. (Point to a row of desks.) Who is the second

child in this row?
6. What is the second letter of the alphabet?
7. Repeat the word three times with me: second,
second, second.
354
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Source/PunchStock. (b) Image Source/PunchStock.
Word 3
third
Word 4
fourth
Word 3
third
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something that is third is after the

second one. It is number three. My house is
the third one from the corner: one, two, three.
Say it with me: third.
2. En espaol, third quiere decir tercero; que
viene despus del segundo. Mi casa es la
tercera de la esquina: uno, dos, tres.
3. Here are those same four ducks. They are in
a line. (Point to the third duck.) This duck is
third. (Count the ducks.) He is number three.
He is behind the second duck: rst, second,
third.
4. Think of the word love. Lets spell it: l-o-v-e.

What is the third letter in the word love?
5. What is the third day of the week,
starting from Monday? Monday, Tuesday,
Wednesday...
6. Repeat the word three times with me: third,
third, third.
Word 4
fourth
TEACHER TALK
CHORAL RESPONSE
1. In English, something that is fourth is after

three others. It is number four. April is the
fourth month of the year. Count on your
ngers: January, February, March, April. Say it
with me: fourth.
2. En espaol, fourth quiere decir cuarto; que
viene despus del tercero. Abril es el cuarto
mes del ao. Cuenten con sus dedos: enero,
febrero, marzo, abril.
3. Here are those ducks again! (Point to the
fourth duck.) This duck is fourth. (Count the
ducks.) He is number four. He is behind the
third duck: rst, second, third, fourth.
4. Do you remember what happened on your

fourth birthday? How old were you?
5. Hold up your hand. Count your ngers,
starting with your pointer nger (or index
nger): one, two, three, four. Do you know
what your fourth nger is called? Its the
littlest one. (pinky)
6. Repeat the word three times with me: fourth,
fourth, fourth.
356
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Source/PunchStock. (b) Image Source/PunchStock.
Basic Words
Unit 6 Week 5
Pushing Up the Sky
totem pole, canoe, paddle,

blanket, bow, arrow
totem pole
canoe
paddle
blanket
bow
arrow
ROUTINE
357
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Andrew Ward/Life File/Photodisc/Getty Images. (tc) JupiterImages/ Comstock Images/Alamy Images. (tr) Carl & Ann Purcell/Corbis.
(bl) The Granger Collection, New York. (bm) Radlund & Associates/Getty Images. (br) JupiterImages/ Polka Dot/Alamy Images.
Contents
English Language Development

Unit 1
Unit 4
Week 1 ELD Vocabulary .....................................................................359

Content Words ......................................................................363
Content Words ......................................................................367
Content Words ......................................................................373
Content Words ......................................................................379
Content Words ......................................................................385

Content Words ..................................................................... 443
Week 2 ELD Vocabulary .................................................................... 445
Content Words ......................................................................447
Content Words ......................................................................451
Content Words ......................................................................455
Content Words ......................................................................459
Unit 2
Unit 5

Content Words ......................................................................391
Content Words ......................................................................397
Content Words ......................................................................403
Content Words ..................................................................... 409
Week 5 ELD Vocabulary ..................................................................... 411
Content Words ......................................................................415

Content Words ......................................................................463
Content Words ..................................................................... 469
Content Words ......................................................................475
Content Words ......................................................................479
Content Words ......................................................................483
Unit 3
Unit 6
Week 1 ELD Vocabulary ..................................................................... 417

Content Words ......................................................................421
Content Words ......................................................................425
Content Words ......................................................................431
Content Words ......................................................................435
Content Words ......................................................................439

Content Words ..................................................................... 489
Content Words ......................................................................493
Content Words ......................................................................497
Content Words ......................................................................501
Content Words ......................................................................507
ELD Vocabulary Words
Word 1
fair
Unit 1 Week 1 Eating Sprouts
Word 2
scared
Word 1
fair
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is fair. Say it with

me: fair. A fair is a special event that is usually
held outdoors. At a fair, you can go on rides,
play games, and compete in contests. At a
county fair, people show their farm animals.
2. En espaol, fair se dice feria. Es un evento
que se lleva acabo afuera. En una feria puedes
comprar cosas, montarte en las atracciones,
jugar y hasta competir en concursos. En una
feria de campo las personas muestran sus
animales, como sus cerdos y sus vacas.
3. Fair in English and feria in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture of someone at a
fair. (Point to the boy.) This boy is riding a
merry-go-round. This is just one of the rides
you can nd at a fair.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is scared. Say

it with me: scared. Scared means afraid or
frightened; sensing danger. When we had
a big thunderstorm, the lightning scared me.
2. En espaol, to scare quiere decir causar
miedo, espanto, o que una persona sienta que
est en peligro; asustar. Cuando tuvimos una
tormenta fuerte, los relmpagos me asustaron.
some children who are scared. (Point to the
children.) These children are watching a scary
movie. They look frightened. How do you feel
about watching scary movies?
360
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Randy Faris/Corbis. (b) SW Productions/Brand X/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
5. Turn to your partner and talk about this
picture. Have partners describe other rides
they see in the picture. What else can you do
at a fair? Share your answers with the class.
(Possible responses: You can ride ponies. You
can eat hot dogs. You can see clowns.)
6. Tell your partner why a fair is fun. Finish this
sentence:
A fair is fun because
.
7. Now lets say fair together three more times:
fair, fair, fair.
Word 2
scared
PARTNER TALK
4. If someone jumps up behind me, I might
say, Oh! You scared me! Say that to your
partner: You scared me!
5. What are some things that might make
someone feel scared? Tell your partner what
happened and why you felt scared.
6. Now lets say scared together three more
times: scared, scared, scared.

Word 3
missed
Word 3
missed
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is missed. Say it with

me: missed. When I have missed someone, it
means that I wished that person were with
me. That person was far away when I wanted
him or her to be close to me. When my sister
went away to college, I missed her. I didnt
see her as often as I used to.
2. En espaol, to miss quiere decir hacerle falta,
extraar. Si extraas a alguien, sientes que
querras que esa persona estuviera contigo.
Esa persona se encuentra lejos cuando la
queras cerca. Cuando mi hermana mayor se
fue a la universidad, la extra mucho. Ya no
la vea tanto como antes.
the word missed. (Point to the girl.) The girl is
waiting for the school bus. Yesterday at school
the girl missed her mother. Maybe today will
be different.
362
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Comstock/Jupiterimages.
PARTNER TALK
4. Look at the girl in the photo. Then think
about the time when you rst went off to
school. Tell your partner who you missed and
why you missed him or her.
5. Work with your partner to use the word
missed in a sentence. Finish this sentence:
I missed
when he/she went away.
6. Now lets say missed together three more
times: missed, missed, missed.
ELD Content Words

Unit 1 Week 1 All About Location
location, map,
classroom, school
location
map
classroom
school
ROUTINE
4. Explain how these four words t into a group, or category. During
5. Point out the following cognates: mapa, escuela.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages. (tr) Photodisc/Ryan McVay/Getty Images.
(bl) Photodisc/PunchStock. (br) GeoStock/Photodisc/Getty Images.
363
Word 1
special
Unit 1 Week 2 A Special Garden
Word 2
place
Word 1
special
Unit 1 Week 2 A Special Garden
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is special. Say it

with me: special. Special means not like the
others; different; extraordinary. I have a
special cup that I use for my juice. I like it a
lot. A friend of mine gave it to me.
2. En espaol, special quiere decir no como los
otros, extraordinario, especial. Tengo una
taza especial que uso para mi jugo. Me gusta
muchsimo. Una amiga ma me la di.
3. Special in English and especial in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture of a special
day. This man is celebrating his birthday. A
birthday happens only once a year. A birthday
is a special day. You have fun on your birthday.
It is your special day! You spend it with the
people who you really like to be with.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is place. Say

it with me: place. A place is the space that
a person or thing occupies; a certain spot or
position. My favorite place is the beach.
2. En espaol, place quiere decir el espacio que
una persona o alguna cosa ocupa, un punto
o una posicin particular; un lugar. Mi lugar
preferido es la playa.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows a nice
place. This is a pretty garden. You can sit in
the chair and enjoy looking at the beautiful
owers. Its a great place to be on a sunny day.
366
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stewart Cohen/Blend Images/Getty Images.. (b) Purestock/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
picture. How does this man feel on his special
day? Share your answers with the class. (He
feels happy, proud, lucky.)
6. Tell your partner about someone special you
know. Finish this sentence:
is special because
.
7. Now lets say special together three more
times: special, special, special.
Word 2
place
PARTNER TALK
4. Do you have a favorite place? What does it
look like? What does it smell like? Tell your
partner all about your favorite place.
5. When was the last time you visited your
favorite place? Was it a long time ago? Was
it a few days ago? Tell your partner what you
did the last time you were in your favorite
place.
6. Now lets say place together three more times:
place, place, place.
ELD Content Words

Unit 1 Week 2 Countries Work Together
problem, success,
polar bear, tunnel
problem
success
polar bear
tunnel
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: problema, tnel.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (tr) Image Farm/Jupiterimages.
(bl) Creatas/PunchStock. (br) PhotoLink/Photodisc/Getty Images.
367
Word 1
famous
Word 2
history
Unit 1 Week 3 Family History
Word 1
famous
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is famous. Say it

with me: famous. A famous person is someone
who everyone knows about. For example,
George Washington was a famous President.
Even though he lived a long time ago,
everyone still knows about him.
2. En espaol, famous quiere decir una persona
que muchas personas conocen o reconocen,
famoso. Por ejemplo, George Washington fue
un Presidente famoso. Aunque fue presidente
hace mucho tiempo, la mayora de personas
hoy en da saben quien fue.
3. Famous in English and famoso in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture of someone
famous. This is Babe Ruth. He was a famous
baseball player. Some people think he was the
greatest baseball player of all time.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is history. Say it

with me: history. History means events that
have happened to a country. In their history,
the Egyptians built pyramids.
2. En espaol, history quiere decir los eventos
que ocurrieron en un pas en el pasado,
su historia. En la historia, los egipcios
construyeron pirmides.
3. History in English and historia in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture that shows an
important event in American history. This
picture shows American soldiers during the
rst war that our country fought. There have
been several wars in American history.
PARTNER TALK
picture. Do you know any other famous sports
heroes? Share your answers with the class.
(Responses include: Michael Jordan, Tiger
Woods, David Beckham)
6. Now together with your partner, say the
names of some famous singers and actors that
you know about.
7. Now lets say famous together three more
times: famous, famous, famous.
Word 2
history
PARTNER TALK
5. With your partner, talk about important dates
in American history. For example, October 12
is Columbus Day. On this date in 1492,
Christopher Columbus arrived in America.
What other events in history do we remember
with special holidays?
6. With your partner, name some important
people in American history, such as inventors
and Presidents.
7. Now lets say history together three more
times: history, history, history.
370
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) George Grantham Bain Collection/Library of Congress Prints and Photographs Division Washington, D.C [Reproduction number: LC-USZ62-98072]. (b) Library of Congress Prints and Photographs
Division Washington, D.C. [Reproductions number: LC-USZC4-6877].

Word 3
past
Word 3
past
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is past. Say it with

me: past. Something from the past is from a
time that is over. Abraham Lincoln was a past
President. He was President a long time ago.
2. En espaol, past quiere decir de un tiempo
que ya termin, pasado. Abraham Lincoln
es un Presidente pasado. Fue Presidente hace
mucho tiempo.
3. Past in English and pasado in Spanish are
4. Now lets look at a picture that shows things
from the past. These animals are dinosaurs.
Dinosaurs lived a long time ago. Are there any
dinosaurs in the present?
372
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) McGraw-Hill Companies.
PARTNER TALK
5. In the past, there were no cars. How did
people get from one place to another in the
past? Talk with your partner about how you
think people got around before cars were
invented.
6. Work with your partner to use the word past
in a sentence. Finish these sentences:
In the past, people used to
.
A President from the past is
.
7. Now lets say past together three more times:
past, past, past.
ELD Content Words

Unit 1 Week 3 Then and Now
family, ancestor,
country, grandmother
family
ancestor
country
grandmother
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: familia, ancestro.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Jupiterimages / Brand X/Alamy Images. (tr) Bananastock/Jupiterimages.
(bl) Cartesia/PunchStock. (br) Blend Images/Jose Luis Pelaez Inc/Getty Images.
373
Word 1
fought
Unit 1 Week 4 Three Heroes
Word 2
treated
fought
Word 1
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is fought. Say it

with me: fought. Fought means worked hard
to get something. Many people in history
fought with their words, not with weapons.
For example, Martin Luther King, Jr. fought for
change by using strong words. His speeches
are still famous.
2. En espaol, to ght quiere decir trabajar
muy duro por conseguir algo, luchar. En la
historia, muchas personas lucharon con sus
palabras, no con armas. Martin Luther King,
Jr. luch por cambio usando palabras fuertes.
Sus discursos son famosos.
3. Now lets look at a picture of people who
fought for a better world. These people
marched for equal rights. They were peaceful.
They carried signs that said what they wanted.
PARTNER TALK
picture. How can you tell that they fought
peacefully? Share your answers with the class.
5. Now tell your partner about the last time you
fought peacefully by talking and asking for
something. What kind of words do you think
help you win a ght peacefully?
6. Now lets say fought together three more
times: fought, fought, fought.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is treated. Say

it with me: treated. The way that someone is
treated is the way that others acted toward
that person. I treated everyone with kindness.
I treated people fairly and thiought about
their feelings.
2. En espaol, to treat quiere decir comportarse
de una manera determinada con alguien,
tratar. Intento tratar a todo el mundo con
amabilidad. Intento tratar a todo el mundo de
una manera justa, siempre pensando en sus
sentimientos.
people who were not treated very well. These
people worked long hours picking lettuce and
other vegetables. They worked hard, but they
did not make much money. They were not
treated very well.
Word 2
treated
PARTNER TALK
4. With your partner, talk about how friends
should be treated by each other. What kinds
of things do you say to friends when you see
them rst thing in the morning? What do you
say when you leave a friend at the end of the
school day?
5. Pretend that your partner visited your
house. How was your partner treated? Did
you say nice things like, Come in. Do you
want to something to eat or drink? Have a
conversation in which each of you is treated
nicely during a visit.
6. Now lets say treated together three more
times: treated, treated, treated.
376
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) National Archives and Records Administration. (b) Dorothea Lange/The Granger Collection, New York.

Word 3
rights
Word 3
rights
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is rights. Say it with

me: rights. Rights are specic promises that
the government makes to every U.S. citizen.
For example, every citizen who is 18 years old
has the right to vote.
2. En espaol, rights quiere decir las promesas
especcas que un gobierno le hace a sus
ciudadanos, derechos. Todos los ciudadanos
americanos mayores de 18 aos, por ejemplo,
tienen el derecho de votar en una eleccin.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows one
of the rights that people have in our country.
This person is voting. Voting is one of our
rights. We can vote for the President we think
will do the best job.
PARTNER TALK
4. One of our rights is the pursuit of happiness.
That means you can do things that will help
you have a good life. Tell your partner what
you would like to do when you are grown up.
5. A long time ago, African Americans and
women did not have the right to vote. Tell
your partner how this has changed.
6. Now lets say rights together three more
times: rights, rights, rights.
378
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) U.S. News and World Report Magazine Photograph Collection/Library of Congress.
ELD Content Words

Unit 1 Week 4 Governments of Other Countries
capital, vote,
leader, lawmaker
capital
vote
leader
lawmaker
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: capital, voto, lder.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Photodisc/Annie Reynolds/PhotoLink/Getty Images. (tr) Momentum Creative Group/Alamy Images.
(bl) Bananastock/PunchStock. (br) rubberball/Getty Images.
379
Word 1
brave
Unit 1 Week 5 The New Americans
Word 2
proud
Word 1
brave
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is brave. Say it with

me: brave. Brave means not afraid; able to
face danger or discomfort without fear.
Being a police ofcer is a dangerous job. You
need to be brave to be a police ofcer.
2. En espaol, brave quiere decir que no tiene
susto, o que enfrenta peligro o disgustos sin
miedo; valiente. Ser un polica es un trabajo
peligroso. Necesitas ser muy valiente para ser
un polica.
3. Now lets look at a picture of some brave
people. These are reghters. They face
danger all the time. They go into burning
buildings. They climb up high ladders to
save people. Fireghters are brave men
and women.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is proud. Say

it with me: proud. When you are proud, you
feel good about something you did well. I feel
proud when you do well in school. When you
do well, I know that you have learned, and I
am proud that you have worked hard.
2. En espaol, proud quiere decir que se siente
bien por un trabajo que ha hecho o que otros
han hecho, orgulloso. Cuando les va bien, s
que han aprendido y me siento orgulloso de
que han trabajado duro.
3. Now lets look at a picture of someone who is
proud. This boy did something very well. He
won a medal. He feels proud because he did
his best. What do you think he did? Maybe he
won a race.
382
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Comstock Images/Jupiterimages. (b) Stockbyte/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
picture. What are the reghters doing? Is it
dangerous work? Tell why the reghters are
brave.
5. Now tell your partner about the last time you
felt brave. What did you do? Did you go into
a dark room? Did you speak in front of the
class? Did you get a vaccine at the doctors
ofce?
6. Now lets say brave together three more times:
brave, brave, brave.
Word 2
proud
MOVEMENT
4. Pretend we all just won rst place in a math
contest. Show me your proud face. Hold up
your trophy.
5. Pretend you are marching in a parade. You are
feeling proud. Hold your head up high. Wave
to the crowds on the sidewalk as you pass
them by.
6. Now lets say proud together three more
times: proud, proud, proud.

Word 3
enough
Word 3
enough
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is enough. Say it

with me: enough. When there is enough of
something, you have as much as you need. If
someone offers me something to eat, and I
just ate lunch, I might say, No thank you. I
have had enough to eat already.
2. En espaol, enough quiere decir que hay lo
necesario de algo, que no se necesita ms;
suciente. Si alguien me ofrece algo de
comer cuando acabo de comer, seguramente
respondera, No, gracias. Ya com lo
suciente.
meaning of enough. Look at the corn plants.
They have had enough sunshine and rain. The
corn plants got enough of what they need to
grow tall and strong.
384
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Scenics of America/PhotoLink/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend your partner is pouring you a glass
of water. When you have enough water, say
Thats enough. Thank you.
5. Now pretend you are giving your partner a
piece of your sandwich. Your sandwich is big,
and you can share some of it. Say, There is
enough for both of us. Dont forget to say
thank you!
6. Now lets say enough together three more
times: enough, enough, enough.
ELD Content Words

Unit 1 Week 5 Our Ancestors in California
Native American,
tradition, shers, job
Native American
tradition
shers
job
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: tradicin.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Lindsay Hebberd/Corbis. (tr) Photodisc/Scott T. Baxter/Getty Images.
(bl) 997 IMS Communications Ltd/Captsone Design./FlatEarth Images. (br) Digital Vision/Siri Stafford/Getty Images.
385
Word 1
lost
Unit 2 Week 1 The Soccer Team
Word 2
mighty
Word 1
lost
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is lost. Say it with

me: lost. When you or your team have lost
a game, you have not won. If your favorite
team has lost the playoff match, they will not
go on to play in the championship game.
2. En espaol, to lose quiere decir no ganar,
perder. Cuando tu equipo preferido pierde el
partido calicador, sabes que no jugar en el
campeonato nal.
has lost. (Point to the soccer player.) This man
has lost a soccer game. He is sad. How would
you feel if you lost a game?
PARTNER TALK
4. Turn to your partner and talk about a time
when your team lost a game. Share your
answers with the class. (Responses may include:
My team lost an important baseball game.)
5. Tell your partner how losing makes you feel.
Finish this sentence: When I lost, I felt
.
6. Now lets say lost together three more times:
lost, lost, lost.
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is mighty. Say it

with me: mighty. When you are mighty, you
are powerful and strong. My dog thinks he is
mighty, but he weighs as much as a bag of
sugar!
2. En espaol, mighty quiere decir poderoso
y fuerte, potente. Mi perro piensa que es
potente, pero no pesa ms que una bolsa de
azcar!
has a mighty kick. Look how hard this boy
kicks the soccer ball. He puts all his strength
into kicking the ball. He has a mighty kick.
The ball will go far.
mighty
MOVEMENT
4. Lets all pretend to be mighty. Stand up and
show me how you look and feel when you are
powerful and strong. Tell me what kinds of
things you could do if you were mighty.
5. Can you think of a mighty animal? Tell me the
names of some mighty animals. What makes
these animals so powerful and strong?
6. Now lets say mighty together three more
times: mighty, mighty, mighty.
388
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (b) CS Productions/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.

Word 3
score
Word 3
score
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is score. Say

it with me: score. A score is the number of
points you receive when you do something,
such as taking a test or competing in a contest
or sport. When your score is high on a test or
quiz, you did well.
2. En espaol, score se dice puntuacin. La
puntuacin es el nmero de puntos que
recibes por hacer algo, ya sea tomar un
examen o participar en un concurso o deporte.
Cuando tu puntuacin es alta en un examen,
te fue bien.
word score. (Point to the scoreboard.) The
scoreboard shows the score for each team in
the game. Which team has the highest score?
390
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Pictor International/ Pictor International, Ltd./PictureQuest/Jupiterimages.
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend you have just scored a goal and your
team has won. Show your partner what you
would do. How would you celebrate?
5. Work with your partner to use the word score
in a sentence. Finish this sentence: When I
score a point, I feel
.
6. Now lets say score together three more times:
score, score, score.
ELD Content Words

Unit 2 Week 1 North America
mountain, ocean,
river, continent
mountain
ocean
river
continent
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: montaa, ocano, ro, continente.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Creatas Images/PunchStock. (tr) Bananastock/PunchStock.
(bl) Jupiterimages/Creatas/Alamy Images. (br) Mark Karrass/Corbis.
391
Word 1
goal
Unit 2 Week 2 Wilson Riles: Educator
Word 2
successful
Word 1
goal
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is goal. Say it with

me: goal. A goal is what you work to get, or
make sure you do. A students goal is to learn
and get good grades. My goal is to help you
do that.
2. En espaol, goal quiere decir lo que uno
quiere lograr o llegar a hacer; meta. La meta
del estudiante es aprender y sacar buenas
calicaciones. Mi meta es ayudarles a lograrlo.
3. Now lets look at a picture of students who
have a goal. (Point to the students studying a
model of a human brain.) These students want
to learn everything they can about the human
brain. That is their goal.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is successful.

Say it with me: successful. When people are
successful, they have reached their goals.
When a business is successful, it makes a lot of
money.
2. En espaol, successful quiere decir que ha
logrado sus metas, exitoso. Cuando a una
empresa le va bien y gana mucho dinero, la
empresa es exitosa.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows two
successful swimmers. (Point out the medals
that the girls have won.) We know that the
girls have been successful because they have
each won a medal.
394
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Randy Faris/Corbis. (b) Radius Images/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Turn to your partner and talk about the goals
that you have for this year. (Examples include:
My goal is to get good grades. My goal is to
make new friends!)
5. Tell your partner about goals that you have
reached. Was it hard? How did you feel when
you reached your goal?
6. Now lets say goal together three more times:
goal, goal, goal.
Word 2
successful
PARTNER TALK
4. What can you do to be a successful student?
Should you study more? Should you raise your
hand more in class? Tell your partner.
5. Who do you think is successful? What are
they like? What do they do that makes them
successful?
6. Now lets say successful together three more
times: successful, successful, successful.
Word 3
succeed
Word 4
chance
Word 3
succeed
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is succeed. Say it

with me: succeed. When you succeed, you do
what you planned to do. If you study a lot so
you do well on a test and you get a really high
score, you have succeeded. You did what you
planned to do.
2. En espaol, to succeed quiere decir lograr lo
que uno se propone, ser exitoso. Cuando eres
exitoso, has logrado lo que queras lograr. Si
estudias para que te vaya bien en un examen y
recibes una buena puntuacin, eres exitoso.
the word succeed. (Point to the test score.) The
paper belongs to a student who has succeeded
on his or her test. The student has studied hard
and got a good score.
PARTNER TALK
4. Imagine you succeed on a spelling test. Tell
your partner what you did to succeed. Did you
study?
5. With your partner, choose the activities that
will help you succeed in school:
watching television
studying
walking your dog
reading a book
playing video games
6. Now lets say succeed together three more
times: succeed, succeed, succeed.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is chance. Say it

with me: chance. A chance is an opportunity
to do something. When I was given a chance
to be a teacher, I accepted.
2. En espaol, chance quiere decir un buen
momento para hacer algo, una oportunidad.
Cuando me dieron la oportunidad de ser un
profesor, la acept.
student in school. This student has been given
a chance to do some extra work after school.
He has taken the chance to earn some extra
credit for all his hard work.
Word 4
chance
PARTNER TALK
4. Have you ever had a chance to do something
that you are not normally able to do? Did you
take the chance? Tell your partner about your
decision.
5. Have your parents ever given you a chance to
do something, and you did it well? Tell your
partner what happened.
6. Tell your partner what fun thing you would
like to have a chance to do. (I would like a
chance to skydive. I would like a chance to
ride a roller coaster.)
7. Now lets say chance together three more
times: chance, chance, chance.
396
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Scott Speakes/Corbis. (b) Copyright John Foxx Images and Images 4 Communication/Dynamic graphics/Picturequest.
ELD Content Words

Unit 2 Week 2 People Making Differences
engine, machine,
windshield, inventor
engine
machine
windshield
inventor
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: mquina, inventor.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Collection Mix: Subjects/Car Culture/Getty Images. (tr) Corbis.
(bl) Creatas Images/Jupiterimages. (br) Library of Congress Prints and Photographs Division [LC-USZ62-38662].
397
Word 1
spread
Unit 2 Week 3 We Use Fire
Word 2
set
Word 1
spread
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is spread. Say it with

me: spread. When you spread something, you
are opening it up or stretching it out. I spread
butter and jam on my toast.
2. En espaol, to spread quiere decir abrir o
extender algo sobre otra cosa, esparcir.
Esparzo mantequilla y mermelada sobre mis
tostadas.
can spread. (Point to the re.) When ames
spread, they move quickly from one place to
another. It can be very dangerous, especially
in dry places like this eld.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is set. Say

it with me: set. To set means to cause
something to do something; to x or adjust
something. I set my alarm to wake me up.
When the weather is chilly, people set their
heat a little bit higher so they stay warm.
2. En espaol, to set quiere decir causar que
algo haga una accin; colocar, poner o ajustar
algo. Ajusto mi despertador para que me
levante a la hora que quiero. Cuando est
haciendo fro, ajusto la calefaccin para que
produzca ms calor.
3. Now lets look at a picture of something being
set. The man is setting his watch. Can you tell
what time it is?
400
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Corbis. (b) Photodisc/Getty Images.
MOVEMENT
4. Spread your arms as far as you can. See how
far you can reach! Are your arms longer than
your neighbors?
5. Pretend that you are spreading something
delicious on a cracker. What would you
spread?
6. Now lets say spread together three more
times: spread, spread, spread.
Word 2
set
PARTNER TALK
4. Who or what wakes you up in the morning?
Is it your alarm clock? What time is it set to
wake you up? Tell your partner.
5. With your partner, think of other things you
can set. (Possible answers: clock, watches,
oven temperature)
6. Now lets say set together three more times:
set, set, set.

Word 3
burn
Word 3
burn
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is burn. Say it with

me: burn. When something burns, it is on re.
When a house burns, the reghters come to
put out the re.
2. En espaol, to burn quiere decir prender con
fuego, quemar. Cuando una casa se quema,
los bomberos llegan a apagar el incendio.
word burn. (Point to the candles.) Look at how
these candles burn. You can see the re.
402
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) L. Clarke/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Have you ever sat and watched a re burn in
a replace? What did it look like? Tell your
partner.
5. With your partner, list things that burn.
(Possible answers: candles, wood, paper)
6. Now lets say burn together three more times:
burn, burn, burn.
ELD Content Words

Unit 2 Week 3 How Do Rocks Change?
weathering, crack,
size, shape
weathering
crack
size
shape
ROUTINE
403
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Image 100/PunchStock. (tr) Photodisc/Arthur S. Aubry/Getty Images.
(bl) Image Source Black/Getty Images. (br) The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc./Doug Sherman.
Word 1
stepmother
Unit 2 Week 4 Yeh-Shen: A Cinderella Tale From China
Word 2
kind
Word 1
stepmother
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is stepmother.

Say it with me: stepmother. If you have a
stepmother, you know that she is your fathers
wife. However, she is not your birth mother.
2. En espaol, stepmother se dice madrastra.
Una madrastra es la esposa de tu pap, pero
no es tu madre de nacimiento.
3. Now lets look at a picture of a stepmother.
She is this boys stepmother. She married the
boys father.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is kind. Say it

with me: kind. When you are kind, you are
nice. We should try to be kind to everyone.
2. En espaol, kind quiere decir amable.
Cunado eres amable, haces algo bueno o te
comportas bien con otra persona. Deberamos
ser amables con todos nuestros compaeros.
someone being kind. This woman is sick. She
doesnt feel well. Her son is being kind to her
because he cares about her. He brings her
breakfast in bed.
406
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Barbara Penoyar/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Roy McMahon/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Do you know anyone who has a stepmother?
Tell your partner about her. Who are her
stepchildren?
5. Tell your partner about any stepmothers who
appear in books or movies.
6. Now lets say stepmother together three more
times: stepmother, stepmother, stepmother.
Word 2
kind
PARTNER TALK
4. What words can you say to show that you are
kind? You can say please. What else can you
say? Tell your partner.
5. Who do you think is kind? What are they like?
What do they do that makes them kind?
6. Now lets say kind together three more times:
kind, kind, kind.

Word 3
turned
Word 3
turned
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is turned. Say it

with me: turned. Some things can turn into
something else. That means they can become
something different. My face turned red with
embarrassment when I fell down yesterday.
2. En espaol, to turn quiere decir cambiar
el aspecto de algo, volverse algo distinto,
tornar. Mi cara se torn roja cuando me
ca ayer.
the word turned. The caterpillar has turned
into a buttery. It became a buttery.
408
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Creatas/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Imagine you turned into a bird. What kind of
bird would you be? Tell your partner.
5. When was the last time you turned red
with embarrassment or excitement? What
happened? Tell your partner.
6. Now lets say turned together three more
times: turned, turned, turned.
ELD Content Words

Unit 2 Week 4 Leaders for Freedom
war, slavery, chief,

freedom
war
slavery
chief
freedom
ROUTINE
409
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Library of Congress Prints and Photographs Division [LC-USZC4-4526]. (tr) The Granger Collection, New York.
(bl) Glyn Jones/Corbis. (br) Jack Star/PhotoLink/Photodisc/Getty Images.
Word 1
connects
Unit 2 Week 5 Computers
Word 2
exist
connects
Word 1
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is connects. Say it

with me: connects. When you connect two
things, you put them together. If I join my
two hands and cross my ngers, I can connect
the ngers on my left hand with the ngers
on my right hand.
2. En espaol, to connect quiere decir unir dos
cosas, conectar. Si junto mis dos manos y
enlazo los dedos, puedo conectar los dedos
de mi mano izquierda con los de mi mano
derecha.
3. To connect in English and conectar in Spanish
the word connects. The children in the photo
are in a computer lab at school. The computers
there connect them to the Internet. This allows
them to get information for their schoolwork
they might not nd in books.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is exist. Say it

with me: exist. To exist means to be or to
live. You and I exist. We are here. We are
alive.
2. En espaol, to exist quiere decir ser o vivir,
estar en el mundo, existir. Ustedes y yo
existimos. Estamos aqu. Estamos vivos.
3. To exist in English and existir in Spanish are
something that used to exist. (Point to the
dinosaur fossils.) This dinosaur does not exist
anymore. It is not living.
412
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Bananastock/Jupiterimages. (b) BananaStock/PunchStock.
MOVEMENT
5. High-ve your closest classmate. Your hands
connect when they come together in a high
ve.
6. Draw ten dots on a piece of paper. Can you
connect them to make a design?
7. Now lets say connects together three more
times: connects, connects, connects.
Word 2
exist
PARTNER TALK
5. Can you think of things that used to exist?
Tell your partner. (Possible answers: dinosaurs,
breakfast that you ate this morning, cave
dwellers)
6. I am going to name some things. Tell your
partner what exists and what does not exist.
amingos
unicorns
pencils
pancakes
dragons
7. Now lets say exist together three more times:
exist, exist, exist.
Word 3
future
Word 4
solve
Word 3
future
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is future. Say it

with me: future. The future is a time that will
happen in time. Something that will happen in
the future has not happened yet. Maybe in the
future we will all ride a spaceship to school.
2. En espaol, future quiere decir el tiempo
que no ha pasado y no est pasando ahora,
el futuro. Algo que ocurre en el futuro no
ha ocurrido todava. Depronto en el futuro
montaremos en naves espaciales para llegar a
la escuela.
3. Future in English and futuro in Spanish are
word future. These kids are too young to
graduate. They hope to graduate in the future.
They will graduate when they are older.
PARTNER TALK
5. What do you think you will look like in the
future? Will your hair be long or short? What
kind of clothes do you think you will be
wearing then? Tell your partner.
6. With your partner, think of some things
that you would like to happen in the future.
(graduate, get a new bike, invent something
important, get a good job)
7. Now lets say future together three more
times: future, future, future.
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is solve. Say it

with me: solve. When you solve something,
you nd the answer to it. When you solve a
math problem, you have found the answer.
2. En espaol, to solve quiere decir encontrar
la respuesta a algo, solucionar. Cuando
solucionas un problema matemtico, has
encontrado la respuesta.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows how to
solve a problem. This boy worked on a math
problem. He found the answer. Now that he
can solve the problem, he can explain it to his
classmates.
solve
PARTNER TALK
4. Think of a problem you had to solve by
yourself. Were you successful? Tell your
partner what you did to solve the problem.
5. What kind of problems do you like to solve?
Do you like solving math problems or do you
prefer to solve a crossword puzzle? Talk to
your partner about it.
6. Now lets say solve together three more times:
solve, solve, solve.
414
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) DreamPictures/Vstock/Blend Images/Getty Images. (b) Little Blue Wolf Productions/Corbis.
ELD Content Words

Unit 2 Week 5 George Washington
Carver/Golda Meir
college, education,
Prime Minister, scientist
college
education
Prime Minister
scientist
ROUTINE
4. Explain how these four words t into a group, or category. During independent
work time, have children write sentences for each word.
5. Point out the following cognates: educacin, Primer Ministro, cientca.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Photodisc/Ryan McVay/Getty Images. (tr) Digital Vision/Getty Images.
(bl) Hulton Archive/Getty Images. (br) Tom Grill/Corbis.
415
Word 1
greets
Unit 3 Week 1 The Statue of Liberty
Word 2
huge
Word 1
greets
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is greets. Say it with

me: greets. When people greet someone, they
say or do something to show that they know
they are there and to welcome them. You can
greet people by hugging them, by shaking
their hand, or by simply saying hi.
2. En espaol, to greet quiere decir decir
o mostrar a alguien que lo ves y le das la
bienvenida; saludar. Puedes saludar a otro
dndole un abrazo, dndose la mano o
simplemente dicindole hola.
3. Now lets look at a picture of a woman who
greets her friend. (Point to the women.) The
woman in the yellow blouse looks happy to
see her friend. She greets her by giving her a
hug. The friends probably havent seen each
other in a long time.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is huge. Say it

with me: huge. Something that is huge is very
big. Yesterday I saw a huge dog. It was as big
as a small pony!
2. En espaol, huge quiere decir algo muy
grande, enorme. Ayer vi un perro enorme. Era
tan grande que pareca un poni.
something that is huge. (Point to the
tree.) This tree is huge. Just looking from
the bottom you can tell how huge it is by
comparing it with the boy. The person in front
is a lot smaller than the tree.
418
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Big Cheese Photo/PunchStock. (b) Steven P. Lynch/McGraw-Hill Companies.
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend you saw your partner at the grocery
store. How would you greet him or her?
Would you say hi or just wave? Share with
the class.
5. Pretend that your best friend just came
back from a two-month vacation out of the
country. How would you greet him or her?
Finish this sentence:
I would greet him/her by
.
6. Now lets say greets together three more
times: greets, greets, greets.
Word 2
huge
PARTNER TALK
4. Picture an elephant, a giraffe, and a squirrel
in your head. Which one of these animals is
huge? Which is not? Talk about this with your
partner.
5. Think of a huge building that you have seen.
Where was it? What did it look like? How did
you feel when you stood next to it? (Call on a
few students for their responses.)
6. Now lets say huge together three more times:
huge, huge, huge.
Word 3
immigrant
Word 4
supports
Word 3
immigrant
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is immigrant.

Say it with me: immigrant. An immigrant is
someone who comes to live in a country that
is different from the country where he or
she was born. In the United States there are
immigrants from all over the world.
2. En espaol, immigrant quiere decir una
persona que se muda del pas donde naci
a otro, inmigrante. En Estados Unidos hay
inmigrantes de todas partes del mundo.
3. Immigrant in English and inmigrante in Spanish
immigrants. (Point to the people on the
wooden walkway.) These people have their
luggage and are getting on a boat to move to
another country. These people are immigrants.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is supports.

Say it with me: supports. Something supports
another thing by holding it up. The legs of
a chair support it so that you can sit on the
chair without falling off.
2. En espaol, to support quiere decir sostener
algo dejndolo que descanse sobre otra cosa,
apoyar. Las patas de la silla apoyan el asiento
para que uno se pueda sentar sin caerse.
something that supports something else.
(Point to the ski lift.) The metal cords support
the ski lift. Without the cords, the ski lift
would not be able to reach the top of the hill.
PARTNER TALK
5. Is the person an immigrant if the person
moves to another state? How about another
country? Discuss this with your partner.
6. Many children have parents or grandparents
who were immigrants from another country.
Which country did they come from? (Call on a
few students for their responses.)
7. Now lets say immigrant together three more
times: immigrant, immigrant, immigrant.
Word 4
supports
MOVEMENT
4. Stand up. Now, lean against your partner.
Your partner is supporting you.
5. Stand on one foot. What supports you when
you lose your balance? What do you hang
on to?
6. Now lets say supports together three more
times: supports, supports, supports.
420
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Library of Congress Prints and Photographs Division Washington, D.C. [LC-USZ62-12595]. (b) Goodshoot/PunchStock.
pulls, force, gravity, fall
ELD Content Words

Unit 3 Week 1 Gravity
pulls
force
gravity
fall
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: fuerza, gravedad.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (tr) Jim Wileman/Alamy Images.
(bl) Digital Archive Japan/Alamy Images. (br) Photodisc/PhotoLink/Getty Images.
421
Word 1
tricked
Unit 3 Week 2 Rabbit and Coyote: A Mexican Tale
Word 2
tasty
Word 1
tricked
Unit 3 Week 2 Rabbit and Coyote: A Mexican Tale
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is tricked. Say it

with me: tricked. When you get tricked, you
are fooled by someone else. You can get
tricked into thinking or doing something that
you wished you did not do.
2. En espaol, to trick quiere decir engaar a
alguien. A uno lo pueden engaar para que
crea algo o haga algo que no crea antes o no
quera hacer.
3. Now lets look at a picture of an animal who
got tricked. (Point to the coyote.) In your
story, you read that the rabbit fooled the
coyote into drinking a lot of water. The rabbit
tricked the coyote.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is tasty. Say it

with me: tasty. When food is tasty, it tastes
good. Food that is tasty is delicious. I think ice
cream is tasty.
2. En espaol, tasty quiere decir que sabe rico,
sabroso. La comida sabrosa es deliciosa. El
helado me parece sabroso.
3. Now lets look at a picture that shows children
enjoying some tasty food. (Point to the
children.) They like watermelon because they
think its tasty. I think watermelon is
tasty, too.
424
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photos.com/Jupiterimages. (b) Stockbyte/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Turn to your partners and tell them to say silk
three times. Now ask them what cows drink.
(Pause for children to do this.) If your partner
said milk, then you just tricked your partner
into saying that! Cows dont drink milk. They
drink water.
5. Did you know that its impossible to nod your
head with your mouth open? (Wait for some
students to try it out.) See, I just tricked you
into making yourself look silly!
6. Now lets say tricked together three more
times: tricked, tricked, tricked.
Word 2
tasty
PARTNER TALK
4. What do you think is tastier, apples or
bananas? carrots or celery? strawberries or
blueberries? Share your thoughts with your
partner, and compare your opinions about
tasty food.
5. What is the tastiest food you can think of?
Why do you think its so tasty? (Call on a few
students for their responses.)
6. Now lets say tasty together three more times:
tasty, tasty, tasty.
ELD Content Words

Unit 3 Week 2 From Farm to Home
grow, branch, grafting,

apple picker
grow
branch
grafting
apple picker
ROUTINE
425
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Siede Preis/Getty Images. (tr) David Frazier/Royalty-Free/Corbis.
(bl) Envision/Corbis. (br) Corbis/Jupiterimages.
Word 1
noisy
Unit 3 Week 3 Sounds All Around
Word 2
travel
Word 1
noisy
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is noisy. Say it with

me: noisy. The word noisy is used to describe
something that makes a loud sound. A barking
dog or a crying baby can be noisy. Something
noisy is usually unpleasant to hear.
2. En espaol, noisy quiere decir que hace
mucho ruido, ruidoso. Un perro que ladra
o un beb que llora puede ser ruidoso.
Algo ruidoso muchas veces es considerado
desagradable al odo.
3. Now lets look at a picture of a noisy scene.
(Point to the cars.) These cars are going slowly
because they are stuck in trafc. Some of the
drivers are honking their horns to make trafc
move faster. It is probably very noisy on this
highway.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is travel. Say it

with me: travel. To travel is to go from one
place to another. This summer I will travel to
Puerto Rico.
2. En espaol, to travel quiere decir ir de un
lugar a otro, viajar. Este verano viajar a
Puerto Rico.
things travel. (Point to the airplane and truck.)
There are many ways to travel from one place
to anothersuch as by plane or by car, bus
or truck.
PARTNER TALK
4. Is there more noise in the city or in the
country? What makes one place noisier than
the other? What is the noisiest place youve
ever visited? (Have partners answer these
questions with each other.)
5. A good time to be noisy is when youre
playing outside with your friends. When is it a
bad time to be noisy? (Have partners answer
these questions with each other. Possible
responses: inside a classroom, when someone
is sleeping, in a movie theater)
6. Now lets say noisy together three more times:
noisy, noisy, noisy.
Word 2
travel
MOVEMENT
4. Stand up. Now take a step to your right. You
just traveled one step!
5. Estimate how far you have to travel to be
right next to me. How many steps? Now hold
up your ngers to show me the number of
steps you think it would take.
6. Now lets say travel together three more
times: travel, travel, travel.
428
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Copyright 1997 IMS Communications LTD/Capstone Design. All Rights Reserved./FlatEarth Images. (b) Steve Allen/Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages.

Word 3
types
Word 3
types
Unit 3 Week 3 Sounds
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is types. Say it with

me: types. We use the word types to describe
the category that something belongs in.
There are many different types of owers.
Some are tall, and some are short; some have
bright colors, and some have soft colors. Some
owers grow in hot weather, and some grow
in cooler weather.
2. En espaol, types quiere decir las categoras
en las que se pueden organizar las cosas,
tipos. Hay muchos tipos de ores. Algunas
son altas, otras cortas, unas de colores vivos
y otras de colores pasteles. Algunas ores
crecen en climas clidos, mientras otras
preeren el clima fro o templado.
3. Types in English and tipos in Spanish are
430
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Jupiterimages/Comstock Images/Alamy Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Now lets look at a picture that shows a type
of musical instrument. (Point to the piano.)
There are many types of musical instruments.
This type is called a piano. Other types of
instruments are utes, trumpets, and drums.
5. Which food does not belong in this type
of food group?
carrot
celery
banana
broccoli
6. How many types of animals can you think
of? Take turns naming types of animals with
your partner. Whoever can list more types of
animals, wins!
7. Now lets say types together three more times:
types, types, types.
ELD Content Words

Unit 3 Week 3 What Is Sound?
yell, soft, hear, loud
yell
soft
hear
loud
ROUTINE
431
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Michael N. Paras/Corbis. (tr) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
(bl) Digital Vision/Anne Ackermann/Getty Images. (br) PhotoSpin, Inc/Alamy Images.
Word 1
fever
Word 2
fault
Unit 3 Week 4 Knitting Fever
Word 1
fever
Unit 3 Week 4 Knitting Fever
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is fever. Say it with

me: fever. In English, we use the word fever to
describe an overwhelming feeling. I really love
baseball. When my favorite team plays, I will
drop everything to watch the game. I have
baseball fever.
2. La palabra fever se usa en ingls para describir
un sentimiento abrumador por algo, una
acin. Se le dice ebre en espaol. Cuando
mi equipo preferido juega, dejo todo para
poder ver el partido. Siento ebre por
el bisbol.
3. Now lets look at a picture of people who
have a fever. (Point to the people.) Party fever,
that is! Look how excited they are. They have
an overwhelming feeling of excitement.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is fault. Say it

with me: fault. When something is your fault,
then you did something wrong. One time, I
woke up late in the morning. It was my fault
because I forgot to set my alarm.
2. En espaol, fault quiere decir culpa. Cuando
tienes la culpa de algo, causaste que algo
ocurriera, normalmente algo malo. Una vez
me levant tarde. Fue mi culpa porque se me
olvid ajustar mi despertador.
something that is someones fault. (Point to
spilled milk.) The girl is cupping her hands to
try to stop the milk and cereal from spilling
on to the oor. She knocked the milk she had
poured and the box of cereal. The mess is her
fault.
434
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Ariel Skelley/ Blend Images/Getty Images. (b) Stanley Fellerman/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Have you ever had baseball or football fever?
This happens when you love a sport a lot.
Have you ever had sports fever? Use the
sentence frame: Ive had
fever.
5. When you have dancing fever, you really want
to dance. When you have singing fever, you
really want to sing. What other types of fevers
can you think of? (party fever, soccer fever,
baking fever, reading fever)
6. Now lets say fever together three more times:
fever, fever, fever.
Word 2
fault
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend you spilled water on the oor and
didnt clean it up. Then someone slipped and
fell. Since it was your fault that they fell, what
do you say to that person?
5. Think of the last time something was entirely
your fault. What did you do wrong? What
should you have done instead? Tell your
partner.
6. Now lets say fault together three more times:
fault, fault, fault.
ELD Content Words

Unit 3 Week 4 Farming Yesterday and Today
grain, mill, wheel,

technology
grain
mill
wheel
technology
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: grano, tecnologa.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Creatas Images/Jupiterimages. (tr) Digital Vision/PunchStock.
(bl) Pixtal/Bryan Mullennix/age fotostock. (br) Photodisc/Lawrence Lawry/Getty Images.
435
Word 1
useless
Unit 3 Week 5 Two Marjories
Word 2
protect
Word 1
useless
Unit 3 Week 5 Two Marjories
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is useless. Say it

with me: useless. When something is useless,
you can no longer use it. Many things become
useless after they break. You cant use it
anymore because it doesnt work right.
2. En espaol, useless quiere decir que ya no se
puede utilizar o sacar provecho, que no sirve,
intil. Cuando algo se parte, se vuelve intil.
Ya no lo puedes usar porque no funciona bien.
is useless. (Point to the broken plate.) Oh, no!
This plate broke. Now its completely useless.
PARTNER TALK
4. Other things, like an umbrella with holes or a
pen without ink, are useless. How can a lamp
become useless? How about a spoon? a shoe?
a bag? Discuss these with your partner.
5. Sometimes, things that are useless to you can
be useful to someone else. For example, you
may think that a used popsicle stick is useless,
but someone else may be collecting popsicle
sticks for a project. How do you think some of
your useless junk could be used? Share your
ideas with your partner.
6. Now lets say useless together three more
times: useless, useless, useless.
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is protect. Say it

with me: protect. Something that can protect
another thing keeps it from harm or danger.
A raincoat can protect you from the rain by
helping to keep you dry.
2. En espaol, to protect quiere decir prevenir
algo de lesin o peligro, proteger. Un
impermeable te protege de la lluvia al
mantenerte abrigado y seco.
3. To protect in English and proteger in Spanish
something that can protect another thing.
(Point to the man in the hard hat.) The hat that
this man is wearing is called a hard hat. A hard
hat can protect your head from falling objects.
He is overseeing a construction project, and he
does not want anything to fall on his head.
protect
PARTNER TALK
5. Pretend that its really hot and sunny outside.
How would you protect your skin from getting
sunburned? (Possible answers: I would wear a
hat; I would put on sunblock; I would stay in
the shade.)
6. Hens sit on their eggs to protect them. So do
other animals. How do other animals protect
their babies from harm? Think of as many
examples as possible, and tell your partner.
7. Now lets say protect together three more
times: protect, protect, protect.
438
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) John Lund/Nevada Wier/Blend Images/Getty Images. (b) image 100/PunchStock.
ELD Content Words

Unit 3 Week 5 From City to Country
community, urban,
suburban, rural
community
urban
suburban
rural
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: comunidad, urbano, suburbano, rural.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Sean Cayton/The Image Works, Inc. (tr) John Aikins/Corbis.
(bl) Photodisc/Getty Images. (br) David Frazier/Corbis.
439
Word 1
grant
Word 2
order
Unit 4 Week 1 Three Wishes
Word 1
grant
Unit 4 Week 1 Three Wishes
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is grant. Say it with

me: grant. To grant means to give someone
what he or she asked for. You must ask a
teacher to grant you permission to get a drink
from the water fountain.
2. En espaol, to grant quiere decir darle a
alguien lo que ha pedido, otorgar. Debes
pedirle a tu profesora que te otorgue permiso
para ir a tomar agua de la fuente.
3. This picture shows a genies lamp. In some
childrens stories, a genie is a magic spirit
who grants wishes. The genie and the lamp
together play an important role. After the
character rubs the lamp, his wishes will
come true.
PARTNER TALK
4. Pretend you are holding the lamp in the
picture. Rub the lamp. Then tell your partner
three wishes you would like a genie to grant.
5. What is one thing you would like your mom or
dad to grant you permission to do? Tell your
partner.
6. Now lets say grant together three more times:
grant, grant, grant.
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is order. Say it

with me: order. When you order someone, you
tell that person what to do. I order my dog
to sit, to stay, and to lie down. My dog does
what I order it to do.
2. En espaol, to order quiere decir decirle
a alguien qu hacer, mandar, ordenar. Le
ordeno a mi perro que se siente, que se quede
y que se acueste. Mi perro hace lo que le
ordeno.
3. To order in English and ordenar in Spanish are
meaning of order. The boy in this picture is
being ordered to do something. The person
pointing a nger at him is telling him he must
do something.
order
MOVEMENT
5. Im going to order you to do some things. Do
what I order you to do.
Take out a pencil.
Stand up next to your seat.
Sit down.
Put away your pencil.
6. Now play a game of Simon Says with a
partner. Take turns being Simon and ordering
your partner to do things, such as stand on
one foot. Remember: if your partner doesnt
say Simon Says, you should not follow the
order.
7. Now lets say order together three more times:
order, order, order.
442
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Jupiterimages/Comstock Images/Getty Images. (b) Bananastock/PunchStock.
ELD Content Words

Unit 4 Week 1 Objects in Motion
motion, simple machine,

position, ramp
motion
simple machine
position
ramp
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: mquina simple, posicin, rampa.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Comstock/Jupiterimages. (tr) Alan Oliver/Alamy Images.
(bl) Photodisc/Thomas Northcut/Getty Images. (br) Digital Vision/Steve Cole/Getty Images.
443
Word 1
safety
Word 2
safely
Unit 4 Week 2 Street Safety
Word 1
safety
Unit 4 Week 2 Street Safety
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is safety. Say it

with me: safety. Safety means freedom from
danger or the chance of getting hurt. For
your safety, you should always look both ways
before crossing the street.
2. En espaol, safety quiere decir libre de
peligro o del riesgo de lastimarse, seguridad.
Por su seguridad, siempre deben mirar a
ambos lados antes de cruzar la calle.
3. This picture shows a girl fastening her seat
belt. You wear a seat belt for safety when you
ride in a car.
PARTNER TALK
4. With your partner, make a list of safety rules
we follow when we are on the playground
and in school. (Examples include: no pushing;
no yelling; no running in the halls)
5. Think about an activity you like to do, such as
playing football or riding your bike. Tell your
partner what special clothes or equipment you
wear for safety. (Examples include: helmets,
shoulder pads, knee pads)
6. Now lets say safety together three more
times: safety, safety, safety.
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is safely. Say

it with me: safely. When you do something
safely, you do it carefully and correctly to
avoid getting hurt or hurting someone else.
Its important to play safely in a swimming
pool.
2. En espaol, safely quiere decir de una manera
atenta, cuidadosa y correcta para evitar
lastimarse o lastimar a otra persona; hacer
algo con prudencia. Es importante jugar con
prudencia en la piscina para evitar incidentes.
meaning of safely. This woman is driving
safely. She is checking to make sure there are
no cars behind her before she backs her car up.
safely
MOVEMENT
4. Pretend you are carrying something breakable.
Show me how you would walk with this item
and then set it down safely.
5. Now pretend you are about to cross a busy
street. Show me what you would do to cross
safely.
6. Now lets say safely together three more
times: safely, safely, safely.
446
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Image Source Pink/Getty Images. (b) Blend Images/Dave & Les Jacobs/Getty Images.
ELD Content Words

Unit 4 Week 2 Magnets Push and Pull
magnet, magnetic eld,

iron, attract
magnet
magnetic eld
iron
attract
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognate: atraer.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Ken Cavanagh/McGraw-Hill Companies. (tr) Photodisc/Nick Koudis/Getty Images.
(bl) Leslie Garland Picture Library/McGraw-Hill Companies. (br) moodboard/Alamy Images.
447
Word 1
earn
Unit 4 Week 3 People Work
Word 2
job
Word 1
earn
Unit 4 Week 3 People Work
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is earn. Say it with

me: earn. Earn means to get something, such
as money, for work that you do. You might
earn an allowance by doing chores.
2. En espaol, to earn quiere decir recibir algo,
como dinero, por el trabajo que se hace;
ganar. Tal vez te ganes tu mesada haciendo
ocios en la casa.
3. This picture shows some children working at
a lemonade stand. They are earning money by
selling lemonade. What do you think they will
do with the money that they earn?
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is job. Say it

with me: job. A job is something you do to
earn money. Being a teacher is my job.
2. En espaol, job quiere decir lo que haces para
ganar dinero, empleo, trabajo. Mi trabajo es
ensear. Soy un profesor.
meaning of job. This woman has a job as
a cashier at a store. She earns money by
working at the store.
450
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Corbis. (b) Jose Luis Pelaez Inc/Blend Images/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. With your partner, make a list of some
things you could do in your community or
neighborhood to earn money. (Examples
include: walking dogs, selling lemonade,
raking leaves, collecting cans)
5. Tell a partner about something you would
like to buy. Figure out how much money you
would need to earn to buy it. Then talk with
your partner about the best way for you to
earn money to buy this thing.
6. Now lets say earn together three more times:
earn, earn, earn.
Word 2
job
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell your partner about a job that you would
like to have one day. Tell why you want this
job. Explain why this jobs seems important
and enjoyable.
5. With your partner, make a list of some of the
jobs people do at a school. Tell one thing
each person does as part of his or her job.
(Examples include: principal, nurse, teachers,
coaches, secretaries, bus drivers)
6. Now lets say job together three more times:
job, job, job.
ELD Content Words

Unit 4 Week 3 Trading with Other Countries
product, goods,
trade, resources
product
goods
trade
resources
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: producto, recursos.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Photodisc/Kim Steele/Getty Images. (tr) Medioimages/Photodisc/Getty Images.
(bl) Photodisc/F. Schussler/PhotoLink/Getty Images. (br) Digital Vision/Visions of America/Joe Sohm/Getty Images.
451
Word 1
national
Unit 4 Week 4 Bald Eagles
Word 2
passed
Word 1
national
Unit 4 Week 4 Bald Eagles
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is national. Say it

with me: national. National means belonging
to a whole country. Before sporting events,
we sing our national anthem to honor our
country.
2. En espaol, national quiere decir que
pertenece a un pas o una nacin, nacional.
Antes de eventos deportivos importantes,
cantamos el himno nacional en honor a
nuestro pas.
3. National in English and nacional in Spanish are
4. This map shows the United States. Something
that is national belongs to everyone who lives
in the 50 states shown on this map.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is passed. Say

it with me: passed. Passed means approved
of something and made it into a law. Some
cities have passed laws banning dogs from
restaurants.
2. En espaol, to pass quiere decir aprobar
de algo y hacerlo una ley, pasar. Algunas
ciudades han pasado leyes que prohiben la
entrada de perros a los restaurantes.
meaning of passed. In this picture, President
Bush is signing a bill. After he signed it, the
bill was passed and became a law.
454
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Jennifer Thermes/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Chip Somodevilla/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
5. Some holidays, like Presidents Day, are
national holidays. They are celebrated by the
whole country. With your partner, make a list
of other national holidays. (Examples include:
Martin Luther King Day, Presidents Day,
Fourth of July, Veterans Day, Columbus Day)
6. With your partner, draw a picture of two
national symbols. Label your pictures, and tell
what each stands for. Share your pictures with
the class.
7. Now lets say national together three more
times: national, national, national.
Word 2
passed
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk with a partner about a law you would
like to see passed in our classroom. Tell why
you think the law should be passed.
5. Now write your law on a sheet of paper.
Imagine that your partner is class president.
Have your partner sign the law. After your
partner has signed it, the law has passed!
6. Now lets say passed together three more
times: passed, passed, passed.
cub, life cycle,

population, environment
ELD Content Words
Unit 4 Week 4 The Life Cycle of Black Bears
cub
life cycle
population
environment
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognate: poblacin.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Creatas Images/PunchStock. (tr) Image 100/PunchStock.
(bl) Purestock/PunchStock. (br) Leo Fiedler/Royalty-Free/Corbis.
455
Word 1
guest
Unit 4 Week 5 The Summer Party
Word 2
thought
Word 1
guest
Unit 4 Week 5 The Summer Party
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is guest. Say it with

me: guest. A guest is a person who is invited
to another persons home for a party, a visit,
or dinner. You invite guests to a birthday
party.
2. En espaol, guest se dice invitado. Un
invitado es una persona que ha recibido una
invitacin a la casa de otra para una esta,
una visita o una cena. Mis invitados llegaron a
celebrar conmigo mi cumpleaos.
3. This picture shows the meaning of the word
guest. (Point to the people arriving at the
house.) These people have been invited to
dinner at the home of their friends. The guests
and their friends are happy to see each other.
PARTNER TALK
4. Tell a partner about a time when you were
a guest at someones house. What were you
invited to do? How did you feel about being
a guest in someone elses house? How do you
act when you are a guest?
5. Pretend you have invited someone to your
house. Have your partner pretend to be a
guest and knock on your door. Open the door
and greet your guest in a way that will make
him or her feel welcome. Then switch roles.
6. Now lets say guest together three more times:
guest, guest, guest.
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is thought. Say

it with me: thought. If you thought about
something, you spent time picturing it in your
head. Before I packed my lunch, I thought
about what I wanted to eat today.
2. En espaol, to think quiere decir tener algo
en la mente, pensar. Antes de guardar mi
almuerzo, pens sobre qu querra comer hoy.
3. Now, lets look at a picture that shows the
meaning of thought. In this picture, the girl
thought about getting together with some
of her friends that she hasnt seen for a long
time. She looks like she is concentrating on
picturing her idea.
thought
PARTNER TALK
4. Have you thought about what you would
like to do after school today? Think about it
for a while. Then share your thoughts with a
partner.
5. Think about a time when something turned
out differently than you thought it would. Tell
your partner what you thought would happen
and what actually happened.
6. Now lets say thought together three more
times: thought, thought, thought.
458
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Blend Images/Ariel Skelley/Getty Images. (b) Jose Luis Pelaez, Inc/Blend Images/Jupiterimages.
ELD Content Words

Unit 4 Week 5 Producers and Consumers
producer, consumer,
factory, sell
producer
consumer
factory
sell
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: productor, consumidor.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Image Source Black/Jupiterimages. (tr) Nature Picture Library/Alamy Images.
(bl) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (br) Bennett Dean/Eye Ubiquitous/Alamy Images.
459
Word 1
form
Unit 5 Week 1 Plants
Word 2
ripe
Word 1
form
Unit 5 Week 1 Plants
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is form. Say it with

me: form. Form means to grow, take shape,
or develop. Flowers form from buds.
2. En espaol, to form quiere decir crecer,
tomar forma, desarrollarse; formarse. Las
ores se forman de capullos.
3. Form in English and formar in Spanish are
form. Seeds form inside an apple. When the
seeds are planted, a tree will form from the
seeds.
PARTNER TALK
5. Many animals, such as birds, reptiles, and
insects, form from eggs. Draw a picture of
an egg. Then give your partner clues about
the animal that will form from the egg. For
example, you might say: It will say quack,
quack. Have your partner try to guess what
animal will form from the egg you drew.
6. Draw a picture of a ower bud. Then have
your partner draw a picture of the ower that
will form from the bud you drew. Be creative.
7. Now lets say form together three more times:
form, form, form.
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is ripe. Say

it with me: ripe. Ripe means fully grown.
When a fruit is ripe, it is ready to eat.
2. En espaol, ripe quiere decir completamente
crecido, maduro. Cuando una fruta est
madura, est lista para ser comida.
3. When tomatoes are ripe, they turn red. Only
one of these tomatoes is ripe. (Point to the red
tomato.)
ripe
PARTNER TALK
4. Think of your favorite fruit. Tell your partner
how fruit looks and tastes when it is ripe.
5. Work with your partner to draw a picture of
a ripe strawberry, a ripe orange, and a ripe
peach. Share your pictures with the class.
6. Now lets say ripe together three more times:
ripe, ripe, ripe.
462
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) PhotoLink/Photodisc/Getty Images. (b) Photodisc/Kent Knudson/PhotoLink/Getty Images.
ELD Content Words

Unit 5 Week 1 What Do Flowers, Fruits, and Seeds Do?
ower, stamen,
pistil, fruit
ower
stamen
pistil
fruit
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: or, fruta, estambre.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Image Plan/Getty Images. (tr) Photodisc/Daisuke Morita/Getty Images.
(bl) Photodisc/Daisuke Morita/Getty Images. (br) Comstock/PunchStock.
463
Word 1
raw
Unit 5 Week 2 Learn About Tomatoes
Word 2
sliced
Word 1
raw
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is raw. Say it with

me: raw. Raw means not cooked. Some
fruits and vegetables can be eaten raw, but it
is better to always cook meat.
2. En espaol, raw quiere decir que no ha sido
cocinado, crudo. Algunas frutas y verduras
pueden ser comidas crudas, pero la carne debe
ser cocinada.
raw. These vegetables are raw. They have not
been cooked.
PARTNER TALK
4. With your partner, make a list of the raw
vegetables that you eat. (Examples include
celery, carrots, tomatoes, cauliower, and
broccoli.)
5. Draw a picture of a salad you would like to
eatll it with your favorite raw fruits and
vegetables. Tell your partner about your salad.
6. Now lets say raw together three more times:
raw, raw, raw.
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is sliced. Say it

with me: sliced. Something that is sliced is cut
into thin, at pieces. Bread is usually sliced for
sandwiches.
2. En espaol, to slice quiere decir cortar en
tajadas, o pedazos delgados y planos. El pan
normalmente es cortado en tajadas para hacer
emparedados o sndwiches.
sliced. The loaf of bread has been sliced.
sliced
MOVEMENT
4. Pretend you have a loaf of bread in front of
you. Show me how you would cut a slice.
Then tell me what you like to put on a slice of
bread.
5. Now work with a partner. Imagine you are on
a cooking show. Pretend to slice ingredients
for a sandwich. Then put your sandwich
together and tell us what sliced ingredients
are on your sandwich.
6. Now lets say sliced together three more times:
sliced, sliced, sliced.
466
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photographers Choice RF/Barry Yee/Getty Images. (b) IT Stock/Polka Dot Images/PunchStock.

Word 3
taste
Word 3
taste
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is taste. Say it with

me: taste. Taste means to put a little bit of
something in your mouth to test the avor.
You should always taste something before you
say you dont like it.
2. En espaol, to taste quiere decir poner un
pedazo pequeo de algo en tu boca para
averiguar el sabor, probar. Siempre deberan
probar algo antes de decir que no les gusta.
3. This boy tastes some whipped cream. He put
a little bit in his mouth to see if he likes the
avor. If he likes what he tastes, he might eat
more.
468
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Tim Pannell/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Work with a partner. Pretend you are making
soup. Add vegetables and water to your pot.
Stir. Now take a taste of your soup. Add salt,
pepper, or another seasoning. Take another
taste to see if the avor is just right.
5. Now imagine you are tasting ice cream.
Describe the taste to your partner. See if
your partner can guess the avor you are
describing.
6. Now lets say taste together three more times:
taste, taste, taste.
ELD Content Words

Unit 5 Week 2 What Is Soil?
soil, sandy, clay, topsoil
soil
sandy
clay
topsoil
ROUTINE
469
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Photodisc/Nancy R. Cohen/Getty Images. (tr) National Geographic/Pete Ryan/Getty Images.
(bl) Ken Cavanagh/McGraw-Hill Companies. (br) GAP Photos/Richard Bloom/Getty Images.
Word 1
buried
Unit 5 Week 3 What Are Living Fossils?
Word 2
outline
Word 1
buried
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is buried. Say it

with me: buried. Something that is buried
is covered by something else, such as dirt or
snow. We could not see the acorns after they
fell from the tree. The acorns were buried by
the many leaves on the ground.
2. En espaol, buried quiere decir bajo la tierra,
cubierto por completo con algo como nieve
o tierra; enterrado. No podamos ver las
bellotas despus de que se cayeron al suelo.
Las bellotas fueron enterradas por la cantidad
de hojas en el suelo.
3. The car in this picture is buried in the snow.
Its owner will have to dig it out if she wants
to go somewhere.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is outline. Say

it with me: outline. An outline is the line that
marks the edge of an object. When you color
in a coloring book, you color in an outline.
2. En espaol, outline quiere decir la lnea que
marca los bordes de un objeto, contorno.
Cuando coloreas en un libro para colorear,
coloreas el contorno de algo.
3. This picture shows the outline of a sh. Watch
my nger as I trace the outline of this sh.
(Trace your nger along the outline of the
sh.)
472
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) image100/Alamy Images. (b) Photodisc/Getty Images.
MOVEMENT
4. Pretend you are a dog. Show us how you
would bury a bone.
5. Now lets all pretend we are burying a
treasure. Come join me at the front of the
room. Use an imaginary shovel to help me
bury the treasure. When were done, well
hold up our shovels and say, We buried the
treasure!
6. Now lets say buried together three more
times: buried, buried, buried.
Word 2
outline
PARTNER TALK
4. Have your partner spread one hand at on a
piece of paper. Then trace the outline of your
partners hand onto the paper.
5. Now draw the outline of an animal. Exchange
outlines with your partner and see if you can
gure out the animal your partner outlined.
6. Now lets say outline together three more
times: outline, outline, outline.

Word 3
survive
Word 3
survive
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is survive. Say

it with me: survive. To survive means to
continue to live. People need food, water,
and shelter to survive.
2. En espaol, to survive quiere decir continuar
viviendo, sobrevivir. Las personas necesitan
alimentos, agua y refugio para sobrevivir.
3. The owers in this picture have survived a
snowstorm. They have lived even though the
ground is cold and covered with snow.
474
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Andrew Ward/Life File/Photodisc/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk with a partner about caring for a plant.
What are some basic things the plant needs in
order to survive? (Examples include: sunlight,
water, soil)
5. Animals can survive in many different places.
Think about an animal that survives in a
desert or in a very cold place. Talk with your
partner about how you think the animal
survives.
6. Now lets say survive together three more
times: survive, survive, survive.
ELD Content Words

Unit 5 Week 3 What Are Fossils?
fossil, amber, ice, tar
fossil
amber
ice
tar
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: fsil, mbar.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Photodisc/Siede Preis/PunchStock. (tr) Howard Grey/Stone/Getty Images.
(bl) Charles Smith/Corbis. (br) Martin Shields/Alamy Images.
475
Word 1
realized
Unit 5 Week 4 The Happy Hermit Crab
Word 2
molt
Word 1
realized
Unit 5 Week 4 The Happy Hermit Crab
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is realized. Say it

with me: realized. If you realized something,
you understood clearly. When my car stopped,
I realized I was out of gas.
2. En espaol, to realize quiere decir entender
algo claramente, darse cuenta de algo.
Cuando mi carro dej de andar, me di cuenta
que se le haba acabado la gasolina.
3. The boy in this picture realized he knew the
answer. He is smiling because he realized he
could do the math problem.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is molt. Say it

with me: molt. When an animal molts, it gets
rid of its outer layer of hair, skin, or feathers in
order to get ready for a new layer. Ducks molt
their feathers so they can grow new ones.
2. En espaol, to molt quiere decir perder
una capa de pelo, de piel o de plumas en
preparacin para que una nueva crezca. Los
patos pierden una capa de plumas para que
les puedan crecer plumas nuevas.
3. This picture shows a moose that is molting.
The top layer of woolly fur on its antlers,
called velvet, is coming off. A new layer will
grow to replace it.
478
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) BananaStock/PunchStock. (b) Chase Swift/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Think about a time when you realized you
were tired. What clues did your body give to
help you understand that you needed sleep?
Tell a partner.
5. Now tell your partner about a time when you
realized you had something in common with
a friend. Tell what you realized about you and
your friend.
6. Now lets say realized together three more
times: realized, realized, realized.
Word 2
molt
PARTNER TALK
4. With your partner, make a list of other
animals you have seen or read about that
molt. Share your list with the class. (Examples
include snakes, lizards, shrimp, and birds.)
5. Now look at the following list of animals.
Work with your partner to decide what layer
each of these animals molts.
chameleon
chicken
rattlesnake
rabbit
6. Now lets say molt together three more times:
molt, molt, molt.
ELD Content Words

Unit 5 Week 4 A Butterys Life/A Frogs Life
caterpillar,
pupa, hatch, adult
caterpillar
pupa
hatch
adult
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: pupa, adulto.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Creatas/PunchStock. (tr) Creatas Images/PunchStock.
(bl) Minden Pictures/Michael Durham/Getty Images. (br) Creatas Images/PunchStock.
479
Word 1
bounce
Unit 5 Week 5 Dolphins
Word 2
clicking
Word 1
bounce
Unit 5 Week 5 Dolphins
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is bounce. Say it

with me: bounce. Something that bounces hits
a surface, like the ground or a wall, and then
springs back. You can bounce up and down on
a trampoline.
2. En espaol, to bounce quiere decir saltar
cuando toca una supercie como una pared
o el piso, rebotar. Rebotas una y otra vez
cuando brincas sobre un trampoln.
3. Lets look at a picture that shows the meaning
of bounce. The boy can bounce the ball on
the oor. The ball hits the oor and comes
back.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is clicking. Say it

with me: clicking. Clicking is a series of short,
sharp sounds. When you turn the lock on a
door, it makes a clicking sound.
2. En espaol, clicking quiere decir una serie
de sonidos cortos y agudos, clic. Cuando
cierras la puerta con llave, se oye el clic de la
cerradura.
3. This person is clicking a mouse. When the
person presses the button, the mouse makes a
clicking sound.
482
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) ImageState/PunchStock. (b) Image Source/Corbis.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend that we are playing basketball.
Lets move around as if we are playing
basketball and bouncing the ball.
5. Now pretend to bounce up and down, as if
you are on a trampoline. How do your knees
move when you bounce? How do your arms
move?
6. Now lets say bounce together three more
times: bounce, bounce, bounce.
Word 2
clicking
MOVEMENT
4. Make a clicking sound with your tongue, like
this. (Demonstrate clicking your tongue.)
5. Now lets make clicking sounds by clicking our
ngers. (Snap your ngers.)
6. Now lets say clicking together three more
times: clicking, clicking, clicking.
ELD Content Words

Unit 5 Week 5 Traits from Parents
seed, traits, wing, roots
seed
traits
wing
roots
ROUTINE
483
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) PhotoLink/Photodisc/Getty Images. (tr) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock.
(bl) Steve Bowman/Corbis. (br) Designpics.com/PunchStock.
Word 1
nursery
Unit 6 Week 1 Sonoran Desert Animals
Word 2
shade
Word 1
nursery
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is nursery. Say it

with me: nursery. A nursery is a place where
young plants are grown. This weekend my
mom and I will go to the nursery. We are
going to pick out new plants for our garden.
2. En espaol, nursery quiere decir lugar donde
se crian plantas pequeas, vivero. Este n de
semana mi mam y yo iremos al vivero. Vamos
a escoger nuevas plantas para nuestro jardn.
3. This picture shows a nursery. Look at all
the baby trees that are being grown in the
greenhouse. People will buy them and plant
them in their yards. After several years, these
small plants will turn into big trees.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is shade. Say it

with me: shade. Shade is an area that is darker
and cooler than the areas around it because
it is protected from the sun. An umbrella can
give you shade on a sunny day.
2. En espaol, shade quiere decir un rea ms
oscura y fresca que las que le rodean por estar
protegida del sol, la sombra. Una sombrilla te
brinda sombra en un da asolado.
meaning of shade. The tree in this picture is
giving shade. If you sit in the shade, it will
be cooler and darker than in the sunny area
around it.
486
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Photo: Charles Smith/Corbis. (b) John A. Rizzo/Photodisc/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk with your partner about some things that
the people who work at a nursery might do.
(Examples include plant seeds, water plants,
and fertilize plants.)
5. What kinds of plants would you like to buy at
a nursery? Tell your partner.
6. Now lets say nursery together three more
times: nursery, nursery, nursery.
Word 2
shade
PARTNER TALK
4. On a hot day, where can you nd shade at
school? Do you have a favorite shady spot
on the playground? Tell a partner about a
favorite shady spot here and at home.
5. Imagine you are sitting in the shade. Tell your
partner what it feels like to sit in the shade on
a hot summer day. What games do you like to
play in the shade?
6. Now lets say shade together three more
times: shade, shade, shade.

Word 3
sheds
Word 3
sheds
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is sheds. Say it with

me: sheds. Sheds means to lose an outer
covering, such as skin or hair, to grow a new
one. A young snake sheds its skin a few times
a year. It does this so it can continue to grow
in size.
2. En espaol, to shed quiere decir perder una
cubierta externa como la piel o el pelo para
que crezaca una nueva, despojarse de su piel
o pelo. Una serpiente joven se despoja de su
piel varias veces al ao. Esto le permite seguir
creciendo en tamao.
3. This snake sheds its skin. The old skin comes
off and is replaced by new skin.
488
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Anthony Bannister; Gallo Images/Corbis.
PARTNER TALK
4. Talk with your partner about what these
things shed:
a tree in the autumn
a dog
a cat
a lizard
5. Imagine the day starts out very cold. Tell a
partner what layers of clothing you shed as
the day gets warmer.
6. Now lets say sheds together three more times:
sheds, sheds, sheds.
ELD Content Words

Unit 6 Week 1 How Plants Change to Get What They Need
stem, trunk,
branch, leaves
stem
trunk
branch
leaves
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognate: tronco.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (tr) Macmillan/McGraw-Hill.
(bl) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (br) Photodisc/Getty Images.
489
Word 1
healthy
Unit 6 Week 2 Giraffes
Word 2
spend
Word 1
healthy
Unit 6 Week 2 Giraffes
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is healthy. Say it

with me: healthy. If you are healthy, your
body is in good shape and you take good care
of yourself. When you get a checkup, the
doctor makes sure you are healthy.
2. En espaol, healthy quiere decir que
mantienes tu cuerpo sano y te cuidas,
saludable. Cuando vas por un examen
mdico, el doctor se asegura de que ests
saludable.
3. These children are riding bikes. Exercise is a
good way to keep your body healthy.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is spend. Say

it with me: spend. The way you spend your
time is the way you use it. I spend 15 minutes
driving to work in the morning.
2. En espaol, to spend quiere decir usar con
un propsito, gastar. Gast 15 minutos
manejando al trabajo en la maana.
meaning of spend. This father and his son like
to spend time reading books together. They
think it is a fun way to pass the time.
492
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Brand X Pictures/Jupiterimages. (b) Jim Arbogast/Photodisc/Getty Images.
PARTNER TALK
4. Eating a balanced diet can make you healthy.
Work with your partner to plan three meals
that will keep you healthy. Discuss the kinds
of foods that you will eat to stay healthy.
Share your ideas for meals with the class.
5. Talk with your partner about some other
habits that can keep you healthy. Then share
your ideas with the class. (Examples include
getting enough sleep, exercising, eating a
balanced diet, and washing your hands.)
6. Now lets say healthy together three more
times: healthy, healthy, healthy.
Word 2
spend
PARTNER TALK
4. Most people have a routine they follow when
they get up in the morning. Write out your
morning routine. Tell how much time you
spend doing each thing before you leave for
school. Share your morning schedule with
your partner.
5. Now talk with your partner about some ways
you like to spend your time after school. What
do you spend the most time doing? What do
you spend the least time doing?
6. Now lets say spend together three more
times: spend, spend, spend.
ELD Content Words

Unit 6 Week 2 How Can You Describe
Where Something Is?
above, below, near, far
above
below
near
far
ROUTINE
493
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Charles Smith/Corbis. (tr) Digital Vision/VisionsofAmerica/Joe Sohm/Getty Images.
(bl) Photographers Choice RF/Ross Anania/Getty Images. (br) Jupiterimages/ BananaStock/Alamy Images.
Word 1
covered
Unit 6 Week 3 Oil Spills
Word 2
layer
Word 1
covered
Unit 6 Week 3 Oil Spills
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is covered. Say it

with me: covered. Something that has been
covered has been spread with something. I
covered myself with sunscreen before I went
to the beach.
2. En espaol, covered quiere decir con algo
encima por proteccin, tapado u ocultado
con otra cosa; cubierto. Me ech bloqueador
solar por todo el cuerpo antes de salir a la
playa. Qued cubierto de la crema.
3. The bird in this picture is covered with oil. Its
feathers are completely coated with oil.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is layer. Say it

with me: layer. A layer is something that is
spread on top of something else. To make a
peanut butter and jelly sandwich, spread a
layer of jelly on one slice of bread and a layer
of peanut butter on the other slice.
2. En espaol, layer quiere decir una cosa
que se pone sobre otra para cubrirla, capa.
Para hacer un sndwich de mantequilla de
man con mermelada, esparzo una capa de
mermelada sobre una de las tajadas de pan
y una capa de mantequilla de man sobre la
otra.
meaning of layer. This vegetable lasagna has
layers of pasta, vegetables, and cheese.
496
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Stockbyte/PunchStock. (b) Blue Moon Stock/PunchStock.
PARTNER TALK
4. Imagine you are making your bed. What do
you use to cover your bed? Draw a picture
of your bed and tell your partner what you
covered it with.
5. Playing can make you very dirty. Talk with
your partner about what you might be
covered with after you did the following
activities:
playing in puddles
nger painting
going to the beach
making a snowman
6. Now lets say covered together three more
times: covered, covered, covered.
Word 2
layer
PARTNER TALK
4. Draw a four layer cake you would like to eat.
Tell your partner what each layer is made of.
5. Tell your partner how to make your favorite
sandwich. Explain how you layer the
ingredients.
6. Now lets say layer together three more times:
layer, layer, layer.
ELD Content Words

Unit 6 Week 3 How We Use Natural Resources
natural resources,
cotton, wood, salt
natural resources
cotton
wood
salt
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: recursos naturales, sal.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Photodisc/Siede Preis/Getty Images. (tr) AGStockUSA, Inc./Alamy Images.
(bl) Miguel Salmeron/Image Bank/Getty Images. (br) Evelyn Jo Hebert/McGraw-Hill Companies.
497
Word 1
wild
Unit 6 Week 4 A Wild Picnic
Word 2
missing
Word 1
wild
Unit 6 Week 4 A Wild Picnic
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is wild. Say it with

me: wild. Something that is wild is strong,
violent, and usually out of control. The wild
tornado caused a lot of damage as it spun
through the elds.
2. En espaol, wild quiere decir algo algo
fuerte, violento y fuera de control. El violento
tornado caus mucho dao al atravesar el
campo.
3. This picture shows a hurricane. A hurricane is
a storm with wild winds. It is hard to predict
what path the hurricane will take because of
its wild winds.
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is missing. Say it

with me: missing. Something that is missing is
gone. You cant complete a jigsaw puzzle if a
piece is missing.
2. En espaol, missing quiere decir que
hace falta, que se ha perdido. No puedes
completar un rompecabezas si le hace falta
una pieza.
meaning of missing. The girl is missing some
front teeth. A few teeth are gone, but new
teeth will soon grow in.
500
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Warren Faidley/Corbis. (b) Ryan McVay/Photodisc/Getty Images.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend we are palm trees blowing in
a wild wind. (Lead children in bending and
swaying as if they are being blown in a wild
wind.)
5. Now pretend you are riding a wild roller
coaster. Shake and move in your seat as you
go on a wild ride.
6. Now lets say wild together three more times:
wild, wild, wild.
Word 2
missing
PARTNER TALK
4. Draw a shirt with a missing button. Exchange
drawings with a partner. Have your partner
add the missing button to your drawing.
5. Think about something you are missing. Tell
a partner what you have lost and why you
would like to nd it.
6. Now lets say missing together three more
times: missing, missing, missing.
ELD Content Words

Unit 6 Week 4 What Are Rocks Made Of?
rock, granite,
mineral, quartz
rock
granite
mineral
quartz
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: roca, granito, mineral, cuarzo.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) John Wang/Photodisc/Getty Images. (tr) Ken Cavanagh/McGraw-Hill Companies.
(bl) Digital Vision/PunchStock. (br) Photodisc/Siede Preis/Getty Images.
501
Word 1
full
Unit 6 Week 5 A Sky Story
Word 2
greedy
Word 1
full
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is full. Say it with

me: full. When you are full, you have eaten
until you are no longer hungry. I feel full after
a big lunch.
2. En espaol, full quiere decir que ya ha
saciado su hambre, lleno. Me siento muy
lleno despus de un almuerzo grande.
3. This picture shows a woman who feels full.
She has eaten a large dinner and does not
have room in her stomach for one more bite.
MOVEMENT
4. Lets pretend we just had a pizza party. Rub
your stomach and show me with your face
that you are full.
5. If you are full, you cannot eat another bite.
Im going to offer you another piece of pizza.
Shake your head, pat your stomach, and say
No, thank you. Im full. (Pretend to offer
each child another slice of pizza.)
6. Now lets say full together three more times:
full, full, full.
Word 2
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is greedy. Say

it with me: greedy. A greedy person wants or
takes more than his or her share of something.
It is greedy to take all of the markers that are
supposed to be shared when we do art.
2. En espaol, greedy quiere decir que quiere o
toma ms de lo que le corresponde de algo,
codicioso. Si tomas todos los marcadores ue
debemos compartir cuando estamos pintando
en clase, eres codicioso.
meaning of greedy. This boy is being greedy.
He has taken more cookies than he can
possibly eat.
greedy
PARTNER TALK
4. Look again at the picture. The boy is being
greedy because he has taken too many
cookies. With your partner, decide how many
cookies he could have if he was not being
greedy. Draw a picture to show the amount.
Then share it with the class.
5. Imagine someone is acting greedy at a class
party. Talk with your partner about what the
person is doing. Then decide how the person
should act instead. For example, a greedy
person might take all the balloons. A person
who is not being greedy would take only one.
6. Now lets say greedy together three more
times: greedy, greedy, greedy.
504
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Oleksiy Maksymenko/Alamy Images. (b) Sean Justice/Corbis Premium RF/Alamy Images.
Word 3
leftovers
Word 4
wasted
Word 3
leftovers
TEACHER TALK
1. One word in the selection is leftovers. Say it

with me: leftovers. Leftovers are what remain
after a meal. There are usually leftovers from
a large meal, like Thanksgiving dinner.
2. En espaol, leftovers quiere decir lo que
queda despues de una comida, las sobras.
Usualmente hay sobras cuando hacemos cenas
grandes, como la que hacemos para el Da de
Accin de Gracias.
3. This man has a lot of leftovers in his
refrigerator. He has saved all the leftovers
so he can eat tham at a later time. Now he
is taking some of the leftovers out of the
refrigerator so he can eat them for dinner.
PARTNER TALK
4. Sometimes leftovers can make a delicious
breakfast or lunch. Tell a partner what
leftovers you like to eat. Then tell the class.
5. Imagine you have leftover meat, bread, and
vegetables. Work with a partner to create
a meal with the leftovers. Be creative. You
might make a salad, soup, stew, or sandwich.
Tell the class about the meal you made from
leftovers.
6. Now lets say leftovers together three more
times: leftovers, leftovers, leftovers.
Word 4
TEACHER TALK
1. Another word in the selection is wasted. Say

it with me: wasted. Something that is wasted
is not fully used and ends up being thrown
away. I wasted glue on my art project when I
used too much and had to wipe most of it off.
2. En espaol, to waste quiere decir no usar
por completo antes de desechar, malgastar.
Malgast la goma cuando us mucha y tuve
que limpiar la mayora del papel.
meaning of wasted. This pear has been half
eaten, so it is wasted food. The pear could
have been eaten in full, but it is being thrown
away instead.
wasted
PARTNER TALK
4. Imagine you have a box with scraps of paper,
bits of yarn, broken crayons, and scraps of
fabric. What would you make with these
things so that they are not wasted? Tell a
partner.
5. Sometimes you are not hungry for all of your
lunch. What could you do so that the food
in your lunch is not wasted? Tell a partner.
(Examples include: wrap it up to eat later;
share with a friend; feed it to an animal)
6. Now lets say wasted together three more
times: wasted, wasted, wasted.
506
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (t) Simon Battensby/Photographers Choice/Getty Images. (b) PhotoAlto/PunchStock.
ELD Content Words

Unit 6 Week 5 Rules and Laws
congress, law,
trial, President
congress
law
trial
President
ROUTINE
5. Point out the following cognates: congreso, Presidente.
Macmillan/McGraw-Hill photo credits: (tl) Charles Smith/Corbis. (tr) Lawrence Manning/Corbis.
(bl) Brand X Pictures/PunchStock. (br) Bettmann/Corbis.
507

Visual Vocabulary G2

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Visual Vocabulary G2

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Grade 2

Week 1 Key Vocabulary...........................................................................1

Week 1 Key Vocabulary......................................................................179

Week 1 Key Vocabulary........................................................................ 61

Week 1 Key Vocabulary......................................................................239

Week 1 Key Vocabulary......................................................................121

Week 1 Key Vocabulary......................................................................299

English Language Development Vocabulary ... 358A

backpack, sh tank, glasses,

Function Words and Phrases

years from now

Unit 3 Week 3 Music of the Stone Age

1. Display the card.

chorally pronounce the word to focus on articulation

Unit 1 Week 1 Davids New Friends

Unit 1 Week 1 Davids New Friend

Point to the Word 1 image on the opposite side.

1. One word in the selection is groan. Say it

1. Another word in the selection is excited. Say it

Unit 1 Week 1 Davids New Friends

Unit 1 Week 1 Davids New Friend

Point to the Word 3 image on the opposite side.

1. Another word in the selection is whisper.

1. Another word in the selection is carefully. Say

Unit 1 Week 1 Davids New Friend

5. (Point to a big apple and a small apple.)

1. Another word in the selection is different. Say

Function Words and Phrases

Unit 1 Week 1 Davids New Friend

1. In English, under means below or beneath.

4. I am going to ask some questions. Answer yes

1. In English, we use over to describe things that

4. I am going to ask some questions. Answer

Function Words and Phrases

Unit 1 Week 1 Davids New Friend

1. When something is around something else,

4. Imagine that you are at the beach. What is

1. When we say the words right at me, we mean

4. With your partner, think of sentences that

backpack, sh tank, glasses,

Unit 1 Week 2 Mr. Putter and Tabby Pour the Tea

Unit 1 Week 2 Mr. Putter and Tabby Pour the Tea

1. One word in the selection is share. Say it with

1. Another word in the selection is enjoyed.

Unit 1 Week 2 Mr. Putter and Tabby Pour the Tea

Unit 1 Week 2 Mr. Putter and Tabby Pour the Tea

1. Another word in the selection is wonderful.

1. Another word in the selection is thinning.

Unit 1 Week 2 Mr. Putter and Tabby Pour the Tea

Unit 1 Week 2 Mr. Putter and Tabby Pour the Tea

1. Another word in the selection is delighted.

1. Another word in the selection is company. Say

Function Words and Phrases

Unit 1 Week 2 Mr. Putter & Tabby Pour the Tea

1. In English, use the word alone to talk about

4. Have you ever been alone? Tell your partner

1. In English, we use the word together to talk

4. I am going to name some things. If they

Function Words and Phrases

Unit 1 Week 2 Mr. Putter & Tabby Pour the Tea

1. In English, with means next to or in the

4. Tell your partner what your favorite kind of

1. In English, without means that there is

4. With your partner, think of things that you